BMW Owner's+Manual 01402984489

Contents Owner's Manual
for Vehicle
A-Z The Ultimate

Driving Machine®
THE BMW 3 SERIES

GRAN TURISMO.
OWNER'S MANUAL.
Online Edition for Part no. 01402984489 - X/17

3 Series Owner's Manual for the vehicle
Gran Turismo Thank you for choosing a BMW.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control
you will have on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new BMW.
Also use the Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It con‐
tains important information on vehicle operation that will help
you make full use of the technical features available in your
BMW. The manual also contains information designed to en‐
hance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in
the appendix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
You can find supplementary information in the additional bro‐
chures in the onboard literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable ride.
The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.

Additional information on the Internet:
www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide

© 2017 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written
consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID5 X/17, 11 17 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached
without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Contents
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Mobility
ular topic or item is by using the index, refer to 226 Refueling
page 280. 228 Fuel
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and 230 Wheels and tires
Communication can be called up via the fol‐ 248 Engine compartment
lowing Owner's Manuals: Integrated Owner's
250 Engine oil
Manual in the vehicle, Online Owner's Manual,
254 Coolant
BMW Driver's Guide app.
256 Maintenance
258 Replacing components
6 Information 264 Breakdown assistance
270 Care
At a glance
16 Cockpit Reference
20 iDrive 276 Technical data
30 Voice activation system 278 Appendix
33 General settings 280 Everything from A to Z
45 Owner's Manual media
Controls
52 Opening and closing
72 Settings
83 Transporting children safely
88 Driving
103 Displays
121 Lights
127 Safety
152 Driving stability control systems
159 Driving comfort
183 Climate control
192 Interior equipment
202 Storage compartments
Driving tips
210 Things to remember when driving
213 Loading
216 Saving fuel

Information
Information
Using this Owner's Manual Additional sources of
information
Orientation
The fastest way to find information on a partic‐ Dealer’s service center
ular topic is by using the index. A dealer’s service center will be glad to answer
An initial overview of the vehicle is provided in questions at any time.
the first chapter.
Internet
Updates made after the editorial The Owner's Manual and general information
deadline on BMW, for example on technology, are avail‐
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐ able on the Internet: www.bmwusa.com.
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐ Integrated Owner's Manual in the
uals: vehicle
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically
▷ Online Owner's Manual. describes features and functions found in the
vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app.
displayed on the Control Display. Additional in‐
Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐ formation, refer to page 45.
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐
cle. BMW Driver’s Guide App
The BMW Driver's Guide app specifically de‐
Owner's Manual for Navigation, scribes features and functions found in the ve‐
Entertainment, Communication hicle. The app can be displayed on smart‐
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐ phones and tablets. Additional information,
ment, and Communication can be obtained as refer to page 46.
printed book from the service center.
The topics of Navigation, Entertainment, and Online Owner's Manual
Communication can be called up via the fol‐ The Online Owner's Manual specifically de‐
lowing Owner's Manuals: scribes features and functions found in the ve‐
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle. hicle. The Online Owner's Manual can be dis‐
played in any of today's browsers. Additional
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
information, refer to page 47.
6
Information
Symbols and displays Vehicle features and options

This Owner's Manual describes all models and
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
all standard, country-specific and optional
equipment that is offered in the model series.
Symbol Meaning
Therefore, this Owner's Manual also describes
Precautions that must be followed. and illustrates features and functions that are
To avoid the possibility of personal not available in your vehicle, for example be‐
injury and serious damage to the cause of the selected optional features or the
vehicle. country-specific version.
This also applies to safety-related functions
◄ End of a specific item of
and systems.
information.
When using these functions and systems, the
Measures that can be taken to help applicable laws and regulations must be ob‐
protect the environment. served.
"..." Texts in vehicle used to select For any options and equipment not described
individual functions. in this Owner's Manual, refer to the Supple‐
mentary Owner's Manuals.
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the
voice activation system. Your dealer’s service center is happy to answer
any questions that you may have about the
››...‹‹ Answers generated by the voice features and options applicable to your vehicle.
activation system.
Action steps Status of the Owner's

Action steps to be carried out are presented as Manual
numbered list. The steps must be carried out
in the defined order. Basic information
The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
1. First action step.
policy of constant development that is con‐
2. Second action step. ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue to
embody the highest quality and safety stan‐
Enumerations dards. In rare cases, therefore, the features de‐
Enumerations without mandatory order or al‐ scribed in this Owner's Manual may differ from
ternative possibilities are presented as list with those in your vehicle.
bullet points.
▷ First possibility. Updates made after the editorial
deadline
▷ Second possibility.
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, dif‐
ferences may exist between the printed Own‐
Symbols on vehicle components
er's Manual and the following Owner's Man‐
Refers to the relevant section of this uals:
Owner's Manual for further information on a
particular part or assembly. ▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
▷ Online Owner's Manual.
7
Information
Notes on updates can be found in the appen‐ sonnel, referred to in this Owner's Manual as
dix of the printed Owner's Manual for the vehi‐ "another qualified service center or repair
cle. shop".
If work is performed improperly, for instance
maintenance and repair, there is a risk of sub‐
For Your Own Safety sequent damage and related safety risks.
Intended use Parts and accessories

Follow the following when using the vehicle: BMW recommends the use of parts and ac‐
▷ Owner's Manual. cessory products approved by BMW.
▷ Information on the vehicle. Do not remove Approved parts and accessories, and advice
stickers. on their use and installation are available from
a BMW dealer's service center.
▷ Technical vehicle data.
BMW parts and accessories have been tested
▷ The traffic, speed, and safety laws where
by BMW for their safety and suitability in BMW
the vehicle is driven.
vehicles.
▷ Vehicle documents and statutory docu‐
BMW warrants genuine BMW parts and acces‐
ments.
sories.
Warranty BMW does not evaluate whether each individ‐
ual product from another manufacturer can be
Your vehicle is technically configured for the
used with BMW vehicles without presenting a
operating conditions and registration require‐
safety hazard, even if a country-specific official
ments applying in the country of first delivery,
approval was issued. BMW does not evaluate
also known as homologation. If your vehicle is
whether these products are suitable for BMW
to be operated in a different country it might be
vehicles under all usage conditions.
necessary to adapt your vehicle to potentially
differing operating conditions and registration
requirements. If your vehicle does not comply California Proposition 65 Warning
with the homologation requirements in a cer‐ California laws require us to state the following
tain country you may not be able to lodge war‐ warning:
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further in‐ Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automo‐
formation on warranty is available from a bile components and parts, including compo‐
dealer’s service center. nents found in the interior furnishings in a vehi‐
cle, contain or emit chemicals known to the
Maintenance and repairs State of California to cause cancer and birth
Advanced technology, e. g. the use of modern defects and reproductive harm. In addition,
materials and high-performance electronics, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
requires suitable maintenance and repair work. products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
cause cancer and birth defects or other repro‐
that you entrust corresponding procedures to
ductive harm. Battery posts, terminals and re‐
a BMW dealer’s service center. If you choose
lated accessories contain lead and lead com‐
to use another service facility, BMW recom‐
pounds. Wash your hands after handling. Used
mends use of a facility that performs work, for
engine oil contains chemicals that have caused
instance maintenance and repair, according to
cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect
BMW specifications with properly trained per‐
8
Information
your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and ▷ Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
water. Canadian models.
If the vehicle is not maintained according to
Service and warranty these specifications, this could result in seri‐
We recommend that you read this publication ous damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by the fol‐ not covered by the BMW New Vehicle Limited
lowing warranties: Warranty.
▷ New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
Data memory
▷ Federal Emissions System Defect War‐
ranty. General information
▷ Federal Emissions Performance Warranty. Electronic control devices are installed in the
▷ California Emission Control System Lim‐ vehicle. Some of these are necessary for the
ited Warranty. vehicle to function safely or provide assistance
Detailed information about these warranties is during driving, for instance driver assistance
listed in the Service and Warranty Information systems. Furthermore, control devices facili‐
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and tate comfort or infotainment functions.
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models. Electronic control devices contain data memo‐
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and ries, which are able to temporarily or perma‐
designed to meet the particular operating con‐ nently store information about the condition of
ditions and homologation requirements in your the vehicle, component load, maintenance re‐
country and continental region in order to de‐ quirements, technical events or faults.
liver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle This information generally records the state of
is operated under those conditions. If you wish a component, a module, a system or the envi‐
to operate your vehicle in another country or ronment, for instance:
region, you may be required to adapt your ve‐ ▷ Operating states of system components,
hicle to meet different prevailing operating e.g., fill levels, tire inflation pressure, bat‐
conditions and homologation requirements. tery status.
You should also be aware of any applicable
▷ Status messages for the vehicle and its in‐
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
dividual components, e.g., wheel rotational
country or region. In such case, please contact
speed, wheel speed, deceleration, trans‐
Customer Relations for further information.
verse acceleration, engaged safety belt in‐
dicator.
Maintenance
▷ Malfunctions and faults in important sys‐
Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain the
tem components, for instance lights and
road safety, operational reliability and the New
brakes.
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
▷ Information on vehicle-damaging events.
Specifications for required maintenance meas‐
ures: ▷ Responses by the vehicle to special situa‐
tions such as airbag deployment or en‐
▷ BMW Maintenance system.
gagement of the stability control systems.
▷ Service and Warranty Information Booklet
▷ Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature, rain
for US models.
sensor signals.
9
Information
The data is required to perform the control de‐ Data entry and data transfer into the
vice functions. Furthermore, it also serves to vehicle
recognize and correct malfunctions, and helps
the vehicle manufacturer to optimize vehicle General information
functions. The majority of this data is transient Depending on the vehicle equipment, some
and is only processed within the vehicle itself. data can be transferred into the vehicle when
Only a small proportion of the data is stored in using comfort and infotainment functions,
event or fault memories and, if needed, in the for instance:
vehicle key.
▷ Multimedia data such as music, films or
photos for playback in an integrated multi‐
Reading out data
media system.
When servicing, for instance during repairs,
▷ Address book data for use in conjunction
service processes, warranty cases, and quality
with an integrated hands-free system or an
assurance measures, this technical information
integrated navigation system.
can be read out from the vehicle together with
the vehicle identification number. A dealer’s ▷ Entered navigation destinations.
service center or another qualified service cen‐ ▷ Data on the use of Internet services.
ter or repair shop can read out the information. This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or
The socket for OBD Onboard Diagnosis re‐ is found on a device that has been connected
quired by law in the vehicle is used to read out to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone, USB stick or
the data. The data is collected, processed, and MP3 player. If this data is stored in the vehicle,
used by the relevant organizations in the serv‐ it can be deleted at any time. This data is only
ice network. The data documents the technical transmitted to third parties if expressly desired.
conditions of the vehicle, helps in locating This depends on the personal settings se‐
faults and improving quality, and is transferred lected for using online services.
to the vehicle manufacturer, if needed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the fol‐
Furthermore, the manufacturer has product lowing comfort and individual settings can be
monitoring duties to meet in line with product stored in the vehicle and modified at any time,
liability law. To fulfill these duties, the vehicle for instance:
manufacturer needs technical data from the
vehicle. Fault and event memories in the vehi‐ ▷ Settings for the seat and steering wheel
cle can be reset when a dealer’s service center positions.
or another qualified service center or repair ▷ Suspension and climate control settings.
shop performs repair or servicing work. ▷ Individual settings, for instance lighting in
Data on the scope of servicing work performed the car's interior.
and maintenance records are stored in the ve‐
hicle by means of the service history and trans‐ Control via mobile devices
ferred to the vehicle manufacturer. The vehicle Depending on the vehicle equipment, mobile
owner can contact a dealer's service center to devices connected to the vehicle, for instance
object to the data being stored and transferred smartphones, can be controlled via the vehicle
to the vehicle manufacturer. This objection ap‐ control elements. The sound and picture from
plies for as long as the vehicle owner remains the mobile device can be played back and dis‐
the proprietor of the vehicle. played through the multimedia system. Certain
information is transferred to the mobile device
at the same time. Depending on the type of
10
Information
connection, this includes, for instance position In addition, the vehicle manufacturer evaluates
data and other general vehicle information. anonymized information on transport infra‐
This optimizes the way in which selected apps, structure and how the infotainment system is
for instance navigation or music playback, used. This information cannot be traced back
work. to individual vehicles or people. Evaluating the
There is no further interaction between the data enables the manufacturer to further im‐
mobile device and the vehicle, for instance ac‐ prove its products or services, for instance by
tive access to vehicle data. How the data will incorporating the most up-to-date traffic bulle‐
be processed further is determined by the pro‐ tins. The data transfer feature can be deacti‐
vider of the particular app being used. The ex‐ vated in the vehicle. Certain services and func‐
tent of the possible settings depends on the tions, some of which are subject to a charge,
respective app and the operating system of the can be deactivated by the driver. It is also pos‐
mobile device. sible to activate or deactivate the data connec‐
tion as a whole. That is, with the exception of
Services functions and services required by law such as
Assist systems.
General information
Services from other providers
If the vehicle has a wireless network connec‐
tion, this enables data to be exchanged be‐ When using online services from other provid‐
tween the vehicle and other systems. The ers, these services are the responsibility of the
wireless network connection is realized via an relevant provider and subject to their data pri‐
in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit or via vacy conditions and terms of use. The vehicle
personal mobile devices brought into the vehi‐ manufacturer has no influence on the content
cle, for instance smartphones. This wireless exchanged during this process. Information on
network connection enables 'online functions' the way in which personal data is collected and
to be used. These include online services and used in relation to services from third parties,
apps supplied by the vehicle manufacturer or the scope of such data, and its purpose, can be
by other providers. obtained from the relevant service provider.
Services from the vehicle

manufacturer Event Data Recorder EDR
Where online services from the vehicle manu‐ This vehicle is equipped with an event data re‐
facturer are concerned, the corresponding corder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR is to
functions are described in the appropriate record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa‐
place, for instance the Owner's Manual or tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
manufacturer's website. The relevant legal in‐ a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐
formation pertaining to data protection is pro‐ standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
vided there too. Personal data may be used to The EDR is designed to record data related to
perform online services. Data is exchanged vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
over a secure connection, for instance with the short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
IT systems of the vehicle manufacturer in‐ less.
tended for this purpose. Any collection, proc‐
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
essing, and use of personal data above and be‐
such data as:
yond that needed to provide the services must
always be based on a legal permission, con‐ ▷ How various systems in your vehicle were
tractual arrangement or consent. operating.
11
Information
▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were fastened.
▷ How far, if at all, the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
▷ How fast the vehicle was traveling.
This data can help provide a better under‐
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a The vehicle identification number can be found
nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data is re‐ on the type label, on the right-hand side of the
corded by the EDR under normal driving condi‐ vehicle.
tions and no personal data, for instance name,
gender, age, and crash location, are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce‐
ment, could combine the EDR data with the
type of personally identifying data routinely ac‐
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi‐
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the ve‐
hicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment, The vehicle identification number can also be
can read the information if they have access to found behind the windshield.
the vehicle or the EDR.
Reporting safety defects

Vehicle identification
number For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in‐
jury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis‐
tration NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227, West‐
wood, New Jersey 07675-1227, Telephone
The vehicle identification number can be found 1-800-831-1117.
in the engine compartment, on the right-hand If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
side of the vehicle. open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
12
Information
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you, your dealer,
or BMW of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washing‐
ton, DC 20590. You can also obtain other in‐
formation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada, De‐
fect Investigations and Recalls, may call the
toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle
safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
13
At a glance
This chapter shows the arrangement of the
buttons, switches and displays. Moreover, you
will become familiar with the available control
concepts and options quickly.

At a glance Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options to the selected options or country versions.
This chapter describes all standard, country- and systems. When using these functions and
specific and optional features offered with the systems, the applicable laws and regulations
series. It also describes features that are not must be observed.
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Active rear spoiler 154 Active Blind Spot Detec‐

2 Rear window safety switch 68 tion 148
3 Power windows 68 Intelligent Safety 137

4 Exterior mirror operation 80
5 Glove compartment on the driver's Lane departure warning 147
side 203
Driver assistance systems
6 Lights
16
Cockpit At a glance
Front fog lights 124 Cruise control: resume speed
Light switch 121 Active Cruise Control: reduce

distance
Lights off Active Cruise Control: increase

Daytime running lights 123 distance
Parking lights 121 Cruise control rocker switch
9 Instrument cluster 103
Low beams 121 10 Steering wheel buttons, right
Entertainment source, see Own‐
Automatic headlight con‐ er's Manual for Navigation, Enter‐
trol 122 tainment and Communication 6
Adaptive light functions 123 Volume, see Owner's Manual for

Navigation, Entertainment and
High-beam Assistant 124
Communication 6
Instrument lighting 125
Voice activation 30
7 Steering column stalk, left Telephone, see Owner's Manual

Turn signal 92 for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Thumbwheel for selection lists 114
High beams, head‐
light flasher 92 11 Steering column stalk, right
Wiper 93
High-beam Assistant 124
Rain sensor 94
Canada: roadside parking
light 121
Clean the windshield and head‐
Onboard Computer 115
lights 95
12 Start/stop the engine and switch

8 Steering wheel buttons, left
the ignition on/off 89
Cruise control on/off, inter‐
rupt 165 Auto Start/Stop function 90
Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐

terrupt 159 13 Horn, entire surface
Cruise control: store speed
17
At a glance Cockpit
14 Heated steering wheel 82 16 Open the tailgate 60

17 Unlock hood 249
15 Adjust steering wheel 82
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Control Display 20 9 PDC Park Distance Control 168

2 Ventilation 189 Rearview camera 172
3 Hazard warning system 264 Parking assistant 178
Surround View 171
Central locking system 56
Side View 174
4 Glove compartment 202
10 Driving Dynamics Control 156
5 Radio/CD/multimedia, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and Commu‐
nication 6 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
6 Climate control 183 trol 152
7 Controller with buttons 20
11 Steptronic transmission selector
8 Parking brake 92 lever 97
18
Cockpit At a glance
In the vicinity of the roofliner
1 Emergency Request, SOS 264 4 Reading lights 125
2 Panoramic glass sunroof 69 5 Interior lights 125
3 Indicator light, front-seat passen‐

ger airbag 130
19
At a glance iDrive
iDrive
Vehicle features and options Control elements
This chapter describes all standard, country-
Overview
specific and optional features offered with the
series. It also describes features that are not
to the selected options or country versions.
and systems. When using these functions and
systems, the applicable laws and regulations
must be observed.
Concept 1 Control Display, with touchscreen depend‐

ing on the equipment version
The iDrive combines the functions of many
switches. These functions can be operated via 2 Controller with buttons and, depending on
the Controller and, depending on the equip‐ the equipment version, with touchpad
ment version, the touchscreen.
Control Display
Safety information General information

WARNING To clean the Control Display, follow the care
Operating the integrated information instructions, refer to page 273.
systems and communication devices while In the case of very high temperatures on the
driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to Control Display, for instance due to intense so‐
lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced
accident. Only use the systems or devices down to complete deactivation. Once the tem‐
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary, perature is reduced, for instance through
stop and use the systems and devices while shade or air conditioning, the normal functions
the vehicle is stationary.◀ are restored.
Safety information
NOTE
Objects in the area in the front of the
Control Display can shift and damage the Con‐
trol Display. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Do not place objects in the area in front of
the Control Display.◀
20
iDrive At a glance
Switching on
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Press the Controller.
Switching off
1. Press button.
2. "Turn off control display"
▷ Move in four directions.
Controller with navigation system

Buttons on the Controller
General information
The buttons can be used to open the menus Button Function
directly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings. Press once: call up main menu.
Some iDrive functions can be operated using Press twice: display all menu items
the touchpad on the Controller, refer to of the main menu.
page 26. Open the Communication menu.
Operation
Open the Media/Radio menu.
▷ Turn.
Open destination input menu for

navigation.
Open navigation map.
Press once: open the previous dis‐

play.
Press and hold: open the menus
used last.
▷ Press.
Open the Options menu.
21
At a glance iDrive
Controller without navigation system Buttons on the Controller
General information Button Function

The buttons can be used to open the menus Press once: call up main menu.
directly. The Controller can be used to select
menu items and enter the settings. Press twice: display all menu items
of the main menu.
Operation Open the Communication menu.
▷ Turn.
Open the Media/Radio menu.
Press once: open the previous dis‐

play.
Press and hold: open the menus
used last.
Open the Options menu.
▷ Press.
Operating with the Controller

Opening the main menu
Press button.
▷ Move in two directions.
The main menu is displayed.

All iDrive functions can be called up via the
main menu.
Adapting the main menu
1. Press the button twice.

All menu items of the main menu are dis‐
played.
22
iDrive At a glance
2. Select a menu item.

3. To move the menu item to the desired po‐
sition, tilt the Controller to the right or left.
Selecting menu items

Highlighted menu items can be selected.
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
The arrow indicates that additional displays
can be opened.
Opening recently used menus

The recently used menus can be displayed.
Press and hold this button.
Opening the Options menu

Press button.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual

The "Options" menu is displayed.
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
selected are set in quotation marks, for in‐
stance "iDrive settings".
Changing between displays

After a menu item is selected, for instance
"iDrive settings", a new display appears.
▷ Move the Controller to the left.
Closes the current display and shows the
previous display.
The Options menu consists of various areas:
▷ Press button. ▷ Screen settings, for instance "Split

screen".
The previous display opens.
▷ Control options for the selected main
▷ Move the Controller to the right. menu, for instance for "Media/Radio".
New display is opened. ▷ If applicable, further operating options for
the selected menu, for instance "Save
station".
Changing settings
1. Select a field.
23
At a glance iDrive
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐ Switching between upper/lower case,
ting is displayed. numbers and characters
Depending on the menu, you can switch be‐
tween entering upper and lower case, letters
and numbers.
Symbol Function
Enter the letters.
Enter the numbers.
or Change between capital and

3. Press the Controller. lower-case letters.
Activating/deactivating the functions Entry comparison

Several menu items are preceded by a check‐ When entering names and addresses, the
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐ choice is narrowed down with every letter en‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the tered and letters may be added automatically.
menu item activates or deactivates the func‐
Entries are continuously compared with data
tion.
stored in the vehicle.
Function is activated.
▷ Only those letters are offered during entry
Function is deactivated. for which data is available.
▷ Destination search: place names can be
Entering letters and numbers entered in all languages that are available
in iDrive.
General information
Letters and numbers can be entered via the Using alphabetical lists
Controller.
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en‐
The keyboard's display changes automatically. tries, the letters for which there is an entry are
displayed at the left edge.
Input
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or num‐
quickly.
bers.
All letters for which there are entries are
2. : confirm entry.
displayed on the left edge.
Symbol Function 2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.

The first entry of the selected letter is dis‐
Press the Controller: delete letters played.
or number.
Hold the Controller down: delete all

letters or numbers.
24
iDrive At a glance
Operating via touchscreen Menu items in the Owner's Manual

In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can be
General information selected are set in quotation marks, for in‐
The Control Display is equipped with a touch‐ stance "iDrive settings".
screen.
Changing between displays
Touch screen with your fingers. Do not use
any objects. After a menu item is selected, a new display
opens.
Opening the main menu
Tap on symbol.
The white arrow indicates that additional dis‐

plays can be called up.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the ▷ Swipe to the left.
main menu. ▷ Tap on symbol.
New display is opened.
Adapting the main menu
1. Tap on symbol. Changing settings
All menu items of the main menu are dis‐ Settings such as volumes can be changed via
played. the touchscreen.
2. Drag the menu item to the desired position ▷ Slide in the selected field to the right or
on the right or left. left, until the desired setting is displayed.
▷ , Tap on symbol.
Selecting menu items
Tap desired menu item.
Activating/deactivating the functions

Several menu items are preceded by a check‐
box. The checkbox indicates whether the func‐
tion is activated or deactivated. Selecting the
25
At a glance iDrive
menu item activates or deactivates the func‐ Touchpad

tion.
Function is activated. General information
Function is deactivated. Some iDrive functions can be operated using
the touchpad on the Controller.
Entering letters and numbers
Selecting functions
General information 1. "My Vehicle"
Letters and numbers can be entered using the 2. "iDrive settings"
Controller or the touchscreen.
3. "Touchpad"
The keyboard's display changes automatically.
4. Select the desired setting.
Symbol Function ▷ "Speller": enter letters and numbers.
Tapping the symbol: delete the let‐ ▷ "Map": using the map.
ter or number. ▷ "Search fields": write letters without
selecting the list field.
Tapping and holding the symbol for
an extended period: delete all letters ▷ "Audio feedback": pronounces entered
or numbers. letters and numbers.
Entering letters and numbers

Switching between upper/lower case,
numbers and characters Entering letters requires some practice at the
beginning. When entering, pay attention to the
Symbol Function following:
▷ The system distinguishes between upper
Enter the letters. and lower-case letters and numbers. To
Enter the numbers. make entries, it may be necessary to
change between upper and lower-case let‐
or Change between capital and ters, numbers and characters, refer to
lower-case letters. page 24.
▷ Enter characters as they are displayed on
Operating navigation map the Control Display.
The navigation map can be moved with the ▷ Always enter associated characters, such
touchscreen. as accents or periods so that the letter can
be clearly recognized. The set language
Function Operation
determines what input is possible. Where
Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out with the fin‐ necessary, enter special characters via the
map. gers. Controller.
▷ To delete a character, swipe to the left on
the touchpad.
▷ To enter a blank space, swipe to the right
in the center of the touchpad.
▷ To enter a hyphen, swipe to the right in the
upper area of the touchpad.
26
iDrive At a glance
▷ To enter an underscore, swipe to the right 2. Press the Controller.

in the lower area of the touchpad.
Using the map

The map in the navigation system can be
moved via the touchpad.
Function Operation
Move map. Swipe in the appropriate di‐

rection.
Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out on the touch‐ 3. Select the desired setting.

map. pad with fingers.
Specifying the number of displays
Display menu. Tap once.
It is possible to specify the number of displays.
1. Move the Controller to the right until the

split screen is selected.
Split screen
General information 3. "Personalize menu"
Additional information can be displayed in sev‐ 4. Select the desired setting.
eral menus on the right side of the split screen, 5. Move the Controller to the left.
for instance information from the Onboard
Computer.
In the divided screen view, the so-called split Status information
screen, this information remains visible even
when switching to another menu. General information
The status field can be found in the upper area
Switching the split screen on/off
of the Control Display. Status information is
displayed in the form of symbols.
1. Press button.
2. "Split screen" Status field symbols
Selecting the display Radio

The display can be selected in menus, where
the split screen is supported. Symbol Meaning
1. Move the Controller to the right until the HD Radio station is being received.
split screen is selected.
Satellite radio is switched on.
27
At a glance iDrive
Telephone Additional symbols
Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning
Incoming or outgoing call. Check Control message.
Missed call. The sound output has been

switched off.
Signal strength of cellular network.
Encrypted connection not active.
Network search.
Request for the current vehicle po‐
Cellular network is not available.
sition.
The critical charge state of the mo‐
Checking the current vehicle posi‐
bile phone has been reached.
tion.
Roaming is active.
SMS text message received.

Programmable memory
Message received.
buttons
Reminder.
General information
Sending not possible.
The iDrive functions can be stored on the pro‐
Contacts are loaded. grammable memory buttons and called up di‐
rectly, for instance radio stations, navigation
destinations, phone numbers and menu en‐
Entertainment
tries.
Symbol Meaning Settings are stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
CD/DVD player.
Music collection.
Storing a function
1. Select function via iDrive.
Bluetooth audio.
USB audio interface. 2. Press and hold the desired button

until a signal sounds.
Mobile phone audio interface.
Running a function
Online Entertainment.
Press button.
WiFi.
iPod. The function will work immediately. This

means, for instance that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment

Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear gloves
or use objects.
28
iDrive At a glance
The button assignment is displayed at the top

edge of screen.
Deleting the button assignments

1. Press buttons 1 and 8 simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
29
At a glance Voice activation system
Voice activation system

Vehicle features and options so that the spoken commands can be identi‐
fied.
To set the language, refer to page 33.
to the selected options or country versions. Using the voice activation
This also applies to safety-related functions system
systems, the applicable laws and regulations Activating the voice activation system
must be observed.
1. Press button on the steering
wheel.
Concept 2. Wait for the signal.
Most functions displayed on the Control Dis‐ 3. Say the command.
play can be operated by voice commands via This symbol in the instrument cluster indi‐
the voice activation system. The system sup‐ cates that the voice activation system is active.
ports you with announcements during input. If no other commands are possible, operate
the function via iDrive.
General information Terminating the voice activation

▷ Functions that can only be used when the system
vehicle is stationary can only be operated Press the button on the steering
via the voice activation system to a limited wheel or ›Cancel‹.
extent.
▷ The system uses a special microphone on
the driver's side.
Possible commands
▷ ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes verbal
instructions to use with the voice activation General information
system.
Most menu items on the Control Display can
▷ Say the commands, numbers, and letters be voiced as commands.
smoothly and with normal volume, empha‐
Commands from other menus can also be spo‐
sis, and speed.
ken.
▷ Always say commands in the language of
You may select list entries such as phone list
the voice activation system.
entries via voice activation. Read these list en‐
tries out loud exactly as they are shown in the
respective list.
Requirements
Via the Control Display, set a language that is
also supported by the voice activation system
30
Voice activation system At a glance
Displaying possible commands Via iDrive:

The following is displayed in the top area of the 1. "My Vehicle"
Control Display:
2. "iDrive settings"
▷ Some possible commands for the current
3. "Language"
menu.
4. "Speech mode:"
▷ Some possible commands from other me‐
nus. 5. Select the desired setting.
▷ Status of the voice recognition.
Selecting the input language
▷ Encrypted connection is not available.
For some languages, the input language can
be selected.
Help on the voice activation system
Via iDrive:
▷ To have information on the operating prin‐
ciple of the voice activation system read 1. "My Vehicle"
out loud: ›General information on voice 2. "iDrive settings"
control‹.
3. "Language"
▷ To have help for the current menu read out
loud: ›Help‹. 4. "Voice control:"
Example: opening the tone Activating voice recognition via the

server
settings
The voice recognition feature via the server
The commands of the menu items are spoken provides a dictation function and a natural
just as they are selected via the Controller. method of entering destinations while improv‐
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound output, ing the quality of voice recognition. To use the
if needed. functions, data is transmitted to a service pro‐
vider and locally stored there.
2. Press button on the steering Via iDrive:
wheel.
1. "My Vehicle"
3. ›Media and radio‹
4. ›Tone‹
3. "Language"
4. "Server speech recognition"
Settings
Speaking during voice output
Setting the voice dialog It is possible to answer during inquiries of the
You can set the system to use standard dialog voice activation system. The function can be
or a short version. deactivated if inquiries are often undesirably
interrupted, for instance due to background
The short version of the voice dialog plays noise or talking.
back short messages in abbreviated form.
31
At a glance Voice activation system
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Language"
4. "Speaking during voice output"
Adjusting the volume

Turn the volume button during the spoken in‐
structions until the desired volume is set.
▷ The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is changed.
▷ The volume is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Information on Emergency
Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini‐
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa‐
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establish‐
ment of a phone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to
page 264, close to the interior mirror.
Environmental conditions
▷ Keep the doors, windows, and glass sun‐
roof closed to prevent noise interference.
▷ Avoid making other noise in the vehicle
while speaking.
32
General settings At a glance
General settings
Vehicle features and options The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
specific and optional features offered with the Setting the time
Via iDrive:
to the selected options or country versions. 1. "My Vehicle"
This also applies to safety-related functions 2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
must be observed. 4. "Time:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired hours
are displayed.
Language 6. Press the Controller.
7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi‐
Setting the language
nutes are displayed.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
2. "iDrive settings" rently used.
3. "Language"
Setting the time format
4. "Language:"
Via iDrive:
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
rently used. 2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Date and time"
Setting the voice dialog
4. "Time format:"
Voice dialog for the voice activation system,
refer to page 31.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
Time
Automatic time setting
Setting the time zone Depending on your vehicle's optional features,
Via iDrive: the time, date and, if needed, the time zone are
updated automatically.
1. "My Vehicle"
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Date and time"
4. "Time zone:"
33
At a glance General settings
3. "Date and time" Via iDrive:

4. "Automatic time setting" 1. "My Vehicle"
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 2. "iDrive settings"
rently used.
3. "Units"
4. Select the desired menu item.
Date 5. Select the desired setting.
Setting the date rently used.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
Activating/deactivating the
display of the current vehicle
3. "Date and time"
position
4. "Date:"
5. Turn the Controller until the desired day is Concept
displayed. If vehicle location has been activated, the cur‐
6. Press the Controller. rent vehicle position can be displayed in the
7. Make the settings for the month and year. BMW Connected app or in the Connected‐
Drive customer portal.
rently used.
Activating/deactivating
Via iDrive:
Setting the date format
Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle"
1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle settings"
2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Vehicle tracking"
3. "Date and time" 4. "Vehicle tracking"
4. "Date format:"
5. Select the desired setting. Activating/deactivating
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ popup windows
rently used.
For some functions, popup windows are dis‐
played automatically on the Control Display.
Some of these popup windows can be acti‐
Setting the units of vated or deactivated.
measurement
Via iDrive:
You can set the units of measurement for
some values, for example, fuel consumption, 1. "My Vehicle"
distances and temperature. 2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Pop-ups"
34
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ 2. "Contents of main menu"
rently used. 3. Select the desired menu and the desired
content.
Control Display rently used.
Brightness
Via iDrive: Messages
1. "My Vehicle"
Concept
The menu centrally displays all messages ar‐
3. "Displays"
riving in the vehicle in list form.
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness" General information
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐ The following messages can be displayed:
ness is set. ▷ Traffic messages.
7. Press the Controller. ▷ Check Control messages.
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ ▷ Communication messages, for example e-
rently used. mails, SMS text messages or reminders.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright‐ ▷ Service requirements messages.
ness settings may not be clearly visible.
Messages are additionally displayed in the sta‐
tus field.
Screensaver
If no settings are made via iDrive, a screensa‐ Retrieving messages
ver will be displayed after an adjustable time.
Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "Notifications"
1. "My Vehicle"
2. Select the desired message.
The respective menu is opened, where the
3. "Displays" message is displayed.
4. "Control display"
5. "Screensaver" Deleting messages
6. Select the desired setting. All messages, except Check Control mes‐
sages, can be deleted from the list. Check
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ Control messages are displayed as long as
rently used. they are relevant.
Via iDrive:
Selecting the contents of the main
menu 1. "Notifications"
For some menu items of the main menu, the 2. Select the desired message.
displayed contents can be selected.
1. Press button.
35
4. "Data privacy"
3. Press button.
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all
notifications" Deleting personal data in the vehicle
Settings Concept
The following settings can be adjusted: Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores
▷ Select the applications, from which mes‐ personal data, such as stored radio stations.
sages will be permitted. This personal data can be permanently deleted
▷ Sort the messages according to date or using iDrive.
priority.
General information
Via iDrive:
Depending on the equipment package, the fol‐
1. "My Vehicle" lowing data can be deleted:
2. "iDrive settings" ▷ Driver profile settings.
3. "Notifications" ▷ Stored radio stations.
4. Select the desired setting. ▷ Stored programmable memory buttons.
▷ Travel and Onboard Computer information.
▷ Music collection.
Data protection
▷ Navigation, for instance stored destina‐
Data transfer tions.
▷ Phone book.
Concept ▷ Online data, for instance Favorites, cook‐
The vehicle offers different functions, whose ies.
use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv‐ ▷ Office data, for instance voice notes.
ice provider. The data transfer can be deacti‐
vated for some functions. ▷ Login accounts.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take up
General information to 15 minutes.
With data transfer deactivated, the respective
function cannot be used. Functional requirement
Only make these settings while stationary. Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Activating/deactivating the data Deleting data

transfer Heed and follow the instructions on the Con‐
Follow the instructions on the Control Display. trol Display.
Via iDrive: Via iDrive:
1. Switch on the ignition. 1. Switch on the ignition.
2. "My Vehicle" 2. "My Vehicle"
3. "iDrive settings" 3. "iDrive settings"

4. "Data privacy"
36
5. "Delete personal data" Function Connection

6. "Delete personal data" type
7. "OK" USB storage device: USB.
8. Exit and lock the vehicle. Exporting and importing driver
After 15 minutes, the deletion process is com‐ profiles.
pleted. Performing software updates.
If not all of the data was deleted, repeat the de‐ Exporting and importing stored
letion. trips.
Playing music.
Canceling deletion
Start the engine to cancel deletion of the data. Playing videos from the smart‐ USB.
phone or the USB storage de‐
vice.
Connections Using the vehicle Internet ac‐ Internet
cess. hotspot.
Concept
Various connection types are available for us‐ Use Apple Carplay apps via Bluetooth
ing mobile devices in the vehicle. The connec‐ iDrive and voice operation. and WiFi.
tion type to select depends on the mobile de‐
vice and the desired function. The following connection types require one-
time pairing with the vehicle:
General information ▷ Bluetooth.
The following overview shows possible func‐ ▷ Internet hotspot.
tions and the suitable connection types for
▷ Apple CarPlay.
them. The scope of functions depends on the
mobile device. Paired devices are automatically recognized
later on and connected to the vehicle.
Function Connection
type Safety information
Making calls via the hands-free Bluetooth. WARNING
system.
Operating the integrated information
Using phone functions via systems and communication devices while
iDrive. driving can distract from traffic. It is possible to
Using the smartphone Office lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
functions. accident. Only use the systems or devices
when the traffic situation allows. If necessary,
Playing music from the smart‐ Bluetooth or stop and use the systems and devices while
phone or the audio player. USB. the vehicle is stationary.◀
Using compatible apps via Bluetooth or
iDrive. USB.
37
Compatible devices Switching on Bluetooth

Via iDrive:
General information
1. "My Vehicle"
Information on mobile devices compatible with
the vehicle can be found at www.bmwusa.com/ 2. "iDrive settings"
bluetooth. 3. "Mobile devices"
Malfunctions may occur with devices not listed 4. "Settings"
or deviating software versions. 5. "Bluetooth®"
Displaying the vehicle identification Activating/deactivating telephone

number and software part number functions
When looking for compatible devices, you may To use all supported functions of a mobile
have to state the vehicle identification number phone, the following functions must be acti‐
and the software part number. These numbers vated prior to pairing.
can be displayed in the vehicle.
Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Mobile devices"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
4. "Settings"
5. Select desired setting:
5. "Bluetooth® info"
▷ "Office"
6. "System information"
Activate function to transmit short
A software update, refer to page 43, can be messages, e-mails, calendars, tasks,
performed, if needed. notes, and reminders to the vehicle.
Costs can be incurred by transmitting
Bluetooth connection all data to the vehicle.
▷ "Contact images"
Functional requirements
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 38, with Activate function to show the contact
Bluetooth interface. pictures.
▷ The remote control is in the vehicle. 6. Move the Controller to the left.
▷ The device is ready for operation.

Pairing the mobile device with the
▷ Bluetooth is activated on the device and in vehicle
the vehicle, refer to page 38. Via iDrive:
▷ Bluetooth pre-settings, such as visibility,
may be required on the device; refer to the 1. "My Vehicle"
owner's manual of the device. 2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device"
5. Select the functions for which the device
will be used:
38
▷ "Telephone" Delete all known Bluetooth connections

▷ "Bluetooth® audio" from the device list on the mobile phone
and start a new device search.
▷ "Apps"
▷ The mobile phone is in power-save mode
▷ "Apple CarPlay"
or has only a limited remaining battery life.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis‐
Charge mobile phone.
played on the Control Display.
Why does the mobile phone no longer react?
6. Search for Bluetooth devices in the vicinity
of the mobile device. ▷ The applications on the mobile phone do
not function anymore.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile device display. Switch the mobile phone off and on again.
Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle. ▷ Too high or too low ambient temperatures
for mobile phone operation.
7. Depending on the mobile device, a control
number is displayed or the control number Do not subject the mobile phone to ex‐
must be entered. treme ambient temperatures.
▷ Compare the control number displayed Why can phone functions not be used via
on the Control Display with the control iDrive?
number on the display of the device. ▷ The mobile phone may not be properly
Confirm the control number on the de‐ configured, for instance as Bluetooth audio
vice and on the Control Display. device.
▷ Enter and confirm the same control Connect the mobile phone with the tele‐
number on the device and via iDrive. phone or additional phone function.
The device is connected and displayed in Why are no or not all phone book entries dis‐
the device list, refer to page 42. played or why are they incomplete?
If connection was not successful: Frequently ▷ Transmission of the phone book entries is
Asked Questions, refer to page 39. not yet complete.
▷ It is possible that only the phone book en‐
Frequently asked questions tries of the mobile phone or the SIM card
All requirements are met and all required steps are transmitted.
were completed in the specified order. Despite ▷ It may not be possible to display phone
that, the mobile device does not function as book entries with special characters.
expected. ▷ It may not be possible to transmit contacts
In this case, the following explanations can from social networks.
help: ▷ The number of phone book entries to be
Why could the mobile phone not be paired or stored is too high.
connected? ▷ Data volume of the contact too large, for
▷ There are too many Bluetooth devices instance due to stored information such as
connected to the mobile phone or vehicle. notes.
In the vehicle, delete Bluetooth connec‐ Reduce the data volume of the contact.
tions with other devices. ▷ A mobile phone can only be connected as
audio source or as telephone.
39
Configure the mobile phone and connect it ▷ Loading of software updates, refer to
with the telephone or additional phone page 43.
function. Follow the following when connecting:
How can the phone connection quality be im‐ ▷ Do not use force when plugging the con‐
proved? nector into the USB interface.
▷ The strength of the Bluetooth signal on the ▷ Use a flexible adapter cable.
mobile phone can be adjusted, depending
▷ Protect the USB storage device against
on the mobile phone.
mechanical damage.
▷ Insert the mobile phone into the snap-in
▷ Due to the large number of USB media
adapter or place it in the area of the center
available on the market, it cannot be guar‐
console.
anteed that every device is operable on the
▷ Insert mobile phone into the wireless vehicle.
charging tray.
▷ Do not expose USB media to extreme envi‐
▷ Adjust the volume of the microphone and ronmental conditions, such as very high
loudspeakers separately. temperatures; refer to the owner's manual
If all points in this list have been checked and of the device.
the required function is still not available, con‐ ▷ Due to the many different compression
tact the hotline, a dealer’s service center or an‐ techniques, proper playback of the media
other qualified service center or repair shop. stored on the USB storage device cannot
be guaranteed in all cases.
USB connection
▷ A connected USB storage device will be
supplied with charging current via the USB
General information
interface if the device supports this.
Mobile devices with a USB port are connected
▷ To ensure proper transmission of the
to the USB interface.
stored data, do not charge a USB storage
▷ Mobile phones. device via the onboard socket, when it is
The snap-in adapter features a separate connected to the USB interface.
USB port that is automatically connected ▷ Depending on how the USB storage device
when a compatible mobile phone is in‐ is being used, settings may be required on
serted. the USB storage device, refer to the own‐
▷ Audio devices with USB port, for instance er's manual of the device.
MP3 player. Not compatible USB media:
▷ USB storage devices. ▷ USB hard drives.
Common file systems are supported. ▷ USB hubs.
FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended
▷ USB memory card readers with multiple in‐
formats.
serts.
The following applications are possible:
▷ HFS-formatted USB media.
▷ Exporting and importing driver profiles, re‐
▷ Devices such as fans or lamps.
fer to page 62.
▷ Playing music files via USB audio. Functional requirement
▷ Playing videos via USB video. Compatible device, refer to page 38, with USB
interface.
40
Connecting the device 6. Search for WiFi networks on the device.

Connect the USB storage device using a suita‐ Select network name on the device.
ble adapter cable to a USB interface, refer to 7. Enter hotspot code on the device and con‐
page 198. nect.
The USB storage device is displayed in the de‐ With the first Internet usage via the Internet
vice list, refer to page 42. hotspot, data volume must be purchased from
a service provider.
Internet connection All devices connected via the Internet hotspot
use this data volume.
General information
If necessary, data volume can be purchased
Up to 8 devices can be connected with the In‐ from the ConnectedDrive Store.
ternet hotspot.
Settings
The network name and hotspot code can be
▷ Compatible device, refer to page 38, with changed. In addition, the network name can be
WiFi interface. hidden so that it cannot be found by other de‐
▷ ConnectedDrive contract. vices.
▷ Data contract with a service provider. Via iDrive:
▷ WiFi activated on the device. 1. "My Vehicle"
▷ Internet hotspot activated in the vehicle. 2. "iDrive settings"
▷ The ignition is switched on. 3. "Mobile devices"
Activating the Internet hotspot 4. Press button.

Via iDrive: 5. ▷ "Change hotspot key"
1. "My Vehicle" Enter the desired hotspot code.
2. "iDrive settings" ▷ "Change hotspot name"
3. "Mobile devices" Enter the desired network name.
4. "Settings" ▷ "Hide hotspot"
5. "Internet hotspot" Activate or deactivate the function.
6. Confirm the entry of the hotspot code or
Connecting device with Internet network name:
hotspot
Select the symbol.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle" Apple CarPlay preparation
Concept
3. "Mobile devices"
CarPlay allows certain functions of a compati‐
4. "Connect new device" ble Apple iPhone to be used via Siri voice op‐
5. "Internet hotspot" eration and iDrive.
Hotspot name and hotspot code are dis‐
played on the Control Display.
41
Functional requirements The iPhone has already been paired with Apple
▷ Compatible iPhone, refer to page 38. CarPlay. When a new connection is estab‐
lished, CarPlay can no longer be selected.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later.
▷ Delete the iPhone concerned from the de‐
▷ Corresponding mobile wireless contract.
vice list.
▷ Bluetooth, WiFi, and Siri voice operation
▷ On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con‐
are switched on on the iPhone.
cerned from the list of stored vehicles un‐
der Bluetooth and under WiFi.
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay
▷ Pair the iPhone as a new device.
Via iDrive:
If the steps listed have been carried out and
1. "My Vehicle" the required function is still not available: con‐
2. "iDrive settings" tact the hotline, a dealer’s service center or an‐
3. "Mobile devices" other qualified service center or repair shop.
4. "Settings"
Managing mobile devices
5. Select the following settings:
▷ "Bluetooth®" General information
▷ "Apple CarPlay" ▷ After one-time pairing, the devices are au‐
tomatically recognized and reconnected
Pairing iPhone with CarPlay when the ignition is switched on.
Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle, refer ▷ The data stored on the SIM card or in the
to page 38. mobile phone are transferred to the vehicle
after recognition.
Select CarPlay as the function:
▷ For some devices, certain settings may be
"Apple CarPlay"
necessary, for instance authorization, see
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and owner's manual of the device.
displayed in the device list, refer to page 42.
Displaying the device list
Operation
All devices paired or connected with the vehi‐
For more information, see the Integrated Own‐ cle are displayed in the device list.
er's Manual, Online Owner's Manual, BMW
Via iDrive:
Driver's Guide app or the Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communica‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
tion. 2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
Frequently asked questions
All requirements are met and all required steps A symbol indicates, for which function a device
were completed in the specified order. Despite is used.
that, the mobile device does not function as Symbol Function
expected.
"Telephone"
In this case, the following explanations can
help: "Additional telephone"
"Bluetooth® audio"
42
Symbol Function 4. Select device.

5. "Connect device"
"Apps"
The functions that were assigned to the device
"Internet hotspot" before disconnecting are assigned to the de‐
vice when it is reconnected. If the device is al‐
"Apple CarPlay"
ready connected, these functions are deacti‐
vated.
Configuring the device
Functions can be activated or deactivated for Deleting the device
paired and connected devices. Via iDrive:
Via iDrive: 1. "My Vehicle"
1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings"
2. "iDrive settings" 3. "Mobile devices"
3. "Mobile devices" 4. Select device.
4. Select the desired device. 5. "Delete device"
5. Select the desired setting. The device is disconnected and removed from
If a function is assigned to a device, the func‐ the device list.
tion will be deactivated where appropriate for a
device that is already connected and the de‐ Swapping the telephone and
vice will be disconnected. additional phone
If two mobile phones are connected to the ve‐
Disconnecting the device hicle, the functions of the phone and additional
The connection of the device to the vehicle is phone can be switched.
disconnected. Via iDrive:
The device remains paired and can be con‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
nected again, refer to page 43.
Via iDrive:
3. "Mobile devices"
1. "My Vehicle" 4. "Settings"
2. "iDrive settings" 5. "Swap telephone/additional tel."
3. "Mobile devices"
4. Select device. Software update
5. "Disconnect device"
General information
Connecting the device The vehicle supports a large number of mobile
devices, for instance mobile phones and MP3
A disconnected device can be reconnected.
players. Software updates are available for
Via iDrive: many of the supported devices. The vehicle is
1. "My Vehicle" maintained up-to-date via regular vehicle soft‐
ware updates.
Updates and related current information is
3. "Mobile devices"
available at www.bmw.com/update.
43
Displaying the installed software Via iDrive:

version
1. "My Vehicle"
The software version installed in the vehicle is
displayed.
3. "Software update"
Via iDrive:
4. "Restore software"
1. "My Vehicle"
5. ▷ "Previous version"
The previous software version is re‐
3. "Software update" stored.
4. "Show current version" ▷ "Default software settings"
If an update has been carried out before, select The first software version is restored.
the desired version to display additional infor‐
6. "Remove software"
mation.
7. "OK"
Updating software via USB 8. Wait for restore.
The software may only be updated when the 9. Confirm system restart.
vehicle is stationary.
Via iDrive:
1. Store the file for the software update in the

main directory of a USB flash drive.
2. Connect the USB storage device to a USB
interface, refer to page 198.
3. "My Vehicle"
5. "Software update"
6. "Update software"
7. "USB"
8. "Install software"
9. "OK"
10. Wait for the update to complete.
11. Confirm system restart.
Restoring the software version

The software version before the last software
update and the version before the first soft‐
ware update can be restored.
The software may only be restored when the
44
Owner's Manual media At a glance
Owner's Manual media

Vehicle features and options Supplementary Owner's Manuals
Also follow the instructions of the Supplemen‐
tary Owner's Manuals, which are included in
addition to the onboard literature.
This also applies to safety-related functions Integrated Owner's Manual
and systems. When using these functions and in the vehicle
must be observed. Concept
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically
describes features and functions found in the
General information vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual can be
displayed on the Control Display.
You can use various media formats to call up
the content in the Owner's Manual. The follow‐
Selecting the Owner's Manual
ing Owner's Manual media formats are availa‐
ble:
1. Press button.
▷ Printed Owner's Manual, refer to
2. "My Vehicle"
page 45.
3. "Owner's Manual"
▷ Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle,
refer to page 45. 4. Select the required method of accessing
the contents.
▷ BMW Driver’s Guide app, refer to
page 46.
Scrolling through the owner's manual
▷ Online Owner's Manual, refer to page 47.
Turn the Controller, until the next or previous
There are different features, refer to page 48, contents are displayed.
in each of the different media formats.
Context help
Printed Owner's Manual General information

The section of the Owner's Manual relating to
Concept the function that is currently selected can be
The printed Owner's Manual describes all displayed directly.
standard, country-specific, and optional fea‐
tures offered with the series. Opening via iDrive
Change directly to the Options menu from the
General information function on the Control Display:
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain‐
ment, and Communication can be obtained as
1. Press button.
printed book from the service center.
2. "Owner's Manual"
45
At a glance Owner's Manual media
Opening when a Check Control

message is displayed 2. Press desired programmable
memory button and hold for more than
Directly from the Check Control message on
2 seconds.
the Control Display:
"Owner's Manual" Executing
Changing between a function and the Press the corresponding button.

Owner's Manual The owner's manual is directly dis‐
To switch from a function, for instance radio, to played at the selected entry point.
the Owner's Manual on the Control Display
and to alternate between the two displays:
BMW Driver's Guide app
1. Press button.
2. "Owner's Manual" Concept
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's The BMW Driver's Guide app specifically de‐
Manual. scribes features and functions found in the ve‐
hicle.
4. Press button again to return to last The app can be displayed on smartphones and
displayed function. tablets.
5. Press button to return to the page of General information

the Owner's Manual displayed last. The Owner's Manual is available in many coun‐
To alternate continuously between the last dis‐ tries as an app. Additional information on the
played function and the last displayed page of Internet:
the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4 & 5. www.bmw.com/bmw_drivers_guide
Opens a new display every time.
Entering the vehicle identification number fil‐
ters the contents.
Programmable memory buttons
Vehicles
General information
It is possible to store Owner's Manuals for vari‐
The jumps into the Owner's Manual can be
ous vehicles in the app.
stored on the programmable memory buttons,
refer to page 28, and called up directly. It is also possible to test the app using a dem‐
onstration vehicle.
Storing
Operating systems and language
1. Select the desired entry point via iDrive:
The app is available for the iOS and Android
▷ "Quick reference"
operating systems.
▷ "Search by pictures"
The Owner's Manual is downloaded in the lan‐
▷ "Keyword search" guage of the device.
▷ "Animations"
46
Online Owner's Manual Quick Reference Guide

The Quick Reference Guide provides informa‐
Concept tion on how to operate the vehicle, how to use
The Online Owner's Manual specifically de‐ basic vehicle functions and what to do in case
scribes features and functions found in the ve‐ of a breakdown.
hicle.
Search by illustrations
The Online Owner's Manual can be displayed
in any of today's browsers. Based on illustrations, image search provides
information and descriptions. This is helpful
General information when the terminology for a feature is not at
hand.
The Online Owner's Manual is available in
many countries. An account on the customer
Frequently asked questions
portal may be required.
This chapter provides answers to frequently
Entering the vehicle identification number fil‐
asked questions about your vehicle and helpful
ters the contents.
links to additional information.
Vehicles
Quick links
It is possible to store several individual Own‐
The chapter on quick links explains the most
er's Manuals for various vehicles.
important information and operating instruc‐
tions on the basis of various situations.
Language
The language is based on whichever language Videos
is set in the operating system.
The videos explain the main functions of the
systems.
Printing
You can use the print function for automatically Smart Scan
formatting and printing out individual chapters.
You can use Smart Scan to scan various sym‐
bols in the vehicle. After a brief explanation of
the symbol in question appears, it is then pos‐
Media components sible to display the chapter directly.
Smart Scan is only available for the iOS oper‐
General information
ating system.
The following components are not available to
the same extent in all media formats.
Keyword search
Additional information on availability, refer to You can use keywords to search for informa‐
page 48. tion and descriptions in the media.
47
At a glance Owner's Manual media
Key features
Printed Integrated APP Online
All equipment included. X — — —
Equipment included in vehicle. — X X X
Quick Reference Guide. — X X X
Search by illustrations. — X X X
Frequently asked questions. — — X X
Quick links. — — X X
Videos. — X X X
Smart Scan. — — X —
Keyword search. X X X X
X: included.
—: not included.
48
49
Controls
The information in this chapter helps you in
confidently operating your vehicle. All features
and accessories that are useful for driving and
your safety, comfort and convenience are
described here.

Controls Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐
ble with special knowledge.
series. It also describes features that are not Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
to the selected options or country versions. tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
This also applies to safety-related functions the vehicle from the outside when there are
and systems. When using these functions and people in it.◀
WARNING
must be observed.
Unattended children or animals can
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, for instance due to the fol‐
Remote control
lowing actions:
General information ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
The vehicle is supplied with two remote con‐ ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
trols with integrated key. ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
Each remote control contains a replaceable dows.
battery. Replacing the battery, refer to ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
page 54.
▷ Using vehicle equipment.
You may set the key functions depending on
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
the optional features and country-specific ver‐
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
sion. Settings, refer to page 65.
hicle. Take the remote control with you when
The vehicle stores personal settings for every exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
remote control. Driver profile, refer to
page 62.
Overview
The remote controls hold information about re‐
quired maintenance. Service data in the re‐
mote control, refer to page 256.
Safety information
WARNING
People or animals in the vehicle can lock
the doors from the inside and lock themselves
in. In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury. Take 1 Unlocking
the remote control with you so that the vehicle
2 Locking
can be opened from the outside.◀
3 Open the tailgate
4 Panic mode
52
Opening and closing Controls
Unlocking ▷ All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap
are being locked.
Press button on the remote control.
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 66, is
switched on.
Depending on the settings, refer to page 65,
the following access points are unlocked: If the engine or ignition is still switched on
when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn
▷ Driver's door and fuel filler flap.
honks twice. In this case, the engine or ignition
Press the button of the remote control must be switched off by means of the Start/
again to unlock the other vehicle access Stop button.
points.
▷ All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap. Switching on interior lights and
In addition, the following functions are exe‐ courtesy light
cuted: Press button on the remote control with
▷ The settings stored in the driver profile, re‐ the vehicle locked.
fer to page 62, are applied.
This function is not available, if the interior
▷ The driver's seat is set to the last position
lights were switched off manually.
saved in the driver's profile. This function
must be activated in the settings, refer to The light functions may depend on the ambi‐
page 65. ent brightness.
▷ The interior lights are switched on, unless After locking, wait 10 seconds before pressing
they were manually switched off. Switch the button again.
the interior lights on/off manually, refer to
page 125. Tailgate
▷ The exterior lighting activated in the set‐
General information
tings, refer to page 65, is switched on.
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place
▷ The alarm system, refer to page 66, is
the remote control in the cargo area.
switched off.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
The light functions may depend on the ambi‐
the country version, it is possible to specify
ent brightness.
whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐
locking with the remote control. Adjusting the
Convenient opening settings, refer to page 65.
Press and hold this button on the re‐
mote control after unlocking. Safety information
Pressing and holding the button on the remote WARNING
control opens the windows and the glass sun‐ Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
roof. ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
Locking is clear during opening and closing.◀
1. Close the driver's door.
2. Press button on the remote control.

The following functions are executed:
53
NOTE lift the cover with a lever movement of the

The tailgate swings back and up when it integrated key, arrow 2.
opens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is a risk of damage to property.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
jects do not hit the rear window.◀
3. Push battery in the direction of the arrow
using a pointed object and lift it out.
Opening
Press button on the remote control for
approx. 1 second.
The tailgate opens automatically.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷ Press button on the remote con‐ 4. Insert a type CR 2450 battery with the pos‐
trol and hold for at least 3 sec‐ itive side facing up.
onds.
5. Press the cover closed.
▷ Briefly press the button on the remote con‐
6. Push the integrated key into the remote
trol three times in succession.
control until it engages.
To switch off the alarm: press any button. Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
Replacing the battery qualified service center or repair shop
1. Remove the integrated key from the re‐ or take them to a collection point.
mote control, refer to page 56.
2. Place the integrated key underneath the Additional remote controls
battery compartment cover, arrow 1, and
Additional remote controls are available from a
dealer’s service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Loss of the remote controls

A lost remote control can be blocked and re‐
placed by a dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
54
Malfunction Starting the engine via emergency

detection of the remote control
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Remote control detection by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circumstan‐
ces:
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐
charged. Replacing the battery, refer to
page 54.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
transmission towers or other equipment It is not possible to start the engine if the re‐
with high transmitting power. mote control has not been detected.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
metal objects. state if the remote control has not been de‐
tected.
Do not transport the remote control to‐
gether with metal objects. It is not possible to start the engine or switch
on the drive-ready state if the remote control
▷ Interference of the radio connection from
has not been detected.
mobile phones or other electronic devices
in direct proximity to the remote control. Proceed as follows in this case:
Do not transport the remote control to‐ 1. Hold the remote control with its back
gether with electronic devices. against the marked area on the steering
▷ Interference of radio transmission by a column. Pay attention to the display in the
charging process of mobile devices, for in‐ instrument cluster.
stance charging of a mobile phone. 2. If the remote control is detected:
▷ The remote control is in direct proximity of Start the engine within 10 seconds.
the wireless charging tray. If the remote control is not detected, slightly
Place the remote control down at a differ‐ change the position of the remote control and
ent location. repeat the procedure.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can be
unlocked and locked from the outside with the
integrated key, refer to page 55. Integrated key
General information
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
without remote control using the integrated
key.
The integrated key can also be used for the
glove compartment on the front passenger
side.
55
Safety information Locking/unlocking via the door lock

WARNING
Unlocking from the inside is only possi‐
ble with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the vehi‐
cle while being exposed to extreme tempera‐
tures are at risk of injury or death. Do not lock
the vehicle from the outside when there are
people in it.◀
NOTE Unlock or lock the driver's door via the door

The door lock is permanently joined with lock using the integrated key.
the door. The door handle can be moved. The other doors must be unlocked or locked
When pulling the door handle with the from the inside.
integrated key inserted, paint or the integrated
key can be damaged. There is a risk of damage
to property. Remove the integrated key before
Alarm system
pulling the outside door handle.◀ The alarm system is not switched on if the ve‐
hicle is locked with the integrated key.
Removing The alarm system is triggered when the door is
opened, if the vehicle has been unlocked via
the door lock.
In order to stop the alarm, unlock the vehicle
with the remote control or switch on the igni‐
tion, if needed, through emergency detection
of the remote control, refer to page 55.
Button for central locking

Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the system
integrated key, arrow 2.
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights come on.
56
Overview General information

Comfort Access supports the following func‐
tions:
▷ Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
▷ Convenient closing.
▷ Open the tailgate.
▷ Opening/closing the tailgate with no-touch
activation.
Button for the central locking system.

▷ To lock the vehicle, the remote control
must be located outside of the vehicle near
Unlocking and locking the doors.
Press button. For locking, the front doors must ▷ The next unlocking and locking cycle is not
be closed. possible until after approx. 2 seconds.
▷ The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
▷ The vehicle is not secured against theft Unlocking
when locking.
Opening
▷ Press button to unlock the doors

together, and then pull the door handle
above the armrest.
▷ On the door to be opened, pull the door
handle twice: the first time unlocks the
door, the second time opens it. The other Grasp the door handle on the driver's or front
doors remain locked. passenger door completely.
This corresponds with pressing the button
on the remote control.
Comfort Access
Concept
The vehicle can be accessed without activat‐
ing the remote control.
All you need to do is to have the remote con‐
trol with you, such as in your pants pocket.
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control when it is in close proximity or in the
car's interior.
57
Locking In addition to locking, the windows and the

glass sunroof close and the exterior mirrors
fold in.
Opening the tailgate
General information
If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,
Touch the surface on the door handle of the locked doors are not unlocked.
driver's or front passenger door with your fin‐
ger for approx. 1 second without grasping the Safety information
door handle. WARNING
This corresponds with pressing the button Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
on the remote control. ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
Convenient closing is clear during opening and closing.◀
NOTE
Safety information
The tailgate swings back and up when it
WARNING opens. There is a risk of damage to property.
With convenient closing, body parts can Make sure that the area of movement of the
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make sure tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
that the area of movement of the doors is clear
during convenient closing.◀ NOTE
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
Closing the rear window and heat conductors while
driving. There is a risk of damage to property.
Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
jects do not hit the rear window.◀
Opening
Touch the surface on the door handle of the

driver's or front passenger door, arrow, with
your finger and hold it there without grasping
the door handle.
This corresponds with pressing and holding
the button on the remote control. Press button next on tailgate.
58
This corresponds with pressing the button NOTE

on the remote control. The tailgate swings back and up when it
The tailgate opens automatically. opens. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
Opening and closing the tailgate with tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
no-touch activation
Performing the foot movement
Concept
1. Stand in the middle behind the vehicle at
The tailgate can be opened and closed with approx. one arm's length away from the
no-touch activation using the remote control rear of the vehicle.
you are carrying. Two sensors detect a for‐
2. Wave a foot under the vehicle in the direc‐
ward-directed foot motion in the central rear
tion of travel and immediately pull it back.
area and the tailgate is opened or closed.
With this movement, the leg must pass
through the ranges of both sensors.
General information
If the remote control is in the sensor area, the
tailgate can be opened or closed inadvertently
by an unconscious or alleged recognized foot
movement.
The sensor has an approximate range of
5 ft/1.50 m extending from the rear of the vehi‐
cle.
If the tailgate is opened with no-touch activa‐ Opening
tion, locked doors are not unlocked. Perform the foot movement described earlier.
Before the opening, the hazard warning sys‐
Safety information
tem flashes.
WARNING Moving your foot again will stop the opening
During no-touch activation, vehicle parts motion, and moving it one more time after that
may be touched, such as the hot exhaust gas will close the tailgate.
system. There is a risk of injury. When moving
your foot, make sure you have a firm stance Closing
and do not touch the vehicle.◀ Perform the foot movement described earlier.
WARNING Before closing, the hazard warning system
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐ flashes and an acoustic signal sounds.
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make Moving your foot again will stop the closing
sure that the area of movement of the tailgate motion, and moving it one more time after that
is clear during opening and closing.◀ will re-open the tailgate.
59
Malfunction Safety information

Remote control detection by the vehicle may WARNING
malfunction under the following circumstan‐
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
ces:
ing the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
▷ The battery of the remote control is dis‐ sure that the area of movement of the tailgate
charged. Replace the battery, refer to is clear during opening and closing.◀
page 54.
▷ Interference of the radio connection from NOTE
transmission towers or other equipment The tailgate swings back and up when it
with high transmitting power. opens. There is a risk of damage to property.
▷ Shielding of the remote control due to Make sure that the area of movement of the
metal objects. tailgate is clear during opening and closing.◀
Do not transport the remote control to‐ NOTE

gether with metal objects. Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit
▷ Interference of the radio connection from the rear window and heat conductors while
mobile phones or other electronic devices driving. There is a risk of damage to property.
in direct proximity to the remote control. Cover the edges and ensure that pointed ob‐
Do not transport the remote control to‐ jects do not hit the rear window.◀
gether with electronic devices.
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock‐ Opening and closing
ing request recognition function on the door
handles. Opening
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
Adjusting the opening height
the vehicle using the buttons of the remote
control or using the integrated key, refer to You can set how far the tailgate should open.
page 55. When adjusting the opening height, ensure
that there is a clearance of at least 4 in/10 cm
above the tailgate.
Tailgate 1. "My Vehicle"
General information 2. "Vehicle settings"
To avoid locking it in the vehicle, do not place 3. "Doors/Key"
the remote control in the cargo area. 4. "Tailgate"
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and 5. Monitor the tailgate and set the desired
the country version, it is possible to specify opening height.
whether the doors are also unlocked when un‐
locking with the remote control. Adjusting the
settings, refer to page 65.
60
From the outside ▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the

tailgate. Pressing again closes the tailgate.
▷ By pressing the button on the remote con‐
trol. Pressing again continues the opening
motion.
▷ By pressing the button in the driver's floor
area. Pressing again closes the tailgate.
Closing
▷ Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle. From the outside
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehicle or Press the button on tailgate's exterior.
have the remote control with you.
From inside the tailgate
Press the button on tailgate's exterior.
Without Comfort Access:
▷ Press button on the remote con‐
trol for approx. 1 second.
If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens
automatically to the adjusted opening height.
From the inside

With Steptronic transmission:
Push the button in the driver's floor
area.
Press button on the inside of the tailgate.
If the vehicle is locked, selector lever position
P must be engaged first. With Comfort Access:
With manual transmission:

With the vehicle stationary, press the
button in the driver's floor area twice in quick
succession.
If the vehicle is stationary, the tailgate opens

automatically to the adjusted opening height.
Interruption of the opening procedure

The opening procedure is interrupted in the ▷ Press button, arrow 1, on the inside of the
following situations: tailgate.
▷ When the vehicle starts moving. ▷ Press button, arrow 2.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of The vehicle will be locked after closing the
the tailgate. Pressing again closes the tail‐ tailgate. The driver's door must be closed
gate. for this purpose and the remote control
61
must be outside of the vehicle in the area Slide the switch into the arrow 1 position. The
of the tailgate. tailgate is secured and disconnected from the
central locking system.
Interruption of the closing procedure This is beneficial when the vehicle is parked
using a valet service. The remote control can
The closing procedure is interrupted in the fol‐
be handed out without the integrated key.
lowing situations:
▷ If the vehicle starts off with a jerky move‐ Trunk emergency unlocking
ment.
▷ By pressing the button on the outside of
the tailgate. Pressing again re-opens the
tailgate.
▷ By pressing the button on the inside of the
tailgate. Pressing again re-opens the tail‐
gate.
Malfunction
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
Safety information
The tailgate is unlocked.
WARNING
With manual operation of a blocked tail‐
gate, it can release itself unexpectedly from
the blockage. There is a risk of injury or risk of Driver profile
damage to property. Do not operate the tail‐
gate manually if it is blocked. Have it checked Concept
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐ In the driver profiles, individual settings for
fied service center or repair shop.◀ several drivers can be stored and called up
again when required.
Manual operation
General information
Operate the unlocked tailgate manually with a
slow and smooth motion. There are three driver profiles with which per‐
sonal vehicle settings can be stored. Every re‐
To close the tailgate fully, press down lightly
mote control has one of these driver profiles
only. Closing occurs automatically.
assigned.
Locking separately If the vehicle is unlocked using a remote con‐

trol, the assigned personal driver profile will be
The tailgate can be locked separately using the
activated. All settings stored in the driver pro‐
switch in the glove compartment. If the glove
file are automatically applied.
compartment is locked, the tailgate cannot be
opened. If several drivers use their own remote control,
the vehicle will adjust the personal settings
▷ The tailgate is locked, ar‐ during unlocking. These settings are also re‐
row 1. stored, if the vehicle has been used in the
▷ The tailgate is unlocked, ar‐ meantime by a person with a different remote
row 2. control.
62
Changes to the settings are automatically ▷ Head-up Display.

stored in the driver profile currently activated. ▷ Driving Dynamics Control.
If another driver profile is selected via iDrive, ▷ Seat position, exterior mirror position,
the settings stored in it will be applied auto‐ steering wheel position where applicable.
matically. The new driver profile is assigned to
Both the positions saved via the seat mem‐
the remote control currently used.
ory and the last position set are saved.
There is an additional guest profile available
▷ Intelligent Safety.
that is not assigned to any remote control. It
can be used to apply settings in the vehicle ▷ Active Blind Spot Detection.
without changing the personal driver profiles.
Profile management
For the system to be able to identify the driver
Selecting a driver profile
profile associated to a particular driver, the de‐ Regardless of the remote control in use, a dif‐
tected remote control must be clearly allo‐ ferent driver profile may be activated. This al‐
cated to the driver. lows you to call up personal vehicle settings,
even if you did not unlock the vehicle with your
This is the case when:
own remote control.
▷ The driver is only carrying his or her own
Via iDrive:
remote control.
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle. 1. "My Vehicle"
▷ The driver gets into the vehicle through the 2. "Driver profiles"
driver's door. 3. Select driver profile.
4. "OK"
Settings
▷ All settings stored in the called-up driver
The settings for the following systems and profile are automatically applied.
functions are stored in the active profile. The
scope of storable settings depends on country ▷ The called-up driver profile is assigned to
and equipment. the remote control being used at the time.
▷ Unlocking and locking. ▷ If the driver profile is already assigned to a

different remote control, this driver profile
▷ Lights. will apply to both remote controls.
▷ Climate control.
▷ Radio. Using a guest profile
▷ Instrument cluster. The guest profile is for individual settings that
are stored in none of the three personal driver
▷ Programmable memory buttons.
profiles.
▷ Volumes, tone.
Via iDrive:
▷ Control Display.
1. "My Vehicle"
▷ Navigation.
2. "Driver profiles"
▷ PDC Park Distance Control.
3. "Drive off (guest)"
▷ Rearview camera.
4. "OK"
▷ Side View.
▷ Top View.
63
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is not Via iDrive:

assigned to the current remote control.
1. "My Vehicle"
Renaming a driver profile 2. "Driver profiles"
A personal name can be assigned to the active 3. Select driver profile.
driver profile to avoid confusion between the The driver profile marked with this sym‐
driver profiles. bol can be exported.
Via iDrive: 4. "Export driver profile"
1. "My Vehicle" 5. Select a storage device for exporting the
driver profile.
▷ "USB device"
3. Select driver profile.
Select USB storage device, as needed,
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
refer to page 40.
bol can be renamed.
▷ Online.
4. "Change driver profile name"
5. Enter profile name. Importing driver profiles
6. Select the symbol. The existing settings of the active driver profile
are overwritten with the settings of the im‐
Resetting a driver profile ported driver profile.
The settings of the driver profile currently in Via iDrive:
use are reset to their factory settings.
1. "My Vehicle"
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. Select the driver profile to be overwritten.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐
3. Select driver profile. bol can be overwritten.
The driver profile marked with this sym‐ 4. "Import driver profile"
bol can be reset.
5. Select a storage device for importing the
4. "Reset driver profile" driver profile.
5. "OK" ▷ USB storage device: "USB device"
Select USB storage device as needed.
Exporting driver profiles
▷ Online.
Most settings of the active driver profile can be
exported. 6. Select the driver profile to be imported.
Exporting is helpful when storing and retrieving
personal settings, for instance before deliver‐
Displaying driver profiles during start
ing the vehicle to a workshop. The stored The driver profiles can be displayed during
driver profiles can be taken into another vehi‐ each start to select the desired profile.
cle. Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
64
3. "Show driver profiles at startup" The entire vehicle is unlocked.
System limits Tailgate

A clear assignment between the remote con‐ Depending on optional features and country
trol and driver may not be possible in the fol‐ version, this setting is not offered in some
lowing cases, for example. cases.
▷ The passenger unlocks the vehicle with his Via iDrive:
or her own remote control, but another
1. "My Vehicle"
person is driving.
2. "Vehicle settings"
▷ The driver unlocks the vehicle via Comfort
Access and has multiple remote controls 3. "Doors/Key"
with him or her. 4. "Tailgate" or "Tailgate and
▷ The driver changes, but the vehicle is not door(s)"
locked and unlocked. 5. Select desired setting:
▷ Multiple remote controls are located out‐ ▷ "Tailgate"
side of the vehicle. The tailgate is opened.
▷ "Tailgate and door(s)"
Settings The tailgate is opened and the doors
unlocked.
General information
Adjusting the last seat and mirror
Depending on your vehicle's equipment and
position
the country version, various settings for open‐
ing and closing are possible. Via iDrive:
These settings are stored for the driver profile, 1. "My Vehicle"
refer to page 62, currently used. 2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
Unlocking
The setting can be made for the driver
Doors profile marked with this symbol.
Via iDrive: 4. "Last seat position automatic"
When the vehicle is unlocked, the driver's seat
1. "My Vehicle"
and exterior mirrors resume their last set posi‐
2. "Vehicle settings" tions.
3. "Doors/Key" The most recent position is independent of the
4. "Driver's door" or "All doors" positions saved via the seat memory.
5. Select desired setting:
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
▷ "Driver's door only"
Via iDrive:
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
locks the entire vehicle. 2. "Vehicle settings"
▷ "All doors"
65
3. "Doors/Key" ▷ Acoustic alarm.

4. Deactivate or activate the desired confir‐ Depending on local regulations, the acous‐
mation signals. tic alarm may be suppressed.
▷ "Flash for lock/unlock" ▷ By switching on the hazard warning sys‐
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes, tem.
locking by one. ▷ By flashing the daytime running lights.
▷ With alarm system:
Switching on/off
"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"
When you lock and unlock the vehicle with the
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of
remote control or Comfort Access, the alarm
the horn.
system will also switch on or off at the same
time.
Automatic locking
Via iDrive: Opening the doors with the alarm
1. "My Vehicle" system switched on
2. "Vehicle settings" The alarm system is triggered when a door is
opened if the door was unlocked using the
3. "Doors/Key" integrated key in the door lock.
4. Select desired setting: Switching off the alarm, refer to page 67.
▷ "Lock automatically"
The vehicle locks automatically after a Opening the tailgate with the alarm
short period of time if no door is system switched on
opened after unlocking. The tailgate can be opened even when the
▷ "Lock after starting to drive" alarm system is switched on.
The vehicle locks automatically after After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and
you drive off. monitored again provided the doors are
locked. The hazard warning system flashes
once.
Alarm system
Panic mode
General information You can trigger the alarm system if you find
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm yourself in a dangerous situation.
system reacts to the following changes: ▷ Press button on the remote con‐
▷ Unauthorized opening of a door, the hood trol and hold for at least 3 sec‐
or the tailgate. onds.
▷ Movements in the car's interior. ▷ Briefly press the button on the remote con‐
trol three times in succession.
▷ Changes in the vehicle tilt, e. g., during at‐
tempts at stealing a wheel or when towing To switch off the alarm: press any button.
the vehicle.
▷ Disconnected battery voltage.
The alarm system signals these changes visu‐
ally and acoustically:
66
Indicator light on the interior mirror Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unauthor‐
ized action occurred.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ In duplex garages.
▷ During transport on trains carrying vehi‐
▷ The indicator light flashes briefly every
cles, at sea or on a trailer.
2 seconds:
▷ With animals in the vehicle.
The alarm system is switched on.
▷ At the gas station: if the vehicle is locked
▷ Indicator light flashes for approx. 10 sec‐
after refueling starts.
onds, then it flashes briefly every 2 sec‐
onds: The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion
sensor can be switched off in such situations.
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed
interior motion sensor
access points are secured.
When the still open access points are Press the remote control button again
closed, interior motion sensor and tilt alarm within 10 seconds as soon as the vehicle
sensor will be switched on. is locked.
▷ The indicator light goes out after unlock‐ The indicator light lights up for approx. 2 sec‐
ing: onds and then continues to flash.
The vehicle has not been tampered with. The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen‐
sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked
▷ The indicator light flashes after unlocking
again.
until the engine ignition is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
An alarm has been triggered. Switching off the alarm
▷ Unlock the vehicle with the remote control
or switch on the ignition, if needed through
Tilt alarm sensor emergency detection of remote control, re‐
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. fer to page 55.
The alarm system responds in situations such ▷ With Comfort Access:
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi‐
If you are carrying the remote control on
cle is towed.
your person, grasp the door handle on the
driver's or front passenger door com‐
Interior motion sensor pletely.
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
67
Power windows The window closes while the switch is be‐

ing held.
Safety information
▷ Pull the switch beyond the resistance
WARNING point.
When operating the windows, body parts The window closes automatically if the
and objects can be jammed. There is a risk of door is closed. Pulling again stops the mo‐
injury or risk of damage to property. Make sure tion.
that the area of movement of the windows is
clear during opening and closing.◀ Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 58.
Jam protection system

Overview
General information
If closing force exceeds a specific threshold as
a window closes, closing is interrupted.
The window opens slightly.
Safety information
WARNING
Accessories on the windows such as an‐
Power windows tennas can impact jam protection. There is a
risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the
area of movement of the windows.◀
Safety switch
Closing without the jam protection
Opening system
In case of danger from the outside or if ice
▷ Press the switch to the resistance might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol‐
point. lows:
The window opens while the switch is be‐
ing held. 1. Pull the switch past the resistance
point and hold it there.
▷ Press the switch beyond the resist‐ The window closes with limited jam pro‐
ance point. tection. If the closing force exceeds a spe‐
The window opens automatically. Pressing cific threshold, closing is interrupted.
the switch again stops the motion.
2. Pull the switch past the resistance
Convenient opening via the remote control, re‐
point again within approx. 4 seconds and
fer to page 53.
hold it there.
Closing The window closes without jam protection.
▷ Pull the switch to the resistance

point.
68
Safety switch Tilting up and closing the tilted glass

sunroof
General information Push switch briefly upward.
The safety switch in the driver's door can be
▷ The closed glass sunroof
used to prevent children, for instance from
tilts and the sun protection
opening and closing the rear windows using
opens slightly.
the switches in the rear.
▷ The opened glass sunroof
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, the
closes until it is in the tilted
safety function is switched off automatically.
position. The sun protection
does not move.
Switching on/off
▷ The tilted glass sunroof closes.
Press button.
The LED lights up if the safety func‐
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
tion is switched on.
sun protection separately
▷ Press the switch in the de‐
sired direction to the resist‐
Panoramic glass sunroof ance point and hold it there.
Holding down the switch
General information
opens the sun protection. If
The glass sunroof is ready for operation when the sun protection is already
the ignition is switched on. fully open, the glass sunroof
opens.
Safety information
The glass sunroof closes
WARNING while the switch is being
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐ held. If the glass sunroof is
ing the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury. already closed or in the tilted
Make sure that the area of movement of the position, the sun protection
glass sunroof is clear during opening and clos‐ closes.
ing.◀ ▷ Press the switch in the desired direction
past the resistance point.
Overview The sun protection opens automatically. If
the sun protection is already fully open, the
glass sunroof opens automatically.
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If
the glass sunroof is already closed or in the
tilted position, the sun protection closes
automatically.
Pressing the switch upward stops the mo‐
tion.
69
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and The glass sunroof closes with limited jam
sun protection together protection. If the closing force exceeds a
specific threshold, closing is interrupted.
Briefly press the switch twice in
succession in the desired direc‐
tion past the resistance point.
The glass sunroof and sun pro‐
tection move together. Pressing
the switch upward stops the motion.
2. Push the switch forward again past the re‐
Convenient opening via the remote control, re‐ sistance point and hold until the glass sun‐
fer to page 53. roof closes without jam protection. Make
Closing via Comfort Access, refer to page 58. sure that the closing area is clear.
Comfort position Closing from the raised position

In some models, the wind noises in the car's without jam protection
interior are lowest when the glass sunroof is If there is an external danger,
not fully open. In these models, the automatic push the switch forward past the
function initially only opens the glass sunroof resistance point and hold it.
up to this comfort position. The glass sunroof closes with‐
Pressing the switch again opens the glass sun‐ out jam protection.
roof fully.
Initializing after a power interruption
Jam protection system
General information
General information After a power failure during the opening or
If the closing force exceeds a certain value closing process, the glass sunroof can only be
when closing the glass sunroof, the closing op‐ operated to a limited extent.
eration is interrupted once the roof reaches the The system can be initialized under the follow‐
half-open position, or it is stopped when clos‐ ing conditions.
ing from the tilted position. The glass sunroof
▷ The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi‐
opens slightly.
tion.
Closing from the open position ▷ The engine is running.

without jam protection ▷ The external temperature is above
If there is an external danger, proceed as fol‐ 41 ℉/5 ℃.
lows: During initialization, the glass sunroof closes
without jam protection.
1. Push the switch forward past the resist‐
ance point and hold. Make sure that the closing area is clear.
70
Initializing the system

Press the switch up and hold it
until the initialization is com‐
plete:
Initialization begins within
15 seconds and is completed
when the glass sunroof and sun protection are
completely closed.
71
Controls Settings
Settings
Vehicle features and options a risk of sliding under the safety belt in an acci‐
dent. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
This chapter describes all standard, country- Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip. Adjust
specific and optional features offered with the the backrest so that it is in the most upright
series. It also describes features that are not position as possible and do not adjust again
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due while driving.◀
This also applies to safety-related functions WARNING
and systems. When using these functions and There is a risk of jamming when moving
systems, the applicable laws and regulations the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
must be observed. damage to property. Make sure that the area of
movement of the seat is clear prior to any ad‐
justment.◀
Sitting safely
An ideal seating position that meets the needs Manually adjustable seats
of the occupants can make a vital contribution
to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. Overview
In the event of an accident, the correct seating
position plays an important role. Additionally,
follow the following chapters for safe driving:
▷ Seats, refer to page 72.
▷ Safety belts, refer to page 76.
▷ Head restraints, refer to page 77.
▷ Airbags, refer to page 127.
1 Forward/backward
Seats 2 Thigh support
Safety information 3 Seat tilt

4 Backrest width
WARNING
5 Lumbar support
Seat adjustments while driving can lead
to unexpected movements of the seat. Vehicle 6 Height
control could be lost. There is a risk of an acci‐ 7 Backrest tilt
dent. Only adjust the seat on the driver's side
when the vehicle is stationary.◀
WARNING
With a backrest inclined too far to the
rear, the efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts can no longer be ensured. There is
72
Settings Controls
Forward/backward Seat tilt
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired Pull the lever and move the seat to the desired
direction. tilt. After releasing the lever, apply your weight
After releasing the lever, move the seat for‐ to the seat or lift it off to make sure the seat
ward or back slightly making sure it engages engages properly.
properly.
Electrically adjustable seats
Height
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
for the profile currently used. When the vehicle
is unlocked via the remote control, the position
is automatically retrieved if the function, refer
to page 65, is activated for this purpose.
The current seat position can be stored using
the memory function, refer to page 79.
Overview
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat
or lift it off, as necessary.
Backrest tilt
1 Memory function
2 Backrest width
3 Lumbar support
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the 4 Backrest tilt
backrest or lift it off, as necessary. 5 Forward/backward, height, seat tilt
73
Controls Settings
Forward/backward Backrest tilt
Push switch forward or backward. Move switch forward or backward.
Height Thigh support
Push switch up or down. Pull the lever at the front of the seat and adjust
the thigh support.
Seat tilt
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad‐
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar re‐
gion of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright posture.
▷ Press the front/rear section
of the button:
The curvature is increased/
decreased.
Move switch up or down.
▷ Press the upper/lower sec‐
tion of the button:
The curvature is shifted up/
down.
74
Settings Controls
Backrest width If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐

nutes after a stop, seat heating is activated au‐
Concept tomatically with the temperature selected last.
Adjusting the backrest width may improve lat‐ When ECO PRO is activated, refer to
eral support when taking corners. page 217, the heater output is reduced.
General information
Switching off
You can change the backrest width by adjust‐
ing the side wings of the backrest. Press and hold the button, until the
LEDs go out.
Settings
▷ Press the front section of Rear seat heating
the button:
Overview
The backrest width de‐
creases.
▷ Press the rear section of the
button:
The backrest width in‐
creases.
Front seat heating
Overview Seat heating
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level.
The maximum temperature is reached when
three LEDs are lit.
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi‐
nutes after a stop, seat heating is activated au‐
Seat heating tomatically with the temperature selected last.
When ECO PRO is activated, refer to
page 217, the heater output is reduced.
Switching on
Press button once for each tempera‐
ture level. Switching off
The maximum temperature is reached when Press and hold the button, until the
three LEDs are lit. LEDs go out.
75
Controls Settings
Safety belts that all occupants are wearing safety belts cor‐
rectly.◀
Number of safety belts and safety belt
WARNING
buckles
With a rear backrest that is not locked,
The vehicle is fitted with five safety belts to en‐
the protective function of the middle safety
sure occupant safety. However, they can only
belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of inju‐
offer protection when adjusted correctly.
ries or danger to life. If you are using the mid‐
The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear dle safety belt, lock the wider rear seat back‐
seat are intended for the persons sitting on the rest.◀
left and right.
The center safety belt buckle of the rear seat is WARNING
intended for the person sitting in the middle. The efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts, may not be fully functional or fail
General information in the following situations:
Always make sure that safety belts are being ▷ The safety belts or safety belt buckles are
worn by all occupants before driving off. Al‐ damaged, soiled, or changed in any other
though airbags enhance safety by providing way.
added protection, they are not a substitute for ▷ Belt tensioners or belt retractors were
safety belts. modified.
The upper shoulder strap's anchorage point Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
will be correct for adult seat occupants of ev‐ the event of an accident. There is a risk of inju‐
ery build if the seat is correctly adjusted. ries or danger to life. Do not modify safety
belts, safety belt buckles, belt tensioners, belt
Safety information retractors or belt anchors and keep them
WARNING clean. Have the safety belts checked after an
accident at the dealer’s service center or an‐
Use of a safety belt to buckle more than
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
one person will potentially defeat the ability of
the safety belt to serve its protective func‐
tion.There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Correct use of safety belts
Do not allow more than one person to wear a ▷ Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight to
single safety belt. Infants and children are not your body over your lap and shoulders.
allowed on an occupant's lap, but must be ▷ Wear the safety belt deep on your hips
transported and secured in designated child over your lap. The safety belt may not
restraint systems.◀ press on your stomach.
WARNING ▷ Do not rub the safety belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard or
The efficacy of safety gear, including
fragile objects.
safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly ▷ Avoid thick clothing.
fastened safety belt can cause additional inju‐ ▷ Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up‐
ries, for instance in the event of an accident or ward around your upper body.
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make sure
76
Settings Controls
Buckling the safety belt ▷ Before driving, install the removed head re‐
1. Slowly guide the safety belt out of the straints on the occupied seats.
holder when fastening it. ▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety belt ports the back of the head at as close to
buckle. The safety belt buckle must en‐ eye level as possible.
gage audibly. ▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back of
the head. Adjust the distance via the back‐
rest tilt as needed.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when moving
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
when moving the head restraint.◀
WARNING
Unbuckling the safety belt Objects on the head restraint reduce the
1. Hold the safety belt firmly. protective effect in the head and neck area.
2. Press the red button in the belt buckle. There is a risk of injury.
3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-up ▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
mechanism. ▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
Safety belt reminder for driver's and ▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
passenger's seat termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
Display in the instrument cluster ▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
The indicator light lights up and a sig‐ pillows, while driving.◀
nal sounds. Make sure that the safety
belts are positioned correctly. The Adjusting the height
safety belt reminder can also be activated if
objects are placed on the front passenger seat.
Front head restraints

Safety information
WARNING
A missing protective effect due to re‐
▷ To raise: push the head restraint up.
moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and ▷ To lower: press button, arrow 1, and push
neck area. There is a risk of injury. head restraint down.
77
Controls Settings
After setting the height, move the head re‐ Rear head restraints
straint up or down slightly, making sure it en‐
gages properly. Safety information
WARNING
Set the incline
A missing protective effect due to re‐
Three different tilt positions are available. moved or not correctly adjusted head re‐
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
▷ Before driving, install the removed head re‐
straints on the occupied seats.
▷ Adjust the head restraint so its center sup‐
ports the back of the head at as close to
eye level as possible.
▷ Adjust the distance so that the head re‐
straint is as close as possible to the back of
▷ Forward: pull the top edge of the head re‐ the head. Adjust the distance via the back‐
straint forward, arrow 1. rest tilt as needed.◀
▷ Back: press the button,arrow. 2. The head
WARNING
restraint folds as far back as possible.
Body parts can be jammed when moving
Removing the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is clear
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
when moving the head restraint.◀
sitting in the seat in question.
WARNING
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
protective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
▷ Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
▷ Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷ Only use accessories that have been de‐
termined to be safe for attachment to a
1. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐ head restraint.
sistance.
▷ Do not use any accessories, for instance
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the pillows, while driving.◀
head restraint out completely.
Folding down the head restraint
Installing
Only fold the head restraint back if no one will
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head be sitting in the seat in question.
restraint.
78
Settings Controls
Memory function
Concept
The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory func‐
tion:
▷ Seat position.
▷ Exterior mirror position.
▷ To the back: press the button, arrow 1, and ▷ Height of the Head-up Display.
fold the head restraint back, arrow 2.
▷ Forward: fold the head restraint toward the General information
front as far as it will go. Make sure that the Two memory locations with different settings
head restraint engages correctly. can be set for each driver profile, refer to
page 62.
Removing Depending on the vehicle equipment, the fol‐
lowing settings are not stored:
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question. ▷ Backrest width.
▷ Lumbar support.
Safety information
WARNING
Using the memory function while driving
can lead to unexpected movements of the
seat. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
risk of an accident. Only retrieve the memory
function when the vehicle is stationary.◀
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to
page 200. WARNING
2. Raise the head restraint up against the re‐ There is a risk of jamming when moving
sistance. the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the area of
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely.
justment.◀
Installing
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head
restraint.
79
Controls Settings
Overview Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is more
curved than the driver's side mirror.
The mirror setting is stored for the driver pro‐
file currently in use. When the vehicle is un‐
locked via the remote control, the position is
automatically retrieved if the function, refer to
Storing page 65, is activated for this purpose.
1. Switch on the ignition. The current exterior mirror position can be
2. Set the desired position. stored using the memory function, refer to
page 79.
3. Press button. The LED in the but‐
ton lights up. Safety information
4. Press selected button 1 or 2 while the LED WARNING
is lit. The LED goes out. Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
Button was pressed inadvertently: than they appear. The distance to the traffic
Press button again. behind could be incorrectly estimated, for in‐
stance while changing lanes. There is a risk of
The LED goes out. an accident. Estimate the distance to the traffic
behind by looking over your shoulder.◀
Calling up settings
The stored position is called up automatically. Overview
Press selected button 1 or 2.
The procedure stops when a switch for setting
the seat or one of the memory buttons is
pressed.
While driving, the seat position adjustment on
the driver's side is interrupted after a short
time.
Calling up of a seat position

deactivated 1 Settings
After a brief period, calling up stored seat posi‐ 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Monitor
tions is deactivated to save battery power. 3 Folding in and out
To reactivate calling up of a seat position:
▷ Open or close the door or tailgate. Selecting a mirror
▷ Press a button on the remote control. To change over to the other mirror:
▷ Press the Start/Stop button.
80
Settings Controls
Slide the switch. Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior

mirror
Adjusting electrically
Concept
Press button. If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
The mirror movement follows the but‐ the front passenger side is tilted downward.
ton movement. This improves your view of the curb and other
low-lying obstacles when parking, for instance.
Malfunction
Activating
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
mirror by pressing the edges of the mirror
1. Slide the switch to the driver's side
glass.
mirror position.
Folding in and out 2. Engage selector lever position R.
NOTE Deactivating
Depending on the vehicle width, the ve‐
Slide the switch to the passenger's
hicle can be damaged in vehicle washes. There
side mirror position.
is a risk of damage to property. Before wash‐
ing, fold in the mirrors by hand or with the but‐
ton.◀ Interior mirror, manually dimmable
Press button. Turn knob
Folding is only possible up to a speed of ap‐

prox. 15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the mirrors in and out is helpful in the
following situations:
▷ In vehicle washes.
▷ On narrow roads.
Mirrors that were folded in are folded out auto‐
matically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h. Turn the knob to reduce the blinding effect by
the interior mirror.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
whenever the ignition is switched on.
Automatic dimming feature

The exterior mirror on the driver's side is auto‐
matically dimmed. Photocells in the interior
mirror are used to control this.
81
Controls Settings
Interior mirror, automatic dimming Settings

feature
Overview
1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seating posi‐
Photocells are used for control: tion.
▷ In the mirror glass. 3. Fold the lever back up.
▷ On the back of the mirror.
Heated steering wheel
Overview
▷ Keep the photocells clean.
▷ Do not cover the area between the interior
mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Safety information
WARNING
Steering wheel adjustments while driving Heated steering wheel
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move‐
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust the steering wheel Switching on/off
while the vehicle is stationary only.◀
Press button.
▷ On: the LED lights up.

▷ Off: the LED goes out.
82
Transporting children safely Controls
Transporting children safely

The right place for children

Safety information system can no longer be used due to their age,
weight, and size.
WARNING
Unattended children or animals can Safety information
cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
selves and traffic, for instance due to the fol‐ WARNING
lowing actions: The safety belt cannot be fastened cor‐
▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button. rectly on children shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm
without suitable additional child restraint sys‐
▷ Releasing the parking brake.
tems. The efficacy of safety gear, including
▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐ safety belts, can be limited or lost when safety
dows. belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
▷ Engaging selector lever position N. fastened safety belt can cause additional inju‐
▷ Using vehicle equipment. ries, for instance in the event of an accident or
during braking and evasive maneuvers. There
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Secure chil‐
leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐ dren shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable
hicle. Take the remote control with you when child restraint systems.◀
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
Children on the front passenger seat

Always transport children in the rear
seat General information
Should it ever be necessary to use a child re‐
General information
straint system in the front passenger seat,
Accident research shows that the safest place make sure that the front, knee and side airbags
for children is in the rear seat. on the front passenger side are deactivated.
Transport children younger than 13 years of Automatic deactivation of front-seat passen‐
age or shorter than 5 ft/150 cm only in the rear ger airbags, refer to page 129.
seat in suitable child restraint systems de‐
signed for the age, weight and size of the child.
Children 13 years of age or older must wear a
safety belt as soon as a suitable child restraint
83
Controls Transporting children safely
Safety information WARNING

WARNING The protective effect of damaged child
restraint systems or of child restraint systems
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
exposed to an accident and their fastening
injure a child in a child restraint system when
systems can be limited or lost. A child can
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
e.g.,not sufficiently restrained, for instance in
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
the event of an accident or braking and evasive
airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or danger
GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.◀
to life. Have damaged child restraint systems
WARNING or of child restraint systems exposed to an ac‐
cident and their fastening systems checked
The stability of the child restraint system
and possibly replaced by the dealer’s service
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat
center or another qualified service center or re‐
adjustment or improper installation of the child
pair shop.◀
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐ On the front passenger seat
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that Deactivating airbags
seats and backrests are securely engaged or WARNING
locked. If possible, adjust the height of the
Active front-seat passenger airbags can
head restraints or remove them.◀
injure a child in a child restraint system when
the airbags are activated. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the front-seat passenger
Installing child restraint airbags are deactivated and that the PASSEN‐
systems GER AIRBAG OFF indicator light lights up.◀
After installing a child restraint system in the

General information front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
Pay attention to the specifications of the child knee and side airbags on the front passenger
restraint system manufacturer when selecting, side are deactivated.
installing, and using child restraint systems.
Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
automatically, refer to page 129.
Safety information
WARNING Seat position and height
The stability of the child restraint system Before installing a child restraint system, move
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat the front passenger seat as far back as possi‐
adjustment or improper installation of the child ble and bring it as far up as possible to obtain
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. the best possible position for the belt and to
Make sure that the child restraint system fits offer optimal protection in the event of an acci‐
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐ dent.
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is lo‐
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that cated in front of the belt guide of the child seat,
seats and backrests are securely engaged or move the front passenger seat carefully for‐
locked. If possible, adjust the height of the ward until the best possible belt guide position
head restraints or remove them.◀ is reached.
84
Backrest width Pay attention to the operating and safety infor‐

Adjustable backrest width: before installing a mation of the child restraint system manufac‐
child restraint system in the front passenger turer when installing and using LATCH child
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do restraint fixing systems.
not change the backrest width again and do
not call up a memory position. Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
Child seat security CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lb/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
Safety information
WARNING
If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tems are not correctly engaged, the protective
effect of the LATCH child restraint fixing sys‐
tem can be limited. There is a risk of injuries or
The rear safety belts and the front passenger danger to life. Make sure that the lower an‐
safety belt can be permanently locked to fas‐ chors are securely engaged and that the
ten child restraint systems. LATCH child restraint fixing system fits se‐
curely against the backrest.◀
Locking the safety belt

Position
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the Symbol Meaning
safety belt.
The corresponding symbol
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull
shows the mounts for the
it tight against the child restraint system.
lower LATCH anchors.
The safety belt is locked.
Seats equipped with lower an‐
Unlocking the safety belt chors are marked with a pair, 2,
of LATCH symbols.
1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle.
For vehicles equipped with a
2. Remove the child restraint system.
middle seat:
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com‐
It is not recommended to use
pletely.
the inner lower anchors of
standard outer LATCH posi‐
tions to fasten a child restraint
LATCH child restraint fixing system on the middle seat. Use
system the vehicle safety belt instead
for the middle seat.
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil‐
dren.
85
Controls Transporting children safely
Before installing LATCH child Anchors

restraint fixing systems The respective symbol shows the an‐
Pull the safety belt away from the area of the chor for the upper retaining strap.
child restraint system. Seats with an upper top tether are
marked with this symbol. It can be found on
Assembly of LATCH child restraint the rear seat backrest or the rear window shelf.
fixing systems
1. Install child restraint system, see manufac‐
Routing the retaining strap
turer's information.
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are prop‐
erly connected.
Child restraint systems with tether

strap
Safety information
WARNING
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly 1 Direction of travel
used for the child restraint system, the protec‐
2 Head restraint
tive effect can be reduced. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the upper retaining strap is 3 Hook for upper retaining strap
not guided across sharp edges and without 4 Anchor
twisting to the upper retaining strap.◀ 5 Seat backrest
WARNING 6 Upper retaining strap
If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro‐
tective effect of the child restraint system is Attaching the upper retaining strap to
limited or there is none. In particular situations, the anchor
for instance braking maneuvers or in case of an 1. Raise the head restraint, if needed.
accident, the rear backrest can fold forward.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Make
the supports of the head restraint.
sure that the rear backrests are locked.◀
3. If there is a retaining strap, run it between
NOTE the backrest and the cargo cover.
The anchors for the upper retaining 4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
straps of child restraint systems are only pro‐ the anchor.
vided for these retaining straps. When other 5. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
objects are mounted, the anchors can be dam‐ down.
aged. There is a risk of damage to property.
Only mount child restraint systems to the up‐ 6. Lower and lock head restraints as needed.
per retaining straps.◀
86
Locking the doors and

windows in the rear
Rear doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors down.
The door can now be opened from the outside

only.
Safety switch for the rear

Press button on the driver's door.
The LED lights up if the safety func‐
tion is switched on.
This locks various functions so that they can‐

not be operated from the rear.
87
Controls Driving
Driving
Vehicle features and options To save battery power when the engine is off,
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary
This chapter describes all standard, country- electronic systems/power consumers.
series. It also describes features that are not Safety measures
When switching off the ignition, the selector
lever position P is selected automatically if the
selector lever position D or R is selected.
systems, the applicable laws and regulations The ignition is switched off automatically in the
must be observed. following situations while the vehicle is station‐
ary and the engine is off:
▷ When locking the vehicle, and when the
Start/Stop button low beams are switched on.
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged
Concept completely, so that the engine can still be
Pressing the Start/Stop button started.
switches the ignition on or off ▷ When opening or closing the driver door, if
and starts the engine. the driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
Steptronic transmission: the en‐ the low beams are switched off.
gine starts with the brake pedal ▷ While the driver's safety belt is unbuckled
pressed when you press the Start/Stop button. with driver's door open and low beams off.
The low beams switch to parking lights after
Ignition on some minutes of no use.
Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop
button, and do not press on the brake pedal at
Radio-ready state
the same time.
General information
All vehicle systems are ready for operation.
In the radio-ready state, certain power con‐
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the in‐ sumers remain ready for operation.
strument cluster light up for a varied length of
time. Activating
To save battery power when the engine is off, With the engine running, press the Start/Stop
switch off the ignition and any unnecessary button.
electronic systems/power consumers.
If the engine is not running and the ignition is
switched on: the system automatically acti‐
Ignition off
vates radio-ready state when the door is
Steptronic transmission: press the Start/Stop opened if the lights are switched off or the day‐
button again without stepping on the brake. time running lights are switched on.
All indicator lights in the instrument cluster go
out.
88
Driving Controls
The radio-ready state remains active if, for in‐ ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
stance the ignition is automatically switched turn the front wheels in the direction of the
off for the following reasons: curb.
▷ Opening or closing the driver's door. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
▷ Unfastening of the driver's safety belt. also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.◀
▷ When automatically switching from low
beams to parking lights. NOTE
In the case of repeated starting attempts
Switching off automatically or repeated starting in quick succession, the
The radio-ready state is switched off automati‐ fuel is not burned or is inadequately burned.
cally in the following situations: The catalytic converter can overheat. There is
▷ If the ignition is switched off manually with a risk of damage to property. Avoid repeated
the Start/Stop button. starting in quick succession.◀
▷ After approx. 8 minutes.

Steptronic transmission
▷ When the vehicle is locked using the cen‐
tral locking system.
Starting the engine
▷ Shortly before the battery is discharged 1. Depress the brake pedal.
completely, so that the engine can still be
started. 2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
brief time and is stopped as soon as the engine
Starting the engine starts.
Safety information
DANGER
Engine stop
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐ Safety information
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐ WARNING
tain pollutants which are colorless and odor‐ Unattended children or animals can
less. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also cause the vehicle to move and endanger them‐
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is selves and traffic, for instance due to the fol‐
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and lowing actions:
ensure sufficient ventilation.◀ ▷ Pressing the Start/Stop button.
WARNING ▷ Releasing the parking brake.
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move ▷ Opening and closing the doors or win‐
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐ dows.
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle ▷ Engaging selector lever position N.
against rolling. ▷ Using vehicle equipment.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
against rolling away, follow the following: leave children or animals unattended in the ve‐
▷ Set the parking brake. hicle. Take the remote control with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.◀
89
Controls Driving
WARNING vehicle is traveling faster than about

An unsecured vehicle can begin to move 3 mph/5 km/h.
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle Engine stop
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following: The engine is switched off automatically dur‐
ing a stop under the following conditions:
▷ Set the parking brake.
Steptronic transmission:
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
turn the front wheels in the direction of the ▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
curb. tion D.
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, ▷ The brake pedal remains depressed while
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a the vehicle is stopped.
wheel chock.◀ ▷ The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
Steptronic transmission The air flow from the air conditioner is reduced
when the engine is switched off.
Switching off the engine
1. Engage selector lever position P with the Displays in the instrument cluster
vehicle stopped.
The READY display in the tach‐
2. Press the Start/Stop button. ometer signals that the Auto
The engine is switched off. Start/Stop function is ready to
The radio-ready state is switched on. start the engine automatically.
3. Set the parking brake.

The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic en‐
Auto Start/Stop function gine stop have not been met.
Concept
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel. Functional limitations
The system switches off the engine during a
The engine is not switched off automatically in
stop, for instance in traffic congestion or at
situations such as the following:
traffic lights. The ignition remains switched on.
The engine starts automatically for driving off. ▷ In case of a steep downhill grade.
▷ External temperature too low.
General information ▷ The external temperature is high and auto‐
Depending on the selected driving mode, the matic climate control is running.
system is automatically activated or deacti‐
▷ The car's interior has not yet been heated
vated.
or cooled to the required level.
After every start of the engine using the Start/
▷ The engine is not yet at operating temper‐
Stop button, the Auto Start/Stop function is in
ature.
the last selected state. When the Auto Start/
Stop function is active, it is available when the
90
Driving Controls
▷ The wheels are at a sharp angle or the ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐
steering wheel is being turned. lector lever position D to R, N or M/S.
▷ After driving in reverse. ▷ Steptronic transmission: change from se‐
▷ Where there is a risk of window condensa‐ lector lever position P to N, D, R or M/S.
tion when the automatic climate control is ▷ Where there is a risk of window condensa‐
switched on. tion when the automatic climate control is
▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged. switched on.
▷ At higher elevations. ▷ Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
▷ The hood is unlocked. ▷ Excessive cooling of the car's interior when

the heating is switched on.
▷ The parking assistant is activated.
▷ Stop-and-go traffic. Activating/deactivating the system
▷ Selector lever in selector lever position N, manually
M/S or R.
▷ Use of fuel with high ethanol content. Using the button
Starting the engine

The engine starts automatically under the fol‐
lowing conditions:
▷ Steptronic transmission: by releasing the
brake pedal.
After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
Safety mode
Press button.
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met: ▷ LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function is
deactivated.
▷ The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
the driver's door is open. The engine is started during an automatic
engine stop.
▷ The hood was unlocked.
The engine can only be stopped or started
Some indicator lights light up for a varied
via the Start/Stop button.
length of time.
▷ LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function is
The engine can only be started via the Start/
activated.
Stop button.
Switching off the vehicle during an
Functional limitations
automatic engine stop
Even if driving off was not intended, the deacti‐
During an automatic engine stop, the vehicle
vated engine starts up automatically in the fol‐
can be switched off permanently, for instance
lowing situations:
when leaving it.
▷ Excessive warming of the car's interior
when the air conditioning is switched on.
▷ The steering wheel is turned.
91
Controls Driving
Steptronic transmission: Applying

1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition is The lever automatically engages after being
switched off. The Auto Start/Stop function pulled up.
is deactivated. The indicator light lights up red. The
Selector lever position P is engaged auto‐ parking brake is set.
matically. Lower light: indicator light in Canadian
2. Set the parking brake. models
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button.
If for once use during driving is required, en‐
Automatic deactivation gage the parking brake slightly and hold the
button down.
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func‐
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea‐ To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake ac‐
sons, for instance if no driver is detected. tion, lightly apply the parking brake periodically
while coasting, if traffic conditions permit.
Malfunction The brake lights will not light up if the parking
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer brake is set.
switches off the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. It is possible to Releasing
continue driving. Have the system checked by
a dealer’s service center or another qualified
Parking brake
Safety information
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move Raise lever slightly, press the button and guide
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐ the lever down.
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
against rolling.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured Turn signal, high beams,
against rolling away, follow the following: headlight flasher
Turn signal
turn the front wheels in the direction of the Turn signal in exterior mirror
curb.
When driving and during operation of the turn
▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope, signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a in the exterior mirrors, so that the signal lights
wheel chock.◀ on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
92
Driving Controls
Using turn signals
▷ High beams on, arrow 1.

Press the lever past the resistance point. ▷ High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Triple turn signal activation

Lightly tap the lever up or down. Washer/wiper system
The turn signal flashes three times. General information
The function can be activated or deactivated. Do not use the wipers if the windshield is dry,
Via iDrive: as this may damage the wiper blades or cause
them to become worn more quickly.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle settings" Safety information
3. "Lighting"
WARNING
4. "Exterior lighting"
If the wipers start moving in the folded
5. "One-touch turn signal" away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
6. Select the desired setting. age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Settings are stored for the profile currently
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
used.
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
Signaling briefly
on.◀
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal NOTE
to flash. If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper
Malfunction motor can overheat when switching on. There
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator light is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the
indicates that a turn signal bulb has failed. windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
High beams, headlight flasher

Push the lever forward or pull it backward.
93
Controls Driving
Switching on Interval mode or rain sensor
Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the time
between wipes depending on the intensity of
the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di‐
rectly in front of the interior mirror. Without the
Press the lever up until the desired position is rain sensor, the frequency of the wiper opera‐
reached. tion is preset.
▷ Resting position of the wipers, position 0.

Safety information
▷ Intermittent operation or rain sensor, posi‐
tion 1. NOTE
▷ Normal wiper speed, position 2. If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle
▷ Fast wiper speed, position 3. washes. There is a risk of damage to property.
When travel is interrupted with the wiper sys‐ Deactivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.◀
tem switched on: when travel continues, the
wipers resume at their previous speed. Activating
Switching off and brief wipe
Press the lever up once from its standard posi‐

tion, arrow 1.
Press the lever down.
Wiping is started.
▷ Switching off: press the lever down until it
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
reaches its standard position.
▷ Brief wipe: press the lever down from the
standard position. Deactivating
The lever automatically returns to its initial Press the lever back into the standard position.
position when released.
94
Driving Controls
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of Cleaning the windshield

the rain sensor
Pull the lever.

Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency The system sprays washer fluid on the wind‐
or sensitivity of the rain sensor. shield and activates the wipers briefly.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the rain
sensor. In addition, the headlights are cleaned at regu‐
lar intervals when the vehicle's lights are
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the rain
switched on.
sensor.
Windshield washer nozzles
Windshield and headlight The washer jets are automatically heated
washer system whenever the ignition is switched on.
Safety information Fold-away position of the wipers

WARNING
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win‐
Concept
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the The fold-out position enables the wipers to be
view. There is a risk of an accident. Only use folded away from the windshield.
the washer systems, if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use antifreeze, if needed.◀ General information
Important, for instance when changing the
NOTE wiper blades or when folding out under frosty
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, conditions.
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not Safety information
use the washer system when the washer fluid
WARNING
reservoir is empty.◀
If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or dam‐
age may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.◀
95
Controls Driving
NOTE Washer fluid

If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the wiper General information
motor can overheat when switching on. There All washer nozzles are supplied from one res‐
is a risk of damage to property. Defrost the ervoir.
windshield prior to switching the wipers on.◀
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
Folding away the wipers washer concentrate containing antifreeze can
1. Switch the ignition on and off again. be used.
2. Press and hold the wiper level down, until Recommended minimum fill quantity:
the wipers stop in a close to vertical posi‐ 0.2 US gal/1 liter.
tion.
Safety information
WARNING
Some antifreeze agents can contain
harmful substances and are flammable. There
is a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow the in‐
structions on the containers. Keep antifreeze
away from ignition sources. Do not refill oper‐
ating materials into different bottles. Store op‐
erating materials out of reach of children.
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from the United States: the washer fluid mixture ratio is
windshield. regulated by the U.S. EPA and many individual
states; do not exceed the allowable washer
fluid dilution ratio limits that apply. Follow the
usage instructions on the washer fluid con‐
tainer.
Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Concen‐
trate or the equivalent is recommended.◀
WARNING
Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on
contact with hot engine parts. There is a risk of
Folding down the wipers injury or risk of damage to property. Only add
washer fluid when the engine is cooled down.
After the wipers are folded back down, the
Next, fully close the lid of the washer fluid res‐
wiper system must be reactivated.
ervoir.◀
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the wind‐
shield. NOTE
2. Switch on the ignition. Silicon-containing additives in the
washer fluid for the water-repelling effect on
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return to
the windows can lead to damage to the wash‐
their resting position and are ready again
ing system. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
for operation.
96
Driving Controls
erty. Do not add silicon-containing additives to Safety information

the washer fluid.◀
WARNING
NOTE An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
Mixing different windshield washer con‐ and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
centrates or antifreeze can damage the wash‐ cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
ing system. There is a risk of damage to prop‐ against rolling.
erty. Do not mix different windshield washer In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
concentrates or antifreeze. Follow the informa‐ against rolling away, follow the following:
tion and mixing ratios provided on the contain‐ ▷ Set the parking brake.
ers.◀
turn the front wheels in the direction of the
Overview curb.
also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
wheel chock.◀
Selector lever positions
Drive mode D
Selector lever position for normal vehicle oper‐
ation. All gears for forward travel are activated
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the en‐ automatically.
gine compartment.
Reverse R
Malfunction Engage selector lever position R only when the
The use of undiluted windshield washer con‐
centrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can lead
to incorrect readings at temperatures below
Neutral N
+5 ℉/-15 ℃. The vehicle may be pushed or roll without
power, for instance in vehicle washes, refer to
page 99, in selector lever position N.
Parking position P
Concept Selector lever position, for instance for parking
The Steptronic transmission combines the the vehicle.
functions of an automatic transmission with The transmission blocks the drive wheels in
the possibility of manual shifting, if needed. selector lever position P.
Engage selector lever position P only when the
Selector lever position P is engaged automati‐
cally in situations such as the following:
97
Controls Driving
▷ After the engine is switched off when the ▷ Unintentional shifting from selector lever
vehicle is in the radio-ready state, refer to position P into another selector lever posi‐
page 88, or when the ignition is switched tion.
off, refer to page 88, while selector lever 1. Press and hold the button to release the
position R, D or M/S is engaged. selector lever lock.
▷ If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled, the
driver's door is opened, and the brake
pedal is not pressed while the vehicle is
stationary and selector lever position D,
M/S or R is engaged.
▷ After the ignition has been switched off
while selector lever position N is engaged.
Engaging selector lever positions

2. With the driver's safety belt fastened,
General information
briefly push the selector lever in the de‐
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after you sired direction, past a resistance point, if
select a drive mode, maintain pressure on the needed. The selector lever automatically
brake pedal until you are ready to start. returns to the center position when re‐
leased.
Only when the engine is running and the brake
pedal is depressed is it possible to change
from selector lever position P to another selec‐
tor lever position.
Engaging selector lever position D, N,

R
A selector lever lock prevents the following
faulty operation:
▷ Unintentional shifting into selector lever Engaging selector lever position P
position R.
Press button P.
98
Driving Controls
Rolling or pushing the vehicle Sport program M/S
General information Concept

In some situations, the vehicle is to roll without The shifting points and shifting times in the
its own power for a short distance, for instance Sport program are designed for a sportier driv‐
in a vehicle wash, or be pushed. ing style. The transmission, for instance shifts
up later and the shifting times are shorter.
Engaging selector lever position N
1. Start the engine while pressing on the Activating the sport program
brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Touch the selector lever lock and engage
selector lever position N.
5. Switch the engine off.
In this way, the ignition remains switched
on, and a Check-Control message is dis‐
played. Press the selector lever to the left out of selec‐
The vehicle may roll. tor lever position D.
NOTE The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, for instance S1.
Selector lever position P is automatically
engaged when the ignition is switched off. The sport program of the transmission is acti‐
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not vated.
switch drive-ready state off in vehicle
washes.◀ Ending the Sport program
Irrespective of the ignition, the selector lever Push the selector lever to the right.
position P is automatically engaged after ap‐ D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
prox. 15 minutes.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be able to Manual mode M/S
change the selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if Concept
needed, refer to page 101. Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual
mode.
Kickdown
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance.
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the re‐
sistance point at the full throttle position.
99
Controls Driving
Activating manual mode With the appropriate transmission version, the

1. Press the selector lever to the left out of lowest possible gear can be selected by simul‐
selector lever position D, arrow 1. taneously activating kickdown and operating
the left shift paddles. This is not possible by
switching briefly via the shift paddles from se‐
lector lever position D to manual mode M/S.
Ending the manual mode

Push the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles
2. Push the selector lever forward or pull it
Concept
backward, arrows 2.
The shift paddles on the steering wheel allow
Manual mode becomes active and the gear is
you to shift gears quickly while keeping both
changed.
hands on the steering wheel.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster, for instance M1. General information
Shifting Shifting
▷ To shift down: press the selector lever for‐ The vehicle only shifts at suitable engine and
ward. road speeds.
▷ To shift up: pull the selector lever rear‐
wards. Short-term manual mode
The transmission continues shifting automati‐ In selector lever position D, actuating a shift
cally in certain situations, for instance when paddle switches into manual mode tempora‐
speed limits are reached. rily.
After conservative driving in manual mode
Steptronic Sport transmission: without acceleration or shifting via the shift
prevent automatic upshifting in M/S paddles for a certain amount of time, the trans‐
manual mode mission switches back to automatic mode.
The Steptronic Sport transmission does not With some transmission versions it is possible
automatically upshift in M/S manual mode to switch into automatic mode as follows:
once the maximum speed is reached, if one of
▷ Pull and hold right shift paddle.
the following conditions is met:
▷ In addition to the briefly pulled right shift
▷ DSC Dynamic Stability Control deacti‐
paddle, briefly pull the left shift paddle.
vated.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC activated. Continuous manual mode
▷ SPORT+ activated. In selector lever position S, actuating a shift
In addition, there is no downshifting for kick‐ paddle switches into manual mode perma‐
down. nently.
100
Driving Controls
Shifting lever into selector lever position N, ar‐

row N, until selector lever position N is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
▷ To shift up: briefly pull right shift paddle.

▷ To shift down: briefly pull left shift paddle.
▷ With the appropriate transmission version,
the lowest possible gear can be selected 4. Release the selector lever.
by pulling and holding the left shift paddle. 5. Release brake, as soon as the starter
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in‐ stops.
strument cluster, followed by the current gear. 6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger area
and secure it against moving on its own.
Displays in the instrument cluster For additional information, see the chapter on
tow-starting and towing.
The selector lever position is dis‐
played, for example P.
Steptronic Sport transmission:
Launch Control
Concept
Electronic unlocking of the Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
transmission lock on surfaces with good traction under dry sur‐
rounding conditions.
General information
Electronically unlock the transmission lock to General information
maneuver vehicle from a danger area.
The use of Launch Control causes premature
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin the component wear since this function represents
engine. a very heavy load for the vehicle.
Before unlocking the transmission lock, set the Do not use Launch Control during the break-in,
parking brake to prevent the vehicle from roll‐ refer to page 210, period.
ing away.
To start with Launch Control do not steer the
steering wheel.
Engaging selector lever position N
1. Press and hold down brake pedal. Functional requirements
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter Launch Control is available when the engine is
must audibly start. at operating temperature. The engine is at op‐
3. Press the button on the selector lever, ar‐ erating temperature after an uninterrupted trip
row 1, and press and hold the selector of at least 6 miles/10 km.
101
Controls Driving
Start with launch control

While the engine is running:
1. Press button or select Sport+ with

the Driving Dynamics Control.
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument
cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up.
2. Engage selector lever position S.
3. With the left foot, forcefully press down on
the brake.
4. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full
throttle position, kickdown.
A flag symbol is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster.
5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Within
3 seconds, release the brake.
Repeated use during a trip

After Launch Control has been used, the trans‐
mission must cool down for approx. 5 minutes
before Launch Control can be used again.
Launch Control adjusts to the surrounding
conditions, when used again.
After using Launch Control

To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC Dy‐
namic Stability Control again.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF mode.
102
Displays Controls
Displays
Overview, instrument cluster
1 Fuel gauge 110 5 Engine oil temperature 110

2 Speedometer 6 Current fuel consumption
3 Messages, for instance Check Control 7 Electronic displays
4 Tachometer 110 8 Reset miles 110
Multifunctional instrument display

Concept
The instrument display is a variable display. instrument display adapt to the respective pro‐
When you change to a different program via gram.
Driving Dynamics Control, the displays in the
103
Controls Displays
General information
The display change in the instrument display Some of the displays in the instrument display
can be deactivated via iDrive. may differ from illustrations in this Owner's
Manual.
Overview
1 Fuel gauge 110 Selection lists 114

2 Messages, for instance Check Control ECO PRO displays 217
3 Speedometer 6 Engine oil temperature 110
4 Variable displays 7 Onboard Computer 115
5 Tachometer 110 8 Reset miles 110
Switching the change of display on 4. "Instrument panel"

and off 5. "ECO PRO info"
You can set whether the instrument display or "Driving mode view"
automatically changes to the ECO PRO or
SPORT in the display when you switch driving With Professional Navigation System:
modes. switching zoom function on/off
Via iDrive: The current speed can be shown enlarged in
1. "My Vehicle" the speedometer.
2. "iDrive settings" Via iDrive:
3. "Displays" 1. "My Vehicle"
104
Displays Controls
3. "Displays" 4. "Instrument panel"

5. "Magnifier function"
Sport displays
1 Speedometer 5 Performance display, if the vehicle is

2 Tachometer 110 equipped accordingly
3 Transmission display 6 Variable displays
4 Shift lights, when respectively equipped
In the Sport and Sport+ programs the instru‐ General information

ment display switches to a sporty view. This Steptronic Sport transmission: shift lights are
view supports a sporty driving style with more shown, when the SPORT+ driving program is
prominent representation of the tachometer, activated. The M manual mode of the trans‐
the transmission displays, and the vehicle mission must be activated too.
speed.
Switching on shift lights
Shift point indicator
Steptronic Sport transmission:
Concept 1. Select SPORT+ using the Driving Dynam‐
The shift point indicator indicates the optimum ics Control.
shift moment in the tachometer. Thus, with a 2. Activate the M/S manual mode of the
sporty driving style, the best possible vehicle transmission.
acceleration is achieved.
105
Controls Displays
Display Indicator/warning lights
General information
The indicator/warning lights in the instrument
cluster can light up in a variety of combinations
and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
▷ Current engine speed is displayed in the Red lights

tachometer.
Safety belt reminder
▷ Arrow 1: successive yellow illuminated
fields indicate an increase in the speed. Safety belt on the driver's side is not
▷ Arrow 2: successive orange illuminated buckled. For some country-specific
fields indicate the upcoming shift moment. models: passenger belt is not worn or
objects are detected on the front passenger
▷ Arrow 3: fields are illuminated in red. Do seat.
not wait any further to shift.
Indicator light flashes or is illuminated: safety
When the maximum possible speed is belt on the driver or passenger side is not
reached, the entire display flashes. When the buckled. The safety belt reminder can also be
maximum speed is exceeded, the supply of activated if objects are placed on the front pas‐
fuel is interrupted in order to protect the en‐ senger seat.
gine.
Make sure that the safety belts are positioned
correctly.
Check Control
Airbag system
Concept Airbag system and belt tensioner are
The Check Control system monitors functions not working.
in the vehicle and notifies you of malfunctions
Have the vehicle checked immediately
in the monitored systems.
by a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
fied service center or repair shop.
General information
A Check Control message is displayed as a
Parking brake
combination of indicator or warning lights and
SMS text messages in the instrument cluster The parking brake is set.
and in the Head-up Display. Release the parking brake, refer to
In addition, an acoustic signal may sound and page 92.
an SMS text message may appear on the Con‐
trol Display.
106
Displays Controls
Approach control warning pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator

pedal.
Indicator light illuminates: advance
warning is issued, for example when
there is the impending danger of a col‐ Yellow lights
lision or the distance to the vehicle ahead is
too small. Anti-lock Braking System ABS
Increase distance. Braking force boost may not be work‐
Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the im‐ ing. Avoid abrupt braking. Take the lon‐
minent danger of a collision when the vehicle ger braking distance into account.
approaches another vehicle at a relatively high Have the system immediately checked
differential speed. by a dealer’s service center or another
Intervention by braking or make an evasive ma‐ qualified service center or repair shop.
neuver.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control
Person warning The indicator light flashes: DSC con‐
Symbol in the instrument cluster. trols the drive and braking forces. The
If a collision with a person detected in vehicle is stabilized. Reduce speed and
this way is imminent, the symbol lights modify your driving style to the driving circum‐
up and a signal sounds. stances.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has malfunc‐
Symbol in the instrument display. tioned.
If a collision with a person detected in Have the system checked by a dealer’s service
this way is imminent, the symbol lights center or another qualified service center or re‐
up and a signal sounds. pair shop.
DSC, refer to page 152.
Orange lights
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
Active Cruise Control deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction
The number bars shows the selected Control is activated
distance from the vehicle driving DSC is deactivated or DTC is activated.
ahead.
DSC, refer to page 152, and DTC, refer
Active Cruise Control with Stop&Go function, to page 153.
ACC, refer to page 159.
Flat Tire Monitor FTM

Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control
The Flat Tire Monitor signals a loss of
Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle has tire inflation pressure in a tire.
been detected ahead of you.
Reduce your speed and stop cau‐
Indicator light flashes: the conditions tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma‐
are not adequate for the system to work. neuvers.
The system was deactivated but applies the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 135.
brakes until you actively resume control by
107
Controls Displays
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
The indicator light lights up: the Tire
trol components, in particular the catalytic
Pressure Monitor reports a low tire in‐
converter.
flation pressure or a flat tire. Follow the
information in the Check Control message. Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to
The indicator light flashes and then continu‐ page 257.
ously lights up: no flat tire or loss of tire infla‐
tion pressure can be detected. Lane departure warning
▷ Interference caused by systems or devices System is switched on and under cer‐
with the same radio frequency: after leav‐ tain circumstances warns if a detected
ing the area of the interference, the system lane is left without flashing beforehand.
automatically becomes active again.
Lane departure warning, refer to page 147.
▷ TPM was unable to complete the reset.
Reset the system again.
Green lights
▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s Turn signal
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop as needed. Turn signal switched on.
▷ Malfunction: have the system checked by a Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
dealer’s service center or another qualified light indicates that a turn signal bulb
service center or repair shop. has failed.
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 130. Turn signal, refer to page 92.
Steering system Parking lights, headlight
Steering system in some cases not Parking lights or headlights are

working. switched on.
Have the system checked by a dealer’s Parking lights/low beams, headlight
service center or another qualified service cen‐ control, refer to page 121.
ter or repair shop.
Front fog lights
Emissions Front fog lights are switched on.
▷ The warning light lights up: Front fog lights, refer to page 124.
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as High-beam Assistant
possible.
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
cumstances: High beams are switched on and off
automatically depending on the traffic
This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
situation.
firing in the engine.
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 124.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
system checked immediately; otherwise,
108
Displays Controls
Cruise control Displaying stored Check Control

The system is switched on. It maintains
messages
the speed that was set using the con‐ Via iDrive:
trol elements on the steering wheel. 1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
Blue lights 3. "Check Control"
High beams 4. Select the SMS text message.
High beams are switched on. Display

High beams, refer to page 93.
Check Control
Hiding Check Control messages At least one Check Control message is
displayed or is stored.
SMS text messages

SMS text messages in combination with a
symbol in the instrument cluster explain a
Check Control message and the meaning of
the indicator/warning lights.
Supplementary SMS text messages

Press and hold button on signal lever. Additional information, such as on the cause of
an error or the required action, can be called up
Continuous display via Check Control.
Some Check Control messages are displayed With urgent messages the added text will be
continuously and are not cleared until the mal‐ automatically displayed on the Control Display.
function is eliminated. If several malfunctions
occur at once, the messages are displayed Functions
consecutively. Depending on the Check Control message, the
The messages can be hidden for approx. following functions can be selected.
8 seconds. After this time, they are displayed ▷ "Owner's Manual"
again automatically. Display additional information about the
Check Control message in the Integrated
Temporary display Owner's Manual.
Some Check Control messages are hidden au‐ ▷ "Service request"
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds. The
Check Control messages are stored and can Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
be displayed again later. other qualified service center or repair
shop.
▷ "BMW Roadside Assistance"
Contact Roadside Assistance.
109
Controls Displays
Messages after trip completion Coolant temperature

Special messages displayed while driving are
If the coolant along with the engine becomes
displayed again after the ignition is switched
too hot, a Check Control message is displayed.
off.
A red indicator light is displayed.
Fuel gauge
Check the coolant level.
An arrow beside the fuel pump
symbol shows which side of the
vehicle the fuel filler flap is on. Odometer and trip odometer
Vehicle tilt position may cause
the display to vary. Display
Follow the information on refueling. ▷ Odometer, arrow 1.
▷ Trip odometer, arrow 2.
The yellow indicator light illuminates,
once the fuel reserve is reached.
Show/reset miles
Tachometer
Press the button.
Always avoid engine speeds in the red warning
field. In this range, the fuel supply is reduced to ▷ When the ignition is
protect the engine. switched off, the time, the
external temperature and
the odometer are displayed.
Engine oil temperature ▷ When the ignition is switched on, the trip
odometer is reset.
▷ Cold engine: the pointer is at
the low temperature end.
Drive at moderate engine
and vehicle speeds. External temperature
▷ Normal operating tempera‐
ture: the pointer is in the General information
middle or in the left half of If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃ or lower, a
the temperature display. signal sounds.
▷ Hot engine: the pointer is at the high end of A Check Control message is displayed.
the temperature range. In addition, a Check There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Control message is displayed.
Safety information
When the engine oil temperature is too
high, a red indicator light is displayed. WARNING
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there can be a risk of icy roads, for instance on
bridges or shady sections of road. There is a
110
Displays Controls
risk of an accident. Modify your driving style to ▷ The remaining range is shown on the On‐
the weather conditions at low temperatures.◀ board Computer.
▷ With a dynamic driving style, for instance
Display taking curves aggressively, the engine
function is not always ensured.
The external temperature is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. The Check Control message appears continu‐
ously below a range of approx. 30 miles/50 km.
Displaying the cruising range

The range can also be displayed as bar in the
instrument cluster.
Time
Via iDrive:
The time is displayed at the bot‐
tom of the instrument cluster. 1. "My Vehicle"
The time can be set on the Con‐ 2. "iDrive settings"

trol Display. 3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Additional indicators"
Date
The date is displayed in the On‐
board Computer. Current fuel consumption
The date and date format can be
set on the Control Display. Instrument cluster
Displays the current fuel con‐
sumption. Check whether you
Range are currently driving in an effi‐
cient and environmentally-
Safety information friendly manner.
NOTE
With a driving range of less than Instrument cluster with enhanced
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have features
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐ Displays the current fuel con‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to sumption. Check whether you
property. Refuel promptly.◀ are currently driving in an effi‐
cient and environmentally-
Display friendly manner.
With a low remaining range:
▷ A Check Control message is
displayed briefly.
111
Controls Displays
Displaying the current fuel Display

consumption
Via iDrive: Detailed information on service
requirements
1. "My Vehicle"
More information on the type of service re‐
2. "iDrive settings" quired may be displayed on the Control Dis‐
3. "Displays" play.
4. "Instrument panel" Via iDrive:
5. "Additional indicators" 1. "My Vehicle"
The bar display for the current fuel consump‐ 2. "Vehicle status"
tion is displayed in the instrument cluster.
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and le‐
gally mandated inspections are displayed.
Energy recovery
4. Select an entry to call up detailed informa‐
Display tion.
In coasting overrun mode the ki‐

Symbols
netic energy of the vehicle is
converted to electrical energy.
Symbols Description
The vehicle battery is partially
charged and fuel consumption No service is currently re‐
can be reduced. quired.
The deadline for scheduled

maintenance or a legally man‐
Service requirements dated inspection is approach‐
ing.
Concept
The function displays the service requirements The service deadline has al‐
and the corresponding maintenance scopes. ready passed.
General information
Entering appointment dates
After the ignition is switched on the instrument
cluster briefly displays available driving dis‐ Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle in‐
tance or time to the next scheduled mainte‐ spections.
nance. Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
A service advisor can read out the current set correctly.
service requirements from your remote con‐ Via iDrive:
trol.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "Vehicle inspection"
112
Displays Controls
5. "Date:" Speed Limit Info

7. Confirm. Speed Limit Info
The entered date is stored.
Concept
Automatic Service Request Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum
permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
Data regarding the service status or legally
mandated vehicle inspections is automatically
General information
transmitted to your dealer’s service center be‐
fore your vehicle is due for service. The camera in the area of the interior mirror
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as
You can check when your dealer’s service cen‐
well as variable overhead sign posts. Traffic
ter was notified.
signs with extra symbols for wet road condi‐
Via iDrive: tions, etc., are also detected and compared
with the vehicle's onboard data, such as from
1. "My Vehicle"
the rain sensor, and will be displayed depend‐
2. "Vehicle status" ing on the situation. The system takes into ac‐
3. "Teleservice Call" count the information stored in the navigation
system and also displays speed limits present
on routes without signs.
Gear shift indicator
Safety information
Concept WARNING
The system recommends the most fuel effi‐ The system does not relieve from per‐
cient gear for the current driving situation. sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
General information just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
Depending on the vehicle's features and coun‐ traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
try-specific version, the gear shift indicator is propriate.◀
active in the manual mode of the Steptronic
transmission and with manual transmission.
Overview
Suggestions to shift gear up or down are dis‐
played in the instrument cluster. Camera
Steptronic transmission: displaying
Example Description
Fuel efficient gear is set.
Shift into fuel efficient gear.
The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
113
Controls Displays
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐ ▷ When driving toward bright lights or strong
ror clean and clear. reflections.
▷ When the windshield in front of the interior
Switching on/off mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered by a
sticker, etc.
Via iDrive:
▷ In the event of incorrect detection by the
1. "My Vehicle" camera.
2. "iDrive settings" ▷ If the speed limits stored in the navigation
3. "Displays" system are incorrect.
4. "Instrument panel" ▷ In areas not covered by the navigation sys‐
5. "Speed limit information" tem.
If Speed Limit Info is switched on, it can be dis‐ ▷ When roads differ from the navigation,
played on the Info Display in the instrument such as due to changes in road routing.
cluster via the Onboard Computer. ▷ When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
Display ▷ If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
As an example, the following is displayed in the ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
instrument cluster: ately after vehicle delivery.
▷ When signs that are valid for a parallel road
Speed Limit Info
are detected.
Current speed limit.
Selection lists
General information
Speed Limit Info not available. Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following can be displayed or operated using
the buttons and the thumbwheel on the steer‐
ing wheel as well as the displays in the instru‐
ment cluster and the Head-up Display:
Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in the ▷ Current audio source.
Head-up Display.
▷ Redial phone feature.
System limits ▷ Turn on voice activation system.
The system may not be fully functional and It also displays programs of the Driving Dy‐
may provide incorrect information in the fol‐ namics Control.
lowing situations:
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ When signs are fully or partially concealed
by objects, stickers or paint.
▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
114
Displays Controls
Activating a list and adjusting the Calling up information on the Info

setting Display
On the right side of the steering wheel, turn Press and hold button on signal lever.
the thumbwheel to activate the corresponding Information is displayed in the Info Display of
list. the instrument cluster. Pressing the button re‐
peatedly displays additional information.
1. Turn the thumbwheel and select the de‐
sired setting.
2. Press the thumbwheel. Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the button on the turn
Display signal lever calls up the following information in
the Info Display:
▷ Range.
▷ Average consumption, fuel.
▷ Current consumption, fuel.
▷ Average speed.
▷ Date.
▷ Speed Limit Info.
▷ Depending on the equipment, the time of
Depending on the equipment version, the list arrival.
in the instrument cluster may differ from the il‐ When destination guidance is activated in
lustration. the navigation system.
▷ Depending on the equipment, the distance
to destination.
Onboard Computer When destination guidance is activated in
the navigation system.
Concept
▷ ECO PRO bonus range.
The Onboard Computer displays different ve‐
hicle data in the instrument cluster, such as Selecting information
average values.
You can select what information from the On‐
board Computer is to be displayed on the Info
Display of the instrument cluster.
115
Controls Displays
Via iDrive: Resetting average values

1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. Select the desired information.
Indication in the Info Display

The information from the On‐
board Computer is shown in the Press and hold button on turn signal lever.
Info Display in the instrument
cluster. Distance to destination
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the dis‐
tance remaining to the destination is displayed
Information in detail
if a destination is entered in the navigation sys‐
tem before the trip is started.
Range
The distance to the destination is adopted au‐
Displays the estimated cruising range available
tomatically.
with the remaining fuel.
The range is calculated based on your driving Time of arrival
style over the last 20 miles/30 km.
Depending on the vehicle equip‐
Average fuel consumption ment, the estimated time of ar‐
rival is displayed if a destination
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
is entered in the navigation sys‐
the period while the engine is running.
tem before the trip is started.
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the distance traveled since the last reset by the The time must be correctly set.
Onboard Computer.
Speed Limit Info
Average speed Speed Limit Info shows the current maximum
Periods in which the vehicle is parked with the permitted speed in the instrument cluster.
engine manually stopped are not included in
the calculation of the average speed. Onboard Computer on the Control
Display
Concept
The Onboard Computer displays different ve‐
hicle data on the Control Display, such as aver‐
age values.
General information
Two types of Onboard Computers are availa‐
ble on the Control Display:
116
Displays Controls
▷ "Onboard info": average values, such as Sport displays

the fuel consumption, are displayed. The
values can be reset individually. General information
▷ "Trip computer": the values deliver an On the Control Display, the current values for
overview of a certain distance and can be performance and torque can be displayed if
reset as often as necessary. the vehicle is appropriately equipped.
Calling up the Onboard Computer or Displaying sport displays

trip computer
Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Technology in action"
2. "Driving information"
3. "Sport displays"
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Resetting the Onboard Computer Speed warning

Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
Concept
A speed limit can be set that when reached will
2. "Driving information"
cause a warning to be issued.
3. "Onboard info"
4. "Consumption" or "Speed" General information
5. "OK" The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
exceeds the set speed limit again, after it has
Resetting the trip computer dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h.
Via iDrive:
Displaying, setting or changing the
1. "My Vehicle" speed warning
2. "Driving information" Via iDrive:
3. "Trip computer"
1. "My Vehicle"
4. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
▷ "Reset": all values are reset.
3. "Speed warning"
▷ "Automatic reset": all values are
4. "Warning at:"
reset approx. 4 hours after the vehicle
has come to a standstill. 5. Turn the Controller until the desired speed
is displayed.
5. If necessary, "OK"
117
Controls Displays
Activating/deactivating the speed Switching on/off

warning Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
1. "My Vehicle" 2. "iDrive settings"
2. "Vehicle settings" 3. "Displays"
3. "Speed warning" 4. "Head-Up Display"
4. "Speed warning" 5. "Head-Up Display"
Display
Setting your current speed as the
speed warning Overview
Via iDrive: The following information is displayed on the
Head-up Display:
1. "My Vehicle"
▷ Speed.
▷ Navigation system.
3. "Speed warning"
▷ Check Control messages.
4. "Select current speed"
▷ Selection list from the instrument cluster.
▷ Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only displayed
Head-up Display briefly as needed.
Concept Selecting displays in the Head-up

This system projects important information Display
into the driver's field of vision, for instance the Via iDrive:
speed.
1. "My Vehicle"
The driver can get information without averting
his or her eyes from the road.
3. "Displays"
Overview 4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Displayed information"
6. Select the desired displays in the Head-up
Display.
used.
Setting the brightness

The brightness is automatically adjusted to the
ambient brightness.
The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
118
Displays Controls
Via iDrive: 4. "Head-Up Display"

1. "My Vehicle" 5. "Rotation"
2. "iDrive settings" 6. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐

ting is selected.
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Brightness"
used.
6. Turn the Controller until the desired bright‐
ness is set. Display visibility
7. Press the Controller. The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
When the low beams are switched on, the Display is influenced by the following factors:
brightness of the Head-up Display can be ad‐ ▷ Certain sitting positions.
ditionally influenced using the instrument light‐
▷ Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis‐
ing.
play.
▷ Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
used.
▷ Wet roads.
Adjusting the height ▷ Unfavorable light conditions.
Via iDrive: If the image is distorted, have the basic set‐
tings checked by a dealer’s service center or
1. "My Vehicle"
another qualified service center or repair shop.
Follow the instructions for cleaning the Head-
3. "Displays" up Display, refer to page 273.
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Height" Special windshield
6. Turn the Controller until the desired height The windshield is part of the system.
is reached. The shape of the windshield makes it possible
7. Press the Controller. to display a precise image.
Settings are stored for the profile currently A film in the windshield prevents double im‐
used. ages from being displayed.
The height of the Head-up Display can also be For this reason, it is strongly suggested to
stored using the memory function, refer to have the special windshield replaced by a deal‐
page 79. er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop, if necessary.
Setting the rotation
The screen of the Head-up Display can be ro‐
tated around its own axis.
Vehicle status
Via iDrive: General information
1. "My Vehicle" The status can be displayed and actions per‐
2. "iDrive settings" formed for several systems.
3. "Displays"
119
Controls Displays
Opening the vehicle status

Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle status"
Information at a glance
▷ "Flat Tire Monitor": status of the Flat
Tire Monitor, refer to page 135.
▷ "Tire Pressure Monitor": status of the
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 130.
▷ "Engine oil level": Electronic engine
oil level check, refer to page 250.
▷ "Check Control": Check Control mes‐
sages are stored in the background and
can be displayed on the Control Display.
Displaying stored Check Control mes‐
sages, refer to page 109.
▷ "Service required": Displaying serv‐
ice requirements, refer to page 112.
▷ "Teleservice Call": service request.
120
Lights Controls
Lights
Vehicle features and options Symbol Function
This chapter describes all standard, country- Low beams.
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due Instrument lighting.
must be observed. Parking lights, low beams
and roadside parking lights
Overview General information
Position of switch: , ,
Switches in the vehicle
If the driver's door is opened when the ignition
is switched off, the exterior lighting is automat‐
ically switched off.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe‐
riods; otherwise, they might drain the battery
The light switch element is located next to the and it would then be impossible to start the en‐
steering wheel. gine.
Canada: when parking, switch on the one-
Symbol Function sided roadside parking light, refer to
page 121.
Front fog lights.
Low beams
Position of switch:
Automatic headlight control.
The low beams light up when the ignition is
Adaptive light functions.
switched on.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Canada: roadside parking light
Parking lights. Concept

The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
121
Controls Lights
Switching on Headlight courtesy delay feature
General information
The low beams stay illuminated for a particular
time if the high beams are switched on after
radio-ready state is switched off.
Setting the duration

Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
With radio-ready state switched off, press the
lever either up or down past the resistance
point. 3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting"
Switching off 5. "Pathway lighting"
Press the lever back into the standard position. 6. Set length of time.
rently used.
Welcome lights and
headlight courtesy delay
feature Automatic headlight control
Welcome lights Concept

The low beams are switched on and off auto‐
General information matically depending on the ambient bright‐
Depending on the vehicle equipment and the ness, for instance in tunnels, in twilight or if
ambient brightness, individual light functions there is precipitation.
may be switched on briefly when the vehicle is
unlocked. General information
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
Activating/deactivating cause the lights to be switched on.
Position of switch: , When emerging from a tunnel during the day,
Via iDrive: the low beams are not switched off immedi‐
ately but instead only after approx. 2 minutes.
1. "My Vehicle"
The low beams always stay on when the fog
2. "Vehicle settings" light is switched on.
3. "Lighting"
4. "Exterior lighting" Activating
5. "Welcome lights" Position of switch:
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ The indicator light in the instrument cluster is
rently used. illuminated when the low beams are switched
on.
122
Lights Controls
System limits General information

The automatic headlight control cannot serve The adaptive light functions may consist of
as a substitute for your personal judgment of one system or multiple systems, depending on
lighting conditions. the equipment version:
For example, the sensors are unable to detect ▷ Adaptive Light Control, refer to page 123.
fog or hazy weather. To avoid safety risks un‐ ▷ Cornering light, refer to page 123.
der these conditions, you should always switch
on the lights manually. Activating
Position of switch:
Daytime running lights The adaptive light functions are active when
the engine is running.
General information
Adaptive Light Control
Position of switch: , ,
Depending on the steering angle and other pa‐
The daytime running lights light up when the
rameters, the light from the headlight follows
ignition is switched on. After the ignition is
the course of the road.
switched off, the parking lights light up in posi‐
tion . To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap‐
tive Light Control does not swivel to the oppo‐
Activating/deactivating site lane when the vehicle is at a standstill.
In some countries, daytime running lights are

Cornering light
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti‐
vate the daytime running lights. In tight curves, for instance on mountainous
roads or when turning, an additional, cornering
Via iDrive:
light is switched on that lights up the inside of
1. "My Vehicle" the curve better when the vehicle is moving
below a certain speed.
The cornering light is automatically switched
3. "Lighting"
on depending on the steering angle or the use
4. "Exterior lighting" of turn signals.
5. Select the desired setting. When driving in reverse, the cornering lights
Settings are stored for the profile currently may be automatically switched on regardless
used. of the steering angle.
Adaptive light functions Adaptive headlight range

control
Concept
The adaptive headlight range control compen‐
Adaptive light functions enable dynamic illumi‐
sates for acceleration and braking operations
nation of the roadway.
in order not to blind the oncoming traffic and to
achieve optimum illumination of the roadway.
123
Controls Lights
High-beam Assistant The high-beam Assistant is deactivated when

manually switching the high beams on and off,
Concept refer to page 93.
The high-beam Assistant detects other traffic To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, press
participants early on and automatically the button on the turn signal lever.
switches the high beams on or off depending
on the traffic situation. System limits
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a
General information substitute for the driver's personal judgment of
The high-beam Assistant ensures that the high when to use the high beams. In situation that
beams are switched on, whenever the traffic require this, therefore switch off manually.
situation allows. In the low speed range, the The system is not fully functional in the follow‐
high beams are not switched on by the system. ing situations, and driver intervention may be
The system responds to light from oncoming necessary:
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to ▷ In very unfavorable weather conditions,
adequate illumination, for instance in towns such as fog or heavy precipitation.
and cities. ▷ When detecting poorly-lit road users such
The high beams can be switched on and off at as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
any time as usual. and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; and at animal crossings.
Activating/deactivating ▷ In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres‐
sions, in cross traffic or half-obscured on‐
coming traffic on highways.
▷ In poorly-lit towns and cities and in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Position of switch, depending on the vehicle Fog lights

equipment: ,
Press and hold button on signal lever. Front fog lights
The indicator light in the instrument Concept

cluster is illuminated when the low The front fog lights work alongside the low
beams are switched on. beams to illuminate a wider area of the road‐
way.
The headlights are automatically switched be‐
tween low beams and high beams.
Functional requirement
The blue indicator light in the instru‐ The low beams must be switched on before
ment cluster lights up when the system switching on the front fog lights.
switches on the high beams.
124
Lights Controls
Switching on/off Overview

Press button.
The green indicator light lights up if
the front fog lights are switched on.
If the automatic headlight control, refer to

page 122, is activated, the low beams will
come on automatically when you switch on the
front fog lights.
When the high beams or headlight flasher are
activated, the front fog lights are not switched 1 Interior lights
on. 2 Reading lights
Instrument lighting Switching the interior lights on/off

Press button.
The parking lights or low beams must be To switch off permanently: press the button
switched on to adjust the brightness. and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Settings Switching the reading lights on/off

Adjust the brightness with the Press button.
thumbwheel.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
reading lights are located next to the interior
lights in the front and rear.
Ambient light
Interior lights
General information
General information Depending on the equipment version, lighting
Depending on the equipment, the interior can be adjusted for some lights in the car's in‐
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and courtesy terior.
lights are controlled automatically.
Thumbwheel for the instrument lighting con‐ Selecting color scheme
trols brightness of some of these features. Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Ambient lighting"
125
Controls Lights
Setting the brightness

Depending on the equipment, the brightness
of the ambient light can be adjusted via the
thumbwheel for the instrument lighting or on
the Control Display.
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
6. Adjust the brightness.
126
Safety Controls
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag
3 Head airbag
Front airbags Side airbag

Front airbags help protect the driver and the In a lateral impact, the side airbag supports the
front passenger by responding to frontal im‐ side of the body in the chest and lap area.
pacts in which safety belts alone would not
provide adequate protection. Head airbag
In a lateral impact, the head airbag supports
the head.
127
Controls Safety
Ejection Mitigation ▷ Dashboard and windshield on the front

The head airbag system is designed as an passenger side must stay clear - do not at‐
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce tach adhesive labels or coverings and do
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants not attach brackets or cables, for instance
through side windows during rollovers or side for GPS devices or mobile phones.
impact events. ▷ Do not apply adhesive materials to the air‐
bag cover panels, do not cover them or
Knee airbag modify them in any way.
The knee airbag supports the legs in a frontal ▷ Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
impact. the front passenger side as a storage area.
▷ Do not place slip covers, seat cushions or
Protective action other objects on the front passenger seat
Airbags are not triggered in every impact situa‐ that are not specifically suited for seats
tion, for instance in less severe accidents or with integrated side airbags.
rear-end collisions. ▷ Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
jackets, over the backrests.
Information on optimum effect of the
▷ Never modify either the individual compo‐
airbags
nents or the wiring in the airbag system.
WARNING This also applies to steering wheel covers,
If the seat position is incorrect or the de‐ the dashboard, and the seats.
ployment area of the airbags is impaired, the ▷ Do not remove the airbag system.
airbag system cannot provide protection as in‐ Even when you follow all instructions very
tended and may cause additional injuries due closely, injury from contact with the airbags
to triggering. There is a risk of injuries or dan‐ cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
ger to life. Follow the information on achieving
the optimum protective effect of the airbag The ignition and inflation noise may lead to
system.◀ short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.
▷ Keep a distance from the airbags. Vehicle modifications for a person with disabili‐
▷ Always grasp the steering wheel on the ties may affect the air bag system; contact
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the BMW Customer Relations for further informa‐
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to keep tion.
the risk of injury to your hands or arms as Warnings and information on the airbags are
low as possible when the airbag is trig‐ also found on the sun visors.
gered.
▷ Make sure that occupants keep their heads Functional readiness of the airbag
away from the side airbag. system
▷ Make sure that the front passenger is sit‐
ting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her feet and Safety information
legs in the floor area and does not support WARNING
them on the dashboard.
Individual components can be hot after
▷ There should be no additional persons, an‐ triggering of the airbag system. There is a risk
imals or objects between an airbag and a of injury. Do not touch individual compo‐
person. nents.◀
128
Safety Controls
WARNING Safety information

Improperly executed work can lead to WARNING
failure, malfunction or unintentional triggering
To ensure the front-seat passenger air‐
of the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc‐
bag function, the system must be able to de‐
tion, the airbag system might not trigger as in‐
tect whether a person is sitting in the front
tended despite the accident severity. There is
passenger seat. The entire seat cushion area
a risk of injuries or danger to life. Have the air‐
must be used for this purpose. There is a risk
bag system checked, repaired, dismantled and
of injuries or danger to life. Make sure that the
scrapped by a dealer’s service center or an‐
front passenger keeps his or her feet in the
other qualified service center or repair shop.◀
floor area.◀
Correct function
Malfunction of the automatic
When the ignition is switched on, the deactivation system
warning light in the instrument cluster When transporting older children and adults,
lights up briefly and thereby indicates the front-seat passenger airbags may be deac‐
the operational readiness of the entire airbag tivated in certain sitting positions. In this case,
system and the belt tensioner. the indicator light for the front-seat passenger
airbags lights up.
Airbag system malfunctioning In this case, change the sitting position so that
▷ Warning light does not come on when the the front-seat passenger airbags are activated
ignition is switched on. and the indicator light goes out.
▷ The warning light lights up continuously. If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear.
Automatic deactivation of the front- To enable correct recognition of the occupied
seat passenger airbags seat cushion.
▷ Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
Concept or other items to the front passenger seat
The system reads if the front passenger seat is unless they are specifically determined to
occupied by measuring the human body's re‐ be safe for use on the front passenger
sistance. seat.
Front, knee, and side airbag on the front pas‐ ▷ Do not place any electronic devices on the
senger's side are activated or deactivated. front passenger seat if a child restraint sys‐
tem is to be installed on it.
General information ▷ Do not place objects under the seat that
Before transporting a child on the front pas‐ could press against the seat from below.
senger seat, refer to the safety information and ▷ No moisture in or on the seat.
instructions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
129
Controls Safety
Indicator light for the front-seat Strength of the driver's and front-seat
passenger airbags passenger airbag
The explosive power that activates driver's/
front-seat passenger airbags very much de‐
pends on the positions of the driver's/front
passenger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function over
the long term, calibrate the front seats as soon
as a respective message appears on the Con‐
trol Display.
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger Calibrating the front seats
airbags indicates the operating state of the WARNING
front-seat passenger airbags.
There is a risk of jamming when moving
The light indicates whether the airbags are ei‐ the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk of
ther activated or deactivated. damage to property. Make sure that the area of
▷ The indicator light lights up
justment.◀
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint A corresponding message appears on the
system or when the seat is Control Display.
empty. The airbags on the
1. Press the switch and move the respective
front passenger side are not
seat all the way forward, until it stops.
activated.
2. Press the switch forward again. The seat
▷ The indicator light does not light up when,
still moves forward slightly.
for instance a correctly seated person of
sufficient size is detected on the seat. The 3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
airbags on the front passenger side are ac‐ The calibration procedure is completed when
tivated. the message on the Control Display disap‐
pears.
Detected child restraint systems If the message continues to be displayed, re‐
The system generally detects children seated peat the calibration.
in a child restraint system, particularly in child If the message does not disappear after a re‐
restraint systems required by NHTSA at the peat calibration, have the system checked as
point in time when the vehicle was manufac‐ soon as possible.
tured. After installing a child restraint system,
make sure that the indicator light for the front-
seat passenger airbags lights up. This indi‐
cates that the child restraint system has been
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
detected and the front-seat passenger airbags
Concept
are not activated.
The system monitors tire inflation pressure in
the four mounted tires. The system warns you
if there is a significant loss of pressure in one
or more tires.
130
Safety Controls
General information All wheels green

Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire in‐ System is active and will issue a warning re‐
flation pressure and, depending on the model, lated to the tire inflation pressures stored dur‐
the tire temperature. ing the last reset.
With use of the system follow further informa‐
tion found under Tire inflation pressure, refer One to four yellow wheels
to page 230. A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation
pressure has occurred in the indicated tires.
The following conditions must be met for the Gray wheels
system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of It may not be possible to identify tire pressure
tire inflation pressure is not assured: losses.
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, a reset Possible causes:
was performed with the correct tire infla‐ ▷ Malfunction.
tion pressure.
▷ The system is being reset.
▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐
justed to a new value, a reset was per‐ Additonal information
formed.
The status control display additionally shows
▷ Wheels with TPM wheel electronics. the current tire inflation pressures and, de‐
pending on the model, tire temperatures. It
Status display shows the actual values read; they may vary
depending on driving style or weather condi‐
Current status tions.
The system status can be displayed on the
Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys‐ Resetting the system
tem is active. Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
1. "My Vehicle" 2. "Vehicle status"
2. "Vehicle status" 3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor" 4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
The current status is displayed. 5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform
reset".
Tire conditions
6. Drive away.
General information The wheels are displayed in gray and the fol‐
lowing is displayed "Resetting Tire Pressure
Tire and system status are indicated by the
Monitor…".
color of the wheels and a SMS text message
on the Control Display. After driving faster than 19 mph/30 km/h for a
short period, the set tire inflation pressures are
accepted as reference values. The reset is
completed automatically while driving.
131
Controls Safety
After a successfully completed reset, the Symbol Possible cause

wheels on the Control Display are shown in
green and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See The system has detected a wheel
label for recommended pressures." is dis‐ change, but no reset was done.
played. No reset was performed for the sys‐
You may interrupt this trip at any time. When tem. The system issues a warning
you continue the reset resumes automatically. based on the tire inflation pressures
stored during the last reset.
Messages Inflation was not carried out accord‐
ing to specifications.
General information
The tire inflation pressure has fallen
A low tire inflation pressure may cause the
below the level of the last reset.
DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be switched
on.
Measure
Safety information
1. Check the tire pressure and correct as
WARNING needed.
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐ 2. Reset the system.
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
such as steering and braking response. Run- If the tire inflation pressure is too low
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is
a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if Message
the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol‐
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
low the information on run-flat tires and contin‐
the instrument cluster.
ued driving with these tires.◀
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control
If a tire inflation pressure check is message appears on the Control Display.
required
Symbol Possible cause
Message There is a tire inflation pressure
A symbol with a Check Control message ap‐ loss.
pears on the Control Display. No reset was performed for the sys‐
tem. The system issues a warning
based on the tire inflation pressures
Measure
1. Reduce your speed and drive moderately.
Do not exceed a speed of
80 mph/130 km/h.
2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas
station, check and correct the tire inflation
pressure in all four tires, if necessary.
132
Safety Controls
3. Reset the system. If identification of flat tire damage is not

possible, please contact a dealer’s service
If there is a significant loss of tire center or another qualified service center
inflation pressure or repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or
Message by changing the wheel.
A yellow warning light is illuminated in Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire kit,
the instrument cluster. may damage the TPM wheel electronics. In
this case, have the electronics checked and re‐
In addition, a symbol with the affected tire ap‐ placed at the next opportunity.
pears in a Check Control message on the Con‐
trol Display. Run-flat tires
Symbol Possible cause
Safety information
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
WARNING
tire inflation pressure.
Your vehicle handles differently with a
No reset was performed for the sys‐
run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐
tem. The system issues a warning
stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐
based on the tire inflation pressures
duced, braking distances are longer and the
self-steering properties will change. There is a
risk of an accident.
Measure
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. 50 mph/80 km/h.◀
Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
Maximum speed
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
You may continue driving with a damaged tire
normal tires or run-flat tires.
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Run-flat tires, refer to page 238, are la‐
beled with a circular symbol containing the Continued driving with a flat tire
letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
Actions in the event of a flat tire 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
Normal tires 2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
1. Identify the damaged tire. 3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
To do this, check the air pressure in all four the next opportunity.
tires, for instance using the tire pressure If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
gage of a flat tire kit. is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires not have been reset. In this case, perform
is correct, the Tire Pressure Monitor may the reset.
not have been reset. In this case, perform
the reset.
133
Controls Safety
Possible driving range with a These circumstances may cause a warning

depressurized tire when temperatures fall very sharply.
The possible driving range varies depending
on the how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., Sudden tire pressure loss
speed, road conditions, external temperature. The system cannot indicate sudden serious
The driving range may be less but may also be tire damage caused by external circumstances.
more if an economical driving style is used.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight Failure to perform a reset
and used under favorable conditions, its possi‐ The system does not function properly if a re‐
ble driving range will be up to 50 miles/80 km. set has not been carried out, for instance a flat
tire is reported though tire inflation pressures
Vehicle handling with damaged tires are correct.
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle
differently, potentially leading to conditions Malfunction
such as the following: The yellow warning light flashes and is
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course. then illuminated continuously. A Check
▷ Longer braking distances. Control message is displayed. It may
not be possible to identify tire pressure losses.
▷ Changed self-steering properties.
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steer‐ Examples and recommendations in the follow‐
ing maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for in‐ ing situations:
stance curbs or potholes. ▷ A wheel without TPM wheel electronics is
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s
Final tire failure service center or another qualified service
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐ center or repair shop as needed.
cate the final failure of a tire. ▷ Malfunction: have system checked by a
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of dealer’s service center or another qualified
the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐ service center or repair shop.
dent. ▷ The system was unable to complete the
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s reset. Perform a system reset again.
service center or another qualified service cen‐ ▷ Interference caused by systems or devices
ter or repair shop. with the same radio frequency: after leav‐
ing the area of the interference, the system
System limits automatically becomes active again.
Temperature Declaration according to NHTSA/

The tire inflation pressure depends on the FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring
tire's temperature. System
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase the Each tire, including the spare (if provided)
tire's temperature, thus increasing the tire in‐ should be checked monthly when cold and in‐
flation pressure. flated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
The tire inflation pressure is reduced when the
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your
tire temperature falls again.
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
134
Safety Controls
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation FTM Flat Tire Monitor
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) Concept
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
The system detects tire inflation pressure loss
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
on the basis of rotation speed differences be‐
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres‐
tween the individual wheels while driving.
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, the
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you diameter and therefore the rotational speed of
should stop and check your tires as soon as the corresponding wheel changes. The differ‐
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres‐ ence will be detected and reported as a flat
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire.
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to The system does not measure the actual infla‐
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel ef‐ tion pressure in the tires.
ficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please Functional requirements
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for The following conditions must be met for the
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's system; otherwise, reliable flagging of a loss of
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, tire inflation pressure is not assured:
even if under-inflation has not reached the
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement, an initial‐
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
ization was performed with the correct tire
tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also
inflation pressure.
been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indi‐
cator to indicate when the system is not oper‐ ▷ After the tire inflation pressure was ad‐
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indica‐ justed to a new value, an initialization was
tor is combined with the low tire pressure performed.
telltale. When the system detects a malfunc‐
tion, the telltale will flash for approximately one Status display
minute and then remain continuously illumi‐ The current status of the flat tire monitor can
nated. This sequence will continue upon sub‐ be displayed, for instance whether the RPA is
sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal‐ active.
function exists. When the malfunction indicator
Via iDrive:
is illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. 1. "My Vehicle"
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of 2. "Vehicle status"
reasons, including the installation of replace‐
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning prop‐ The status is displayed.
erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction tell‐
tale after replacing one or more tires or wheels Initialization required
on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement An initialization must be performed in the fol‐
or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS lowing situations:
to continue to function properly. ▷ After the tire inflation pressure has been
adjusted.
▷ After a tire or wheel replacement.
135
Controls Safety
Performing initialization Symbol Possible cause

When initializing, the set tire inflation pres‐
There is a flat tire or a major loss in
sures serve as reference values in order to de‐
tect a flat tire. Initialization is started by con‐
firming the tire inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system when driving with Measure
snow chains.
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
Via iDrive: Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐
vers.
1. "My Vehicle"
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
2. "Vehicle status"
normal tires or run-flat tires.
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
Run-flat tires, refer to page 238, are la‐
4. Start the engine but do not drive off. beled with a circular symbol containing the
5. Start the initialization with: "Perform reset" letters RSC marked on the tire's sidewall.
6. Drive away.
Actions in the event of a flat tire
The initialization is completed while driving,
which can be interrupted at any time.
Normal tires
The initialization automatically continues when
1. Identify the damaged tire.
driving resumes.
To do this, check the air pressure in all four
Messages tires, for instance using the tire pressure
gage of a flat tire kit.
General information If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic Sta‐ is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not
bility Control is switched on, if needed. have been initialized. In this case, initialize
the system.
Safety information If identification of flat tire damage is not
possible, please contact a dealer’s service
WARNING
center or another qualified service center
A damaged regular tire with low or miss‐ or repair shop.
ing tire inflation pressure impacts handling,
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire kit or
such as steering and braking response. Run-
by changing the wheel.
flat tires can maintain limited stability. There is
a risk of an accident. Do not continue driving if
the vehicle is equipped with normal tires. Fol‐ Run-flat tires
low the information on run-flat tires and contin‐
Safety information
ued driving with these tires.◀
WARNING
Indication of a flat tire Your vehicle handles differently with a
run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐
A yellow warning light is illuminated in
stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐
the instrument cluster.
duced, braking distances are longer and the
In addition, a symbol with a Check Control self-steering properties will change. There is a
message appears on the Control Display. risk of an accident.
136
Safety Controls
Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of Final tire failure

50 mph/80 km/h.◀ Vibrations or loud noises while driving can indi‐
cate the final failure of a tire.
Maximum speed Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
You may continue driving with a damaged tire the tire could come loose and cause an acci‐
at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. dent.
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
Continued driving with a flat tire service center or another qualified service cen‐
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: ter or repair shop.
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu‐

System limits
vers.
The system could be delayed or malfunction in
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
the following situations:
3. Check the air pressure in all four tires at
▷ A natural, even tire inflation pressure loss
the next opportunity.
in all four tires will not be recognized.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four tires Therefore, check the tire inflation pressure
is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor may not regularly.
have been initialized. In this case, initialize
▷ Sudden serious tire damage caused by ex‐
the system.
ternal circumstances cannot be recognized
in advance.
Possible driving range with a
depressurized tire ▷ When the system has not been initialized.
The possible driving range varies depending ▷ When driving on a snowy or slippery road
on the how the vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., surface.
speed, road conditions, external temperature. ▷ Sporty driving style: spinning traction
The driving range may be less but may also be wheels, high lateral acceleration (drifting).
more if an economical driving style is used. ▷ When driving with snow chains.
If the vehicle is loaded with an average weight
and used under favorable conditions, its possi‐
ble driving range will be up to 50 miles/80 km. Intelligent Safety
Vehicle handling with damaged tires Concept
Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will handle Intelligent Safety enables central operation of
differently, potentially leading to conditions the driver assistance system.
such as the following:
Depending on how the vehicle is equipped, In‐
▷ Greater likelihood of swerving off course. telligent Safety consists of one or more sys‐
▷ Longer braking distances. tems that can help prevent an imminent colli‐
sion. These systems are active automatically
▷ Changed self-steering properties.
every time the engine is started using the
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt steer‐ Start/Stop button:
ing maneuvers or driving over obstacles, for in‐
▷ Approach control warning, refer to
stance curbs or potholes.
page 138.
▷ Pedestrian warning, refer to page 144.
137
Controls Safety
Safety information Camera

WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐
sonal responsibility to assess visibility and traf‐
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
propriate.◀
WARNING
Indicators and warnings do not relieve The camera is installed near the interior mirror.
from personal responsibility. Due to system Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may ror clean and clear.
not be output or they may be output too late,
incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐ Switching on/off
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐ The Intelligent Safety systems are automati‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀ cally active after every departure.
WARNING Press button: the systems are

switched off. The LED goes out.
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing Press button: the systems are switched on.
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. The LED lights up.
There is a risk of an accident. Switch all Intelli‐
Settings can be made on the Control Display.
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
towing.◀
Approach control warning

Overview
Depending on the equipment, the approach
Button in the vehicle control warning system consists of one of the
two systems:
▷ Approach control warning with City light
braking function, refer to page 139.
▷ Approach control warning with light brak‐
ing function, refer to page 141.
Intelligent Safety button
138
Safety Controls
Approach control warning Safety information

with City light braking WARNING
function The system does not relieve from per‐
Concept fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐
The system can help prevent accidents. If an just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch
accident cannot be prevented, the system will traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐
help reduce the collision speed. propriate.◀
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐ WARNING
nent collision and activates brakes independ‐
Indicators and warnings do not relieve
ently, if needed.
from personal responsibility. Due to system
The automatic braking intervention is done limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
with limited force and duration. not be output or they may be output too late,
A camera in the area of the interior mirror con‐ incorrectly, or without justification. There is a
trols the system. risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
The approach control warning is available even fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
if cruise control has been deactivated. tively intervene where appropriate.◀
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle WARNING

intentionally, the approach control warning and
braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
tem reactions.
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
General information gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
The system warns at two levels of an imminent towing.◀
danger of collision at speeds from approx.
3 mph/5 km/h. Time of warnings may vary with
Overview
the current driving situation.
Appropriate braking kicks in at speeds of up to Button in the vehicle
35 mph/60 km/h.
Detection range
Objects that the system can detect are taken

into account.
139
Controls Safety
Camera Warning with braking function
Display
A warning symbol appears in the instrument
cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision
with a detected vehicle is imminent.
Symbol Measure
Symbol lights up red: prewarning.

Brake and increase distance.
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic
Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐ signal sounds: acute warning.
ror clean and clear.
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐
ver, if necessary.
Switching on/off
Prewarning
Switching on automatically
This warning is issued, for instance when there
The system is automatically active after every
is the impending danger of a collision or the
driving off.
distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
Switching off The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning.
Press button: the system is switched
off. The LED goes out.
Acute warning with braking function
Re-press button: the system is switched on. Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐
The LED lights up. nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
proaches another object at a high differential
Setting the warning time speed.
The warning time can be set. The driver must intervene actively when there
Via iDrive: is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
assisted by a minor automatic braking inter‐
1. "My Vehicle" vention in a possible risk of collision.
2. "Vehicle settings" Acute warnings can also be triggered without
3. "Intelligent Safety" previous forewarning.
4. "Warning time"
Braking intervention
The warning prompts the driver to react. Dur‐
The selected time is stored for the driver pro‐ ing a warning, the maximum braking force is
file currently used. used. Prerequisite for the brake booster is suf‐
ficiently quick and hard stepping on the brake
pedal. If there is a risk of collision, the system
may assist with braking.When the vehicle is
traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come
to a complete stop.
140
Safety Controls
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle ▷ If the driving stability control systems are
stability has not been restricted, for instance limited or deactivated, for instance DSC
by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability OFF.
Control. ▷ If, depending on the vehicle equipment
The driver may cancel the braking intervention version, the field of view of the camera in
by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐ the mirror or the radar sensor is dirty or ob‐
tively moving the steering wheel. scured.
Object detection can be restricted. Follow the ▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
limitations of the detection range and func‐ gine via the Start/Stop button.
tional restrictions. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
ately after vehicle delivery.
System limits
▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
Safety information
the sun low in the sky.
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late, Warning sensitivity
incorrectly, or without justification due to the The more sensitive the warning settings are,
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or for example the warning time, the more warn‐
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐ ings are displayed. Therefore, there may also
tion regarding the system limits and actively be an excess of premature or unjustified warn‐
intervene, if needed.◀ ings and reactions.
Detection range
The system's detection potential is limited. Approach control warning
Thus, a system reaction might not come or with light braking function
might come late.
Concept
E.g., the following situations may not be de‐
tected: The system can help prevent accidents. If an
accident cannot be prevented, the system will
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach help reduce the collision speed.
them at high speed.
The system sounds a warning before an immi‐
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of nent collision and activates brakes independ‐
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles. ently, if needed.
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. The automatic braking intervention is executed
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. with limited braking force and for a brief period
only.
Functional limitations If the vehicle is equipped with Active Cruise
The system may not be fully functional in the Control with Stop&Go, the approach control
following situations: warning is controlled via the cruise control ra‐
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. dar sensor.
▷ In tight curves. The approach control warning is available even
if cruise control has been deactivated.
141
Controls Safety
With the vehicle approaching another vehicle WARNING

intentionally, the approach control warning and Due to system limits, individual functions
braking are delayed in order to avoid false sys‐ can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
tem reactions. with the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
General information gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
The system issues a two-phase warning of a towing.◀
possible risk of collision with vehicles at
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h. Time of Overview
warnings may vary with the current driving sit‐
uation. Button in the vehicle
Detection range

Objects that the system can detect are taken
into account.
Radar sensor
A radar sensor is located in the front bumper
Safety information for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the
WARNING vehicle.
propriate.◀
WARNING
from personal responsibility. Due to system Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may structed.
risk of an accident. Adjust driving style to traf‐
fic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tively intervene where appropriate.◀
142
Safety Controls
Switching on/off Prewarning

This warning is issued, for instance when there
Switching on automatically is the impending danger of a collision or the
The system is automatically active after every distance to the vehicle ahead is too small.
driving off. The driver must intervene actively when there
is a prewarning.
Switching off
Press button: the system is switched Acute warning with braking function
off. The LED goes out. Acute warning is displayed in case of the immi‐
Re-press button: the system is switched on. nent danger of a collision when the vehicle ap‐
The LED lights up. proaches another object at a high differential
speed.
The driver must intervene actively when there
Setting the warning time
is an acute warning. If necessary, the driver is
The warning time can be set. assisted by an automatic braking intervention
Via iDrive: in a possible risk of collision.
1. "My Vehicle" Acute warnings can also be triggered without
previous forewarning.
3. "Intelligent Safety" Braking intervention
4. "Warning time" The detection of objects can be influenced by
5. Select the desired setting. technical system limitations, for instance pe‐
The selected time is stored for the profile cur‐ destrians or stationary objects. Observe the
rently used. limitations of the detection range and func‐
tional restrictions.
Warning with braking function The warning prompts the driver to react. Dur‐
ing a warning, the maximum braking force is
Display used. Prerequisite for the brake booster is suf‐
A warning symbol appears in the instrument ficiently quick and hard stepping on the brake
cluster and in the Head-up Display if a collision pedal. The system can assist with automatic
with a detected vehicle is imminent. braking intervention if there is a risk of a colli‐
sion. The braking intervention can bring the
Symbol Measure vehicle to a complete stop.
Symbol lights up red: prewarning. The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle
stability has not been restricted, for instance
Brake and increase distance.
by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability
Symbol flashes red and an acoustic Control.
signal sounds: acute warning. At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h,
Brake and make an evasive maneu‐ the braking intervention occurs as a brief brak‐
ver, if necessary. ing pressure. No automatic delay occurs.
The driver may cancel the braking intervention
by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
tively moving the steering wheel.
143
Controls Safety
System limits be an excess of premature or unjustified warn‐

ings and reactions.
Safety information
WARNING
The system can react not at all, too late,
Person warning with City
incorrectly, or without justification due to the light braking function
system limits. There is a risk of accidents or
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐ Concept
tion regarding the system limits and actively The system can help prevent accidents with
intervene, if needed.◀ pedestrians.
When driving at city speeds, the system will is‐
Detection range sue a warning if there is imminent risk of a col‐
The system's detection potential is limited. lision with pedestrians, and support this with a
light braking function.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
might come late. The camera in the area of the interior mirror
controls the system.
tected:
General information
▷ Slow moving vehicles when you approach With sufficient brightness, the system warns
them at high speed. about possible collision danger with pedes‐
▷ Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of trians starting at approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to ap‐
you, or sharply decelerating vehicles. prox. 35 mph/60 km/h and assists with braking
▷ Vehicles with an unusual rear appearance. before a collision.
▷ Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you. The system reacts to people who are within
the detection range of the system.
▷ Pedestrians.
▷ Stationary objects. Detection range
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully functional in the
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
▷ In tight curves.
▷ If the driving stability control systems are
limited or deactivated, for instance DSC
OFF.
▷ If the radar sensor is dirty or obscured. The detection area in front of the vehicle is div‐
ided into two areas:
Warning sensitivity ▷ Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
The more sensitive the warning settings are, vehicle.
for example the warning time, the more warn‐ ▷ Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
ings are displayed. Therefore, there may also left of the central area.
144
Safety Controls
A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo‐ Overview

cated within the central area. A warning is is‐
sued about pedestrians who are located within Button in the vehicle
the extended area only if they are moving in
the direction of the central area.
Safety information
WARNING
traffic closely and actively intervene where ap‐ Intelligent Safety button
propriate.◀
WARNING Camera
from personal responsibility. Due to system
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may
WARNING
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated. ror clean and clear.
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/ Switching on/off
towing.◀
The system is automatically active after every
driving off.
Switching off
Press button: the systems are
switched off. The LED goes out.
Press button: the systems are switched on.
The LED lights up.
145
Controls Safety
Warning with braking function tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀
Display
If a collision with a person detected in this way Detection range
is imminent, a warning symbol appears on the The detection potential of the camera is lim‐
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Display. ited.
The red symbol is displayed and a sig‐ Thus, a warning might not be issued or be is‐
nal sounds. sued late.
With instrument display: the red sym‐ tected:
bol is displayed and a signal sounds.
▷ Partially covered pedestrians.
Intervene immediately by braking or make an ▷ Pedestrians that are not detected as such
evasive maneuver. because of the viewing angle or contour.
▷ Pedestrians outside of the detection range.
Braking intervention
▷ Pedestrians having a body size less than
The warning prompts the driver to react. Dur‐ 32 in/80 cm.
ing a warning, the maximum braking force is
used. Prerequisite for the brake booster is suf‐ Functional limitations
ficiently quick and hard stepping on the brake
The system may not be fully functional or may
pedal. If there is a risk of collision, the system
not be available in the following situations:
may assist with braking.When the vehicle is
traveling at a low speed, the vehicle may come ▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
to a complete stop. ▷ In tight curves.
The braking intervention occurs only if vehicle ▷ If the driving stability control systems are
stability has not been restricted, for instance deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
by deactivating the DSC Dynamic Stability
▷ If the field of view of the camera or the
Control.
windshield are dirty or covered.
The driver may cancel the braking intervention
▷ Up to 10 seconds after the start of the en‐
by stepping on the accelerator pedal or by ac‐
gine via the Start/Stop button.
tively moving the steering wheel.
▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
Object detection can be restricted. Follow the
ately after vehicle delivery.
limitations of the detection range and func‐
tional restrictions. ▷ If there are constant blinding effects be‐
cause of oncoming light, for instance from
System limits the sun low in the sky.
▷ When it is dark outside.
Safety information
WARNING
incorrectly, or without justification due to the
risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
146
Safety Controls
Lane departure warning Overview
Concept Button in the vehicle

The lane departure warning alerts when the
vehicle on roads with lane markings is about to
leave the lane.
General information
Depending on the country version, the system
issues a warning at speeds between
35 mph/55 km/h and 45 mph/70 km/h.
When switching on the system below this
speed, a message is displayed in the instru‐ Lane departure warning
ment cluster.
Warnings are issued by means of a steering
wheel vibration. The time of the warning may Camera
vary depending on the current driving situa‐
tion.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set before leaving the lane.
Safety information
WARNING
sonal responsibility to assess road and traffic
safety. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust
driving style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic Keep the windshield in front of the interior mir‐
closely and actively intervene where appropri‐ ror clean and clear.
ate. Do not jerk the steering wheel in response
to a warning.◀ Switching on/off
WARNING Press button.
from personal responsibility. Due to system ▷ On: the LED lights up.
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
rently used.
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ Lines: system is activated.
▷ Arrows: at least one lane marking
was detected and warnings can be
issued.
147
Controls Safety
Display in the instrument display ▷ When lane markings are covered in snow,
ice, dirt or water.
▷ Symbol orange: system is acti‐
vated. ▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
▷ Green symbol: at least one lane ▷ When the lane markings are covered by
marking was detected and warn‐ objects.
ings can be issued. ▷ When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
Issued warning ▷ When driving toward bright lights.
If you leave the lane mirror is fogged over, dirty or covered with
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking has stickers, etc.
been detected, the steering wheel vibrates. ▷ During calibration of the camera immedi‐
If the turn signal is set before changing the ately after vehicle delivery.
lane, a warning is not issued.
End of warning Active Blind Spot Detection

The warning is canceled in the following situa‐
tions: Concept
▷ Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles in
the blind spot or vehicles approaching from
▷ When returning to your own lane.
behind in the adjacent lane. A warning is is‐
▷ When braking hard. sued in various gradations in these situations.
▷ When using the turn signal.
General information
System limits
Safety information
WARNING
tion regarding the system limits and actively
intervene, if needed.◀ Two radar sensors in the rear bumper monitor
the area behind and next to the vehicle at
Functional limitations speeds above approx. 30 mph/50 km/h.
The system may not be fully functional in the The system indicates whether there are vehi‐
following situations: cles in the blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. from behind in the adjacent lane, arrow 2.
▷ In the event of missing, worn, poorly visi‐ The light in the exterior mirror housing is dim‐
ble, merging, diverging, or multiple lane med.
markings such as in construction areas.
148
Safety Controls
Before you change lanes after setting the turn Radar sensors
signal, the system issues a warning in the sit‐
uations described above.
The light in the exterior mirror housing flashes
and the steering wheel vibrates.
Safety information
WARNING
fic situation. There is a risk of an accident. Ad‐ The radar sensors are located in the rear
just driving style to traffic conditions. Watch bumper.
propriate.◀ Switching on/off
WARNING Press button.
from personal responsibility. Due to system ▷ On: the LED lights up.
limits, warnings or reactions of the system may ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
rently used.
Display
Light in the exterior mirror housing
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Prewarning
The dimmed light in the exterior mirror housing
Active Blind Spot Detection indicates when there are vehicles in the blind
spot or approaching from behind.
Acute warning
If the turn signal is set while a vehicle is in the
critical zone, the steering wheel vibrates briefly
149
Controls Safety
and the light in the exterior mirror housing General information

flashes brightly.
The warning stops when the turn signal is
switched off, or the other vehicle leaves the
critical zone.
Brief flashing
A brief flashing of the light during vehicle un‐
locking serves as system self-test.
System limits ▷ During normal brake application, the outer

brake lights light up.
Safety information
▷ During heavy brake application, the inner
WARNING brake lights additionally light up.
Alertness assistant
Concept
The system can detect decreasing alertness or
fatigue of the driver during long, monotonous
Functional limitations trips, for instance on highways. In this situa‐
The system may not be fully functional in the tion, it is recommended that the driver takes a
following situations: break.
▷ When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own. Safety information
▷ In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall. WARNING
▷ In tight curves or on narrow lanes. The system does not relieve from per‐
▷ If the bumper is dirty, iced up, or covered, sonal responsibility to assess one's physical
for instance by stickers. state. An increasing lack of alertness or fatigue
may not be detected or not be detected in
▷ If cargo protrudes.
time. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure
A Check Control message is displayed when that the driver is rested and alert. Adjust driv‐
the system is not fully functional. ing style to traffic conditions.◀
Function
Brake force display
The system is switched on each time the en‐
Concept gine is started and cannot be switched off.
Additional brake lights indicate emergency After travel has begun, the system monitors
braking to the traffic behind. This can reduce certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so that
the risk of a rear-end collision. decreasing alertness or fatigue can be de‐
tected.
150
Safety Controls
This procedure takes the following criteria into

account:
▷ Personal driving style, for instance steering
behavior.
▷ Driving conditions, for instance length of
trip.
Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h, the
system is active and can display a recommen‐
dation to take a break.
Break recommendation
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued, a
message is displayed in the Control Display
with the recommendation to take a break.
A recommendation to take a break is displayed
only once during an uninterrupted trip.
After a break, another recommendation to take
a break cannot be displayed until after approxi‐
mately 45 minutes.
System limits
The function may be limited in the following
situations, for instance and will either output an
incorrect warning or no warning at all:
▷ When the clock is set incorrectly.
▷ When the vehicle speed is mainly below
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷ With a sporty driving style, such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
▷ In active driving situations, such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷ When the road surface is poor.
▷ In the event of strong side winds.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle, for instance in the case of
a break during longer trips on highways.
151
Controls Driving stability control systems
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options DSC Dynamic Stability
This chapter describes all standard, country- Control
series. It also describes features that are not Concept
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due Within the physical limits, the system helps to
to the selected options or country versions. keep the vehicle on a steady course by reduc‐
This also applies to safety-related functions ing engine speed and by applying brakes to
and systems. When using these functions and the individual wheels.
must be observed. General information
DSC detects the following unstable driving
conditions, for instance:
Anti-lock Braking System ▷ Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteering.
ABS ▷ Loss of traction of the front wheels, which
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during can lead to understeering.
braking. Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
The vehicle maintains its steering power even page 153, is a version of the DSC where for‐
during full brake applications, thus increasing ward momentum is optimized.
active safety.
ABS is operational every time you start the en‐ Safety information
gine. WARNING
sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
Brake assistant tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system not independently react to all traffic situations.
automatically produces the greatest possible There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
braking force boost. It reduces the braking dis‐ style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
tance to a minimum during emergency stop. and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
This system utilizes all of the benefits provided WARNING
by the Antilock Brake System ABS.
When driving with roof load, for instance
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake pedal with roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety
for the duration of the emergency stop. may not be ensured in driving-critical situa‐
tions due to the elevated center of gravity.
There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to
property. Do not deactivate Dynamic Stability
Control DSC when driving with roof load.◀
152
Driving stability control systems Controls
Overview DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator light go

out.
Indicator/warning lights
When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis‐
played in the instrument cluster.
The indicator light lights up: DSC is de‐
activated.
DTC Dynamic Traction

DSC OFF button Control
Concept
Indicator/warning lights DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stability
The indicator light flashes: DSC con‐ Control where forward momentum is opti‐
trols the drive and braking forces. mized.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has The system ensures maximum headway on
malfunctioned. special road conditions or loose road surfaces,
for instance unplowed snowy roads, but with
somewhat limited driving stability.
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
When DTC is activated, the vehicle has maxi‐
General information mum traction. Driving stability is limited during
acceleration and when driving in curves.
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability is
reduced during acceleration and when driving Drive carefully.
in curves. You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC under the following special circumstances:
again as soon as possible. ▷ When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
Deactivating DSC ▷ When freeing vehicle from deep snow or
Press and hold this button but not lon‐ driving off from loose ground.
ger than approx. 10 seconds, until the ▷ When driving with snow chains.
indicator light for DSC OFF lights up in the in‐
strument cluster and displays DSC OFF. Deactivating/activating DTC Dynamic
DSC is switched off. Traction Control
The steering and, depending on the equip‐
ment, suspension are tuned for sporty driving. Activating DTC
Press button.
Activating DSC TRACTION is displayed in the instru‐
ment cluster and the indicator light for DSC
Press button.
OFF lights up.
153
Deactivating DTC COMFORT/ECO PRO

Press button again. Balanced control of the vehicle.
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica‐
tor light go out.
Variable sport steering
The support offered by the variable sport
steering changes according to the angle by
xDrive
which the steering wheel has been turned and
xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of your ve‐ the speed.
hicle. Concerted action by the xDrive and DSC So, for instance the steering angle of the front
Dynamic Stability Control further optimizes wheels is made larger when parking or taking
traction and driving dynamics. The xDrive all- tight corners. This makes it easier to drive
wheel-drive system variably distributes the around bends.
drive forces to the front and rear axles as de‐
manded by the driving situation and road sur‐ Furthermore, the system provides the steering
face. with more support at low speeds than at higher
ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance,
and makes steering more direct when driving
at faster speeds.
Dynamic Damping Control
By taking the angle by which the steering
Concept wheel has been turned and the speed into ac‐
count, a sporty steering response adapted to
This system reduces undesirable vehicle mo‐
the particular driving situation can be achieved.
tion when using a dynamic driving style or trav‐
eling on uneven road surfaces.
This enhances the driving dynamics and driv‐
Active rear spoiler
ing comfort depending on the road surface
condition and driving style.
Concept
The active rear spoiler increases driving stabil‐
Programs
ity. The rear spoiler extends and retracts auto‐
The system offers several different programs. matically depending on the driving speed.
The programs can be selected via Driving Dy‐
namics Control. General information
When using automatic vehicle washes, ensure
SPORT that the rear spoiler is retracted.
Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐ Clean the rear spoiler compartment regularly.
sorbers for greater driving agility.
Observe information on automatic washing
systems or vehicle washes, refer to page 270,
SPORT+
and caring for special components, refer to
Consistently sporty control of the shock ab‐ page 272.
sorbers for greater driving agility when driving
with limited driving stabilization.
154
Safety information be initialized while driving, and if this happens

the rear spoiler moves slightly.
NOTE
If the rear spoiler is hindered when ex‐ Automatic extension
tending and retracting, it can be damaged.
When traveling faster than 65 mph/110 km/h,
There is a risk of damage to property. Make
the rear spoiler is extended automatically.
sure that the rear spoiler can move freely, for
instance keep it free of ice.◀
Automatic retraction
WARNING When slowing to a speed below
With external, mechanical influence on 45 mph/70 km/h, the rear spoiler is retracted
the rear spoiler, it can be damaged. With an ex‐ automatically.
tended rear spoiler, mechanical components
are exposed. There is a risk of injury or risk of Manual mode
damage to property. Do not lean on the rear
spoiler and do not use it to push. Do not reach Concept
into the mechanical components.◀ Manual mode can be used when cleaning the
rear spoiler, for example.
Overview
Safety information
WARNING
When extending and retracting the rear
spoiler, body parts can be jammed. There is a
risk of injury. Make sure that the area of move‐
ment of the rear spoiler is clear during exten‐
sion and retraction.◀
Manual extension
Button for manual/automatic mode. With the ignition switched on or the
engine running, press the button.
Activate manual/ automatic mode The LED lights up. The rear spoiler is ex‐
tended.
Press button.
Manual retraction
▷ LED on: manual mode.
The rear spoiler can be retracted manually
▷ LED off: automatic mode.
when traveling at speeds below
The selected operating mode is retained even 65 mph/110 km/h.
after the ignition has been switched off.
Press button.
Automatic mode
The rear spoiler is retracted and the LED goes
General information out.
A retracted rear spoiler is in automatic mode The system is in automatic mode.
when the engine is started. The system may At vehicle speeds below 10 mph/20 km/h:
155
Press and hold the button until the Operating the programs
rear spoiler is fully retracted and the
LED goes out. Button Program
The system is in automatic mode. DSC OFF

TRACTION
Malfunction
SPORT+
A Check Control message is displayed. The
rear spoiler can no longer be automatically re‐ SPORT
tracted, extended, or adjusted, for instance COMFORT
due to temporary icing. ECO PRO
If a malfunction occurs, DSC Dynamic Stability
Control is switched on at speeds higher than
Automatic program change
45 mph/70 km/h.
The system may automatically switch to COM‐
In case of a temporary or an ongoing malfunc‐
FORT in the following situations:
tion, continue to drive at a maximum of
80 mph/130 km/h. ▷ Failure of Dynamic Damping Control.
In case of an ongoing malfunction, have the ▷ Failure of DSC Dynamic Stability Control.
system checked by a dealer’s service center or ▷ The vehicle has a flat tire.
another qualified service center or repair shop. ▷ When activating cruise control in TRAC‐
TION or DSC OFF mode.
Driving Dynamics Control DSC OFF

When DSC OFF, refer to page 153, is active,
Concept driving stability is limited during acceleration
The Driving Dynamics Control helps to fine- and when driving in curves.
tune the vehicle's settings and features. Vari‐
ous programs can be selected for this purpose. TRACTION
The Driving Dynamics Control and the DSC
When TRACTION is active, the vehicle has
OFF buttons can each be used to activate a
maximum traction on loose road surfaces. DTC
program.
Dynamic Traction Control, refer to page 153, is
activated. Driving stability is limited during ac‐
Overview celeration and when driving in curves.
Button in the vehicle SPORT+
Concept
Sporty driving with optimized chassis and sus‐
pension and adjusted drivetrain with limited
driving stabilization.
General information
Dynamic Traction Control is switched on.
156
The driver handles several of the stabilization The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
tasks. rently used.
Activating SPORT+ COMFORT

Press button repeatedly until SPORT+
appears in the instrument cluster and
Concept
the DSC OFF indicator light lights up. For a balanced tuning with maximum driving
stabilization.
Automatic program change Activating COMFORT

When activating cruise control, the program
Press button repeatedly until COM‐
automatically switches to SPORT mode.
FORT is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Indicator/warning lights
SPORT+ is displayed in the instrument cluster. In certain situations, the system automatically
changes to the NORMAL program, automatic
The DSC OFF indicator light is illumi‐
program change, refer to page 156.
nated: Dynamic Traction Control DTC
is activated.
ECO PRO
SPORT Concept
ECO PRO provides consistent tuning to mini‐
Concept mize fuel consumption for maximum range
Depending on the equipment, consistently with maximum driving stabilization.
sporty tuning of the suspension, steering, and Comfort functions and the engine Controller
drivetrain for greater driving agility with maxi‐ are adjusted.
mum driving stabilization.
The program can be configured to individual
The program can be configured to individual specifications.
specifications. The configuration is stored for
the driver profile currently in use.
Activating ECO PRO
Activating SPORT Press button repeatedly until ECO
PRO is displayed in the instrument
Press button repeatedly until SPORT cluster.
is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Configuring ECO PRO

Configuring SPORT
Via iDrive:
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
1. "My Vehicle"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure ECO PRO"
4. "Configure SPORT"
157
The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐ Servotronic

rently used.
Concept
Configuring driving program
Servotronic is a speed-dependent power
Settings can be made for the following driving steering function.
programs in Driving mode:
The system provides the steering force with
▷ SPORT, refer to page 157. more support at low speeds than at higher
▷ ECO PRO, refer to page 218. ones. This makes it easier to park, for instance,
and makes steering more direct when driving
Displays at faster speeds.
Furthermore, the steering force adapts accord‐
Program selection ing to the driving program, so that a direct,
Pressing the button displays a sporty feel or a comfortable steering response
list of the selectable programs. is conveyed.
Depending on your vehicle's op‐
tional features, the list in the in‐
strument cluster can differ from
the illustration shown.
Selected program
The instrument cluster displays
the selected program.
Drive-off assistant
Concept
This system supports driving off on uphill
grades. The parking brake is not required.
Driving off with the drive-off assistant

1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
2. Release the foot brake and drive off with‐
out delay.
After the foot brake is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Depending on the vehicle load or when a trailer
is used, the vehicle may roll back slightly.
158
Driving comfort Controls
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options Safety information
This chapter describes all standard, country- WARNING

specific and optional features offered with the The system does not relieve from per‐
series. It also describes features that are not sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
to the selected options or country versions. not independently react to all traffic situations.
This also applies to safety-related functions There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
and systems. When using these functions and style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
systems, the applicable laws and regulations and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
must be observed.
WARNING
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
Active Cruise Control with and possibly roll away. There is a risk of an ac‐
cident. Before exiting, secure the vehicle
Stop & Go function ACC against rolling.
Concept In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
Using this system, a desired speed and a dis‐
tance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted using ▷ Set the parking brake.
the buttons on the steering wheel. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
The system maintains the desired speed on turn the front wheels in the direction of the
clear roads. For this purpose, the vehicle ac‐ curb.
celerates or brakes automatically. ▷ On uphill grades or on a downhill slope,
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system also secure the vehicle, for instance with a
adjusts the speed of your vehicle so that the wheel chock.◀
set distance to the vehicle ahead is main‐ WARNING
tained. The speed is adjusted as far as the
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
given situation allows.
justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk
The distance can be adjusted in several steps. of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec‐ traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
tive speed. tively intervene where appropriate.◀
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a halt, and
then proceeds to drive again within a brief pe‐ WARNING
riod, the system is able to detect this within the Risk of accident due to too high speed
given system limits. differences to other vehicles, for instance in
the following situations:
General information ▷ When fast approaching a slowly moving
Depending on the driving settings, the features vehicle.
of the cruise control can change in certain ▷ Vehicle suddenly swerving into own lane.
areas.
▷ When fast approaching standing vehicles.
159
Controls Driving comfort
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Functional requirements

Watch traffic closely and actively intervene
where appropriate.◀ Speed range
The system is best used on well-constructed
Overview roads.
The minimum speed that can be set is
Buttons on the steering wheel 20 mph/30 km/h. The maximum speed that
can be set depends on the vehicle.
Button Function
The system can also be activated when sta‐
Cruise control on/off, interrupt, refer tionary.
to page 160
Switching on/off and interrupting
Store, maintain speed, refer to cruise control
page 161
Resume speed, continue cruise con‐ Switching on

trol, refer to page 162 Press button on the steering wheel.
Reduce distance, refer to page 162
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
light up and the mark in the speedometer is set
Increase distance, refer to page 162
to the current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
Rocker switch:
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
Set speed, refer to page 161 if necessary.
Radar sensor Switching off

A radar sensor is located in the front bumper To switch off the system while standing, step
for detecting vehicles on the road ahead of the on brake pedal at the same time.
vehicle. Press button on the steering wheel.
▷ If active: press twice.

▷ If interrupted: press once.
The displays go out. The stored desired speed
is deleted.
Interrupting manually
Press button on the steering wheel.
Always keep radar sensor clean and unob‐
structed. If interrupting the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
160
Interrupting automatically When the system is switched on, the current

The system is automatically interrupted in the speed is maintained and stored as the desired
following situations: speed.
▷ When the driver applies the brakes. The stored speed is displayed in the speedom‐
eter and briefly in the instrument cluster, refer
▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐
to page 162.
gaged.
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated
if necessary.
or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deacti‐
vated. The speed can also be stored by
▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter‐ pressing a button.
venes. Press button.
▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving
Dynamics Control. Changing the speed
▷ If the safety belt is unbuckled and the driv‐
er's door is opened while the vehicle is
standing still.
▷ If the system has not detected objects for
an extended period, for instance on a road
with very little traffic without curb or
shoulder markings.
▷ If the detection range of the radar is im‐
paired, for instance by dirt or heavy fog.
▷ After a stationary period of approx. 3 sec‐ Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
onds when the vehicle has been braked to until the desired speed is set.
a stop by the system.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
Setting the speed
road is clear.
Maintaining/storing the speed ▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to
the point of resistance, the desired speed
increases or decreases by approx.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired
speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/
10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
terrupted.
161
Adjusting distance Calling up stored speed and distance

Press button with the system
Safety information switched on.
WARNING
The system does not relieve from per‐ Displays in the instrument cluster
sonal responsibility. Due to the system limits,
braking can be late. There is a risk of accidents Desired speed and stored speed
or risk of damage to property. Be aware to the
traffic situation at all times. Adjust the distance ▷ Marking lights up green:
to the traffic and weather conditions and main‐ system is active, the mark‐
tain the prescribed safety distance, possibly by ing indicates the desired
braking.◀ speed.
▷ Marking lights up orange:
system is interrupted, the
Reduce distance
marking indicates the stored
Press button repeatedly until the de‐ speed.
sired distance is set.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐ is switched off.
tance, refer to page 162.
With instrument display: the symbol is
displayed in the speedometer similarly
Increase distance
to the mark for the desired speed.
Press button repeatedly until the de‐
sired distance is set.
Brief status display
Instrument cluster will display selected dis‐ Selected desired speed.
tance, refer to page 162.
Continuing cruise control If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the

conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
General information rently fulfilled.
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed. Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Make sure that the difference between current Selected distance to the vehicle ahead of you
speed and stored speed is not too large before is shown.
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐
Distance display
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
In the following cases, the stored speed value Distance 1
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
Distance 2
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Distance 3
162
Distance display Displays in the Head-up Display

Some system information can also be dis‐
Distance 4
played in the Head-up Display.
This value is set automatically after
the system is switched on. System limits
The system has been interrupted or
distance control is temporarily sup‐
Detection range
pressed because the accelerator
pedal is being pressed; a vehicle
was not detected.
Distance control is temporarily sup‐

pressed because the accelerator
pedal is being pressed; a vehicle
was detected.
Detected vehicle The detection capacity of the system and the

Symbol lights up orange: automatic braking capacity are limited.
A vehicle has been detected ahead of Two-wheeled vehicles driving ahead of you
you. for instance might not be detected.
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle has driven

away. Deceleration
ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, acti‐ The system does not decelerate when a sta‐
vate ACC by briefly stepping on the accelera‐ tionary obstacle is located in the same lane, for
tor pedal or pressing the RES button or the instance a vehicle at a red traffic light or at the
rocker switch. end of traffic congestion.
The system also does not react in the follow‐
Indicator/warning lights ing situations:
Symbol flashes orange: ▷ For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving
road users.
The conditions are not adequate for
the system to work. ▷ For red traffic lights.
The system was deactivated but applies the ▷ Stationary objects.
brakes until you actively resume control by ▷ For cross traffic.
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator ▷ For oncoming traffic.
pedal.
Symbol flashes red and a signal

sounds:
Brake and make an evasive maneuver,
if necessary.
163
Swerving vehicles Cornering
A vehicle driving in front of you is not detected If the desired speed is too high for a curve, the
until it is completely within the same lane as speed is reduced slightly, although curves can‐
your vehicle. not be anticipated in advance. Therefore, drive
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly into a curve at an appropriate speed.
swerves into your lane, the system may not be The system has a limited detection range. Sit‐
able to automatically restore the selected dis‐ uations can arise in tight curves where a vehi‐
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se‐ cle driving ahead will not be detected or will be
lected distance in certain situations, including detected very late.
if you are driving significantly faster than vehi‐
cles driving ahead of you, for instance when
rapidly approaching a truck. When a vehicle
driving ahead of you is reliably detected, the
system requests that the driver intervene by
braking and carrying out evasive maneuvers, if
needed.
Unexpected lane change
When you approach a curve the system may

briefly report vehicles in the next lane due to
the bend of the curve. If the system deceler‐
ates you may compensate it by briefly acceler‐
ating.
After releasing the accelerator pedal the sys‐
tem is reactivated and controls speed inde‐
pendently.
If a vehicle ahead of you unexpectedly moves

into another lane from behind a stopped vehi‐ Driving away
cle, you yourself must react, as the system In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
does not react to stopped vehicles. automatically; for example:
▷ On steep uphill grades.
▷ From bumps in the road.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
164
Weather General information

The following restrictions can occur under un‐ Depending on the driving settings, the features
favorable weather or light conditions: of the cruise control can change in certain
▷ Poorer vehicle recognition. areas.
▷ Short-term interruptions for vehicles that
Safety information
are already recognized.
Examples of unfavorable weather or light con‐ WARNING
ditions: The system does not relieve from per‐
▷ Wet conditions. sonal responsibility to assess the traffic situa‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
▷ Snowfall. not independently react to all traffic situations.
▷ Slush. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
▷ Fog. style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
▷ Glare.
Drive attentively, and react to the current traffic WARNING
situation. If necessary, intervene actively, for The use of the system can lead to an in‐
instance by braking, steering or evading. creased risk of accidents in the following situa‐
tions, for instance:
Engine power
▷ On winding roads.
The desired speed is also maintained downhill,
▷ In heavy traffic.
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if
engine power is insufficient. ▷ On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet
conditions, or on a loose road surface.
Malfunction There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to
The system cannot be activated if the radar property. Only use the system if driving at con‐
sensor is not aligned correctly. This may be stant speed is possible.◀
caused by damage incurred, for instance dur‐
WARNING
ing parking.
The desired speed can be incorrectly ad‐
A Check Control message is displayed if the
justed or called up by mistake. There is a risk
system fails.
of an accident. Adjust the desired speed to the
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
Cruise control
Concept Overview
Using this system, a desired speed can be ad‐
Buttons on the steering wheel
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed. The
Button Function
system accelerates and brakes automatically
as needed. Cruise control on/off, interrupting,
refer to page 166.
Store speed, refer to page 166.
165
Button Function ▷ When selector lever position D is disen‐

gaged.
Resume speed, continue cruise con‐
▷ Dynamic Traction Control DTC is activated
trol, refer to page 167.
or DSC Dynamic Stability Control is deacti‐
Rocker switch: vated.
Set speed, refer to page 166. ▷ If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter‐
venes.
Switching on/off and interrupting ▷ When SPORT+ is activated with Driving

cruise control Dynamics Control.
Switching on Setting the speed
Press button on the steering wheel. Maintaining/storing the speed
The marking in the speedometer is set to the

current speed.
Cruise control can be used.
if necessary.
Switching off
Press the rocker switch while the system is in‐
▷ If active: press twice. terrupted.
▷ If interrupted: press once. When the system is switched on, the current
The displays go out. The stored desired speed speed is maintained and stored as the desired
is deleted. speed.
The stored speed is displayed in the speedom‐
Interrupting manually eter and in the instrument cluster, refer to
When active, press the button on the page 167.
steering wheel. DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched on,
if necessary.
Interrupting automatically The speed can also be stored by pressing a

button.
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations: Press button.
▷ When the driver applies the brakes.
▷ If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few
seconds or released while a gear is not en‐
gaged.
▷ If the gear engaged is too high for the cur‐
rent speed.
166
Changing the speed In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷ When the system is switched off.
▷ When the ignition is switched off.
Calling up stored speed

The stored speed is reached again and main‐

tained.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
Displays in the instrument cluster
If active, the displayed speed is stored and the
vehicle reaches the stored speed when the Indicator light
road is clear. Depending on how the vehicle is equip‐
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed to ped, the indicator light in the instru‐
the point of resistance, the desired speed ment cluster indicates whether the sys‐
increases or decreases by approx. tem is switched on.
1 mph/1 km/h.
▷ Each time the rocker switch is pressed Desired speed and stored speed
past the point of resistance, the desired
▷ Marking lights up green:
speed increases or decreases by a maxi‐
system is active, the mark‐
mum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
ing indicates the desired
The maximum speed that can be set de‐ speed.
pends on the vehicle.
▷ Marking lights up orange:
▷ Pressing the rocker switch to the resist‐ system is interrupted, the
ance point and holding it accelerates or de‐ marking indicates the stored
celerates the vehicle without requiring speed.
pressure on the accelerator pedal.
▷ The marking does not light up: the system
After the rocker switch is released, the ve‐ is switched off.
hicle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
switch beyond the resistance point causes With instrument display: the symbol is
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly. displayed in the speedometer similarly
to the mark for the desired speed.
Continuing cruise control
Status display
General information
An interrupted cruise control can be continued Selected desired speed.
by calling up the stored speed.
Make sure that the difference between current If no speed is indicated, it is possible that the
speed and stored speed is not too large before conditions necessary for operation are not cur‐
calling up the stored speed. Otherwise, unin‐ rently fulfilled.
tentional braking or accelerating may occur.
167
Displays in the Head-up Display Safety information

Some system information can also be dis‐ WARNING
played in the Head-up Display.
System limits tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
Engine power There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
The desired speed is also maintained downhill, style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
but may not be maintained on uphill grades if and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
engine power is insufficient.
WARNING
Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis‐
PDC Park Distance Control tance Control is activated, the warning can be
delayed due to physical circumstances. There
Concept is a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
PDC is a support when parking. When you Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
slowly approach an object in the rear - or also driving off fast while PDC Park Distance Con‐
in the front of the vehicle if the feature is availa‐ trol is not yet active.◀
ble - then the object is reported through:
▷ Signal tones. Overview
▷ Visual display.
With front PDC: button in vehicle
With appropriate equipment: obstacles on the
side of the vehicle that are detected by the
sensors of the parking assistant can also be re‐
ported by the PDC. See side protection, refer
to page 170.
General information
The ultrasound sensors for measuring the dis‐
tances are located in the bumpers.
The maneuvering range, depending on the ob‐
stacle and environmental conditions, is approx. Park assistance button
6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given in the follow‐
Ultrasound sensors
ing situations:
Ultrasound sensors of the PDC,
▷ By the front sensors and the two rear cor‐
for instance in the bumpers.
ner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm from
the object.
▷ By the rear middle sensors at a distance to
the object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
▷ When a collision is imminent. Functional requirements
▷ With parking assistant: by the side sensors Ensure full functionality:
at approx. 24 in/60 cm from the object.
168
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with ▷ Off: the LED goes out.
stickers, bicycle racks. The rearview camera image is displayed if the
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed. reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
park assistance button.
Switching on/off
WARNING
The system switches on automatically in the Signal tones
following situations: An intermittent tone indicates when the vehi‐
▷ If selector lever position R is engaged cle is approaching an object. E.g., if an object
when the engine is running. is detected to the left rear of the vehicle, a sig‐
nal tone sounds from the left rear speaker.
The rearview camera also switches on.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
▷ If equipped with parking assistant: when
shorter the intervals.
obstacles are detected behind or in front of
the vehicle by PDC and the speed is slower If the distance to a detected object is less than
than approx. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
You may switch automatic activation on and off
when obstacles are detected. Via iDrive: With front PDC: if objects are simultaneously
located both in front of and behind the vehicle,
1. "My Vehicle" an alternating continuous signal is sounded.
2. "Vehicle settings" The signal tone is switched off, when selector
3. "Parking" lever position P is engaged on vehicles with
4. "Automatic PDC activation": only with re‐ Steptronic transmission.
spective equipment.
Volume
5. "Automatic PDC activation"
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to the
The setting is stored for the driver profile entertainment volume can be adjusted.
currently used.
Via iDrive:
If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activa‐
tion on obstacle detection, for instance in vehi‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
cle washes, to reduce false alarms. 2. "iDrive settings"
3. "Tone"
Automatic deactivation during forward
travel 4. "Volume settings"
The system switches off when a certain driving 5. "PDC"

distance or speed is exceeded. 6. Set the desired value.
Switch the system back on, if needed. The setting is stored for the driver profile cur‐
rently used.
With front PDC: switching on/off
manually
Press park assistance button.
169
Visual warning Display
The approach of the vehicle to an object is To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are markings are displayed on the vehicle at the
farther away are already displayed on the Con‐ sides.
trol Display before a signal sounds. ▷ Color markings: warning against detected
obstacles.
A display appears as soon as Park Distance
Control (PDC) is activated. ▷ Gray markings, hatched area: no obstacles
were detected.
The range of the sensors is represented in the
colors green, yellow and red. ▷ No markings, black area: the area next to
the vehicle was not yet captured.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐
played, the switch can be made to PDC:
Limits of side protection
The system only displays stationary obstacles
2. "Rear view camera"
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
With appropriate protection: side
protection The system does not detect whether an obsta‐
cle moves later on. If the vehicle is stationary,
Concept the markings are shown in black after a certain
time. The area next to the vehicle must be
The system warns of obstacles on the side of
newly captured.
the vehicle.
System limits
General information
The system uses the ultrasound sensors of Safety information
PDC and parking assistant.
WARNING
170
Limits of ultrasonic measurement ▷ On uneven surfaces, such as speed

Ultrasonic measurements might not function in bumps.
the following situations: ▷ In large buildings with right angles and
▷ For small children and animals. smooth walls, for instance in underground
garages.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for in‐
stance coats. ▷ In automatic vehicle washes.
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐ ▷ Due to heavy exhaust.
sound, for instance from passing vehicles ▷ Due to other ultrasound sources, for in‐
or loud machines. stance sweeping machines, high pressure
▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐ steam cleaners or neon lights.
aged or out of position. As soon as the malfunction due to other ultra‐
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as sound sources is no longer present, the sys‐
high relative humidity, wet conditions, tem is again fully functional.
snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind. If necessary, switch off automatic PDC activa‐
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other tion on obstacle detection, for instance in vehi‐
vehicles. cle washes, to reduce false alarms.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.

Malfunction
▷ With moving objects.
▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
The range of the sensors is shown as a shaded
ledges or cargo.
area on the Control Display.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by a
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure dealer’s service center or another qualified
such as fences. service center or repair shop.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
Surround View
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
Concept
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds. Surround View comprises various camera as‐
sistance systems that help the driver when
False warnings parking, maneuvering, and at complex exits
and intersections.
The system may issue a warning under the fol‐
lowing conditions even though there is no ob‐ ▷ Rearview camera, refer to page 172.
stacle within the detection range: ▷ Side View, refer to page 174.
▷ In heavy rain. ▷ Top View, refer to page 176.
▷ When sensors are very dirty or covered
with ice.
▷ When sensors are covered in snow.
▷ On rough road surfaces.
171
Rearview camera Camera
Concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The area
behind the vehicle is shown on the Control
Display.
Safety information
WARNING
The camera lens is located in the handle of the
tailgate.
tion. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv‐ The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and necessary, clean the camera lens.
vehicle surroundings closely and actively inter‐
vene where appropriate.◀ Switching on/off
Overview Switching on automatically

The system is switched on automatically if se‐
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly: lector lever position R is engaged when the en‐
button in the vehicle gine is running.

travel
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Switch the system back on, if needed.
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly:

switching on/off manually
Park assistance button Press park assistance button.

▷ Off: the LED goes out.
PDC Park Distance Control is shown on the
Control Display.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the
reverse gear is engaged when pressing the
172
Switching the view via iDrive Pathway lines

With PDC Park Distance Control activated or
Top View switched on:
2. "Rear view camera"
The rearview camera image is displayed.
Display on the Control Display
Functional requirement Pathway lines can be superimposed on the im‐

▷ The rearview camera is switched on. age of the rearview camera.
▷ The tailgate is fully closed. Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
▷ Keep the recording range of the camera required when parking and maneuvering on
clear. Protruding cargo or carrier systems level roads.
and trailers that are not connected to a Pathway lines depend on the current steering
trailer power socket can lead to malfunc‐ angle and are continuously adjusted to the
tions. steering wheel movements.
Activating assistance functions

Turning radius lines
More than one assistance function can be ac‐
tive at the same time.
Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
▷ Parking aid lines
"Parking aid lines"
Lanes and turning radius are indicated.
▷ Obstacle marking
"Obstacle marking"
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, ob‐ Turning radius lines can only be superimposed
stacles are highlighted. on the rearview camera image together with
pathway lines.
Turning radius lines show the course of the
smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Only one turning radius line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an‐
gle.
173
Obstacle marking Display settings
Brightness
With the rearview camera switched on:
2. Select the symbol.
3. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
ting is reached, and press the Controller.
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, obstacle

Contrast
markings can be faded into the image of the With the rearview camera switched on:
rearview camera. 1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark‐ 2. Select the symbol.
ings match the markings of the PDC Park Dis‐
tance Control. 3. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐
Parking using pathway and turning System limits

radius lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ra‐ Detection of objects
dius lines lead to within the limits of the Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
parking space. objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
If the vehicle is equipped accordingly, some
assistance functions also consider data from
PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance
Control chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Display
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti‐
mate the distance from the objects on the dis‐
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where play.
the pathway line covers the corresponding
turning radius line.
Side View
Concept
Side View provides an early look at cross traffic
at blind driveways and intersections. Road
users concealed by obstacles to the left and
right of the vehicle can only be detected rela‐
tively late from the driver's seat. To improve
visibility, two cameras in the front of the vehi‐
174
cle record the traffic situation on each side. The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If
The images from both cameras are shown si‐ required, clean the camera lenses.
multaneously on the Control Display.
Switching on/off
Safety information
WARNING Switching on/off manually
The system does not relieve from per‐ Press button.
tion. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv‐
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and Automatic deactivation during forward
vehicle surroundings closely and actively inter‐ travel
vene where appropriate.◀
The system switches off when a certain driving
distance or speed is exceeded.
Overview Switch the system back on, if needed.
Button in the vehicle Display

The traffic area to the left and right is displayed
on the Control Display.
Side View
Guidelines at the bottom of the image show

Cameras
the position of the front of the vehicle.
Brightness
With the Side View switched on:
2. "Brightness"
Two cameras integrated in the bumpers cap‐
Contrast
ture the image.
With the Side View switched on:
The two camera lenses are located on the
sides of the bumper. 1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
2. "Contrast"
175
3. Turn the Controller until the desired set‐ Overview

System limits
The cameras capture a maximum range of
330 ft/100 m.
Top View
Concept
Top View provides assistance in parking and
maneuvering. The area around the doors and Park assistance button
the road area around the vehicle are shown on
the Control Display for this purpose.
Cameras
General information
The image is captured by two cameras
integrated in the exterior mirrors and by the
rearview camera.
The range is at least 7 ft/2 m to the side and
rear.
In this way, obstacles up to the height of the
exterior mirrors are detected early.
Safety information Cameras at the bottom in the mirror housings.

WARNING
tion. There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driv‐
ing style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic and
vehicle surroundings closely and actively inter‐
vene where appropriate.◀
Rearview camera
The image quality may be impaired by dirt. If

required, clean the camera lenses.
176
Switching on/off
The system is switched on automatically if se‐
lector lever position R is engaged when the en‐
gine is running.
The rearview camera image is displayed. To
switch to the Top View:
1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed. The display appears as soon as Top View is
2. "Rear view camera" activated.
When the image of the rearview camera is dis‐

played, it is possible to switch to top view:
travel
The system switches off when a certain driving 1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
distance or speed is exceeded. 2. "Rear view camera"
Switch the system back on, if needed.
Brightness
Switching on/off manually With Top View switched on:
Press park assistance button. 1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed.
▷ Off: the LED goes out. ting is reached, and press the Controller.
Top View is displayed.
The rearview camera image is displayed if the Contrast
reverse gear is engaged when pressing the With Top View switched on:
Display 2. Select the symbol.
Visual warning ting is reached, and press the Controller.
The approach of the vehicle to an object can
be shown on the Control Display. Displaying the turning radius and
When the distance to an object is small, a red pathway lines
bar is shown in front of the vehicle, as it is in ▷ The static, red turning radius line shows
the PDC display. the space needed to the side of the vehicle
when the steering wheel is turned all the
way.
▷ The variable, green pathway line assists
you in assessing the amount of space ac‐
tually needed to the side of the vehicle.
The lane line depends on the engaged
gear and the current steering angle. The
177
track line is continuously adjusted for the ▷ Parking space search.

steering wheel movement. ▷ Parking.
1. Move the Controller to the left, if needed. Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
2. "Parking aid lines" on both sides of the vehicle.
Turning circle and pathway lines are displayed. The parking assistant calculates the best pos‐
sible parking line and takes control of steering
System limits during the parking procedure.
Top View cannot be used in the following sit‐ System status and instructions on required ac‐
uations: tions are displayed on the Control Display.
▷ With a door open. The parking assistant uses the sensors of PDC
▷ With the tailgate open. Park Distance Control.
▷ With an exterior mirror folded in.

Safety information
▷ In poor light.
WARNING
A Check Control message is displayed in some
of these situations. The system does not relieve from per‐
tion. Based on the limits of the system, it can‐
not independently react to all traffic situations.
Parking assistant There is a risk of an accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
Concept
and actively intervene where appropriate.◀
NOTE
The parking assistant can steer the vehi‐
cle over or onto curbs. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Watch traffic closely and ac‐
Also follow the safety information for PDC Park

Distance Control.
The system supports parking in the following Overview

situations:
▷ When parking parallel to the road, parallel Button in the vehicle
parking.
▷ When reverse parking diagonally to the
road, diagonal parking. The system orients
itself with the middle of the parking space
during diagonal parking.
General information
Parking assistant handling is divided into three
steps:
▷ Switching on and activating.
178
Park assistance button Diagonal parking:

▷ Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle's
width plus approx. 2.6 ft/0.8 m.
Ultrasound sensors
▷ Minimum depth: your vehicle's length.
The depth of diagonal parking spaces must
be estimated by the driver. Due to techni‐
cal limitations, the system is only able to
approximate the depth of diagonal parking
spaces.
For parking
▷ Doors and tailgate are closed.
▷ The parking brake is released.
The four ultrasound sensors for measuring
parking spaces are located in the front and rear ▷ When parking in parking spaces on the
on the side of the vehicle. driver's side, the corresponding turn signal
must be set where applicable.
Functional requirements Switching on and activating

Ultrasound sensors Switching on with the button
Ensure full functionality:
Press park assistance button.
▷ Do not cover sensors, for instance with
The LED lights up.
stickers.
▷ Keep the sensors clean and unobstructed. The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
For measuring parking spaces Parking assistant is activated automatically.
▷ Maximum speed while driving forward ap‐
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h. Switching on with reverse gear
▷ Maximum distance to row of parked vehi‐ Shift into reverse.
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m. The current status of the parking space search
is indicated on the Control Display.
Suitable parking space
To activate: "Parking Assistant"
General information:
▷ Gap behind an object that has a min. length
of 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
▷ Gap between two objects with a minimum
length of approx. 1.7 ft/0.5 m.
Parallel parking to the road:
▷ Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx.
2.6 ft/0.8 m.
▷ Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
179
Display on the Control Display slow and straight, even if the system is de‐
activated. When the system is deactivated,
System activated/deactivated the displays on the Control Display are
shown in gray.
Symbol Meaning
Parking using the parking assistant
Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but Parking
not activated.
1. Press the park assistance button or
The system is activated.
shift into reverse gear to switch on the
parking assistant, refer to page 179. Acti‐
Parking space search and system vate the parking assistant, if needed.
status Parking assistant is activated.
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a speed
of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and at a
distance of maximum 5 ft/1.5 m.
The status of the parking space search and
possible parking spaces are displayed on
the Control Display, refer to page 180.
3. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis‐
play.
▷ Symbol P on the vehicle image: the parking The best possible parking position will
assistant is activated and the parking come after gear change on the stationary
space search is active. vehicle - wait for the automatic steering
wheel move.
▷ Control Display shows suitable parking
spaces at the edge of the road next to the The end of the parking procedure is indi‐
vehicle symbol. When the parking assistant cated on the Control Display.
is active, suitable parking spaces are high‐ 4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
lighted. needed.
▷ If a diagonal or parallel parking space is
clearly detected, the system automatically Interrupting manually
adjusts the suitable parking method. In the The parking assistant can be interrupted at any
case of parking spaces suitable for parallel time:
and diagonal parking, a selection menu is ▷ Press park assistance button.
displayed. In this case, the desired parking
method must be selected manually.
▷ "Parking Assistant" Select the symbol
▷ The parking procedure is ac‐ on the Control Display.
tive. Steering control has
been taken over by system. Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in the
▷ Parking space search is always active
whenever the vehicle is moving forward
180
▷ If the driver grasps the steering wheel or risk of damage to property. Follow the informa‐
takes over steering. tion regarding the system limits and actively
▷ If a gear is selected that does not match intervene, if needed.◀
the instruction on the Control Display.
▷ If the vehicle speed exceeds approx. No parking assistance
6 mph/10 km/h. The parking assistant does not offer assis‐
▷ Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road tance in the following situations:
surfaces. ▷ In tight curves.
▷ When there are obstacles that are hard to ▷ With DSC Dynamic Stability Control deac‐
overcome, such as curbs. tivated.
▷ When there are obstacles that suddenly ▷ For diagonal parking spaces.
appear.
▷ If the PDC Park Distance Control displays Functional limitations
clearances that are too small. The system may not be fully functional in the
▷ If a maximum number of parking attempts following situations:
or the time taken for parking is exceeded. ▷ On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
▷ When deactivating DSC Dynamic Stability roads.
Control. ▷ On slippery ground.
▷ When switching to another function on the ▷ On steep uphill or downhill grades.
Control Display. ▷ With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
A Check Control message is displayed. parking space.
▷ With ditches or edges, for instance an
Resuming edge of a port.
An interrupted parking procedure can be con‐
tinued, if needed. Limits of ultrasonic measurement
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to Ultrasonic measurements might not function in
page 179, and follow the instructions on the the following situations:
Control Display. ▷ For small children and animals.
▷ For persons with certain clothing, for in‐
Switching off
stance coats.
The system can be switched off as follows:
▷ With external interference of the ultra‐
▷ Press park assistance button. sound, for instance from passing vehicles
or loud machines.
▷ Switching off the ignition. ▷ When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam‐
aged or out of position.
System limits
▷ Under certain weather conditions such as
high relative humidity, wet conditions,
Safety information
snowfall, extreme heat, or strong wind.
WARNING
▷ With tow bars and trailer couplings of other
The system can react not at all, too late, vehicles.
▷ With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
181
▷ With moving objects.

▷ With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges or cargo.
▷ With objects with corners and sharp edges.
▷ With objects with a fine surface structure
such as fences.
▷ For objects with porous surfaces.
▷ Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can move into the blind area of the
sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds.
Parking spaces that are not suitable may be
detected or suitable parking spaces may not
be detected at all.
Malfunction
The parking assistant failed. Have the system
checked by a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop.
182
Climate control Controls
Climate control
Vehicle features and options Interior air quality
This chapter describes all standard, country- The air quality inside the vehicle is improved
specific and optional features offered with the by an emissions-tested interior, a microfilter,
series. It also describes features that are not and a climate-control system for regulating
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due temperature, air flow, and recirculated-air
to the selected options or country versions. mode.
This also applies to safety-related functions In addition there are other functions which de‐
and systems. When using these functions and pend on the vehicle's equipment, for instance
systems, the applicable laws and regulations microfilter/activated-charcoal filter, automatic
must be observed. climate control with automatic recirculated-air
control AUC, and parked-car ventilation.
Automatic climate control
1 Seat heating, left 75 6 Temperature

2 Air distribution settings 7 Seat heating, right 75
3 Rear window defroster 8 Air conditioning
4 Air flow 9 Recirculated-air mode
5 AUTO program 10 Interior temperature sensor
183
Controls Climate control
Climate control functions in detail Switching on/off

Press button.
Switching the system on/off
The LED is illuminated with air condi‐
Switching on tioning switched on.
Press any button except for the following: Depending on the weather, the windshield and
▷ Rear window defroster. side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐
▷ Seat heating. gine is started.
The air conditioning is switched on automati‐
Switching off cally with the AUTO program.
Press the left button for the minimum When using the automatic climate control,
speed. condensation water, refer to page 212, devel‐
ops and drains underneath the vehicle. This is
normal.
Temperature
AUTO program
Concept
The automatic climate control achieves the set Concept
temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐ Air flow, air distribution and temperature are
sary by using the maximum cooling or heating controlled automatically.
power, and then keeps it constant.
Switching on/off
Settings
Press button.
Turn the ring to set the desired
The LED is illuminated with the AUTO
temperature.
program switched on.
Depending on the selected temperature and

outside influences, the air is directed to the
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐ windshield, side windows, upper body, and
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ into the floor area.
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐ The air conditioning, refer to page 184, is
just the set temperature. switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
gram.
Air conditioning
Recirculated-air mode
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and Concept
dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐ You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu‐
ture setting, warmed again. tants in the immediate environment by tempo‐
The car's interior can only be cooled with the rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
engine running. system then recirculates the air flow within the
vehicle.
184
Operation Operation
Press button repeatedly to select an Turn the wheel to select the de‐
operating mode: sired program or the desired in‐
termediate setting.
▷ LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
▷ LED on, recirculated-air mode: the supply
of outside air into the vehicle is perma‐ ▷ Windows.
nently blocked.
▷ Upper body region.
To prevent window fogging, recirculated-air
▷ Windows, upper body region, and floor
mode switches off automatically after a certain
area.
amount of time, depending on the environ‐
mental conditions. ▷ Floor area.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air
Defrosting windows and removing
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the
condensation
fogging of the windows increases.
Make the following settings to defrost the win‐
If the windows fog over, switch off recircu‐
dows and remove condensation:
lated-air mode and increase the air flow, if
needed. ▷ Direct the air distribution onto the win‐
dows.
Controlling the air flow manually ▷ Increasing the air flow.
▷ Increase the temperature.
Concept
▷ Switch on the air conditioning if needed.
The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually. Rear window defroster
Operation Press button. The LED lights up.
The rear window defroster switches
Press the left or right side of the but‐
off automatically after a certain period of time.
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
The air flow from the air conditioner may be re‐ Microfilter
duced automatically to save battery power.
In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐
crofilter filters dust and pollen from the air.
Controlling the air distribution
manually Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
nance, refer to page 256.
Concept
The air distribution for climate control can be
adjusted manually.
185
Automatic climate control with enhanced features
1 Seat heating, left 75 10 Air distribution, right

2 Temperature, left 11 Air flow, AUTO intensity
3 AUTO program 12 Air distribution, left
4 Display 13 Rear window defroster
5 Maximum cooling 14 Interior temperature sensor — always keep
6 Temperature, right clear
7 Seat heating, right 75 15 Defrosting windows and removing conden‐

sation
8 Air conditioning
9 Automatic recirculated-air control/recircu‐
lated-air mode
Climate control functions in detail Switching off

Press the left button for the minimum
Switching the system on/off speed.
Switching on
Press any button except for the following: Temperature
▷ Rear window defroster. Concept
▷ Seat heating. The automatic climate control achieves the set
temperature as quickly as possible, if neces‐
186
sary by using the maximum cooling or heating Maximum cooling

power, and then keeps it constant.
Concept
Settings The system is set to the lowest temperature,
Turn the ring to set the desired optimum air flow and recirculated-air mode.
temperature.
General information
The function is available above an external
temperature of approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ And with the
The automatic climate control reaches this engine running.
temperature as quickly as possible, if needed,
by increasing the cooling or heating output, Switching on/off
and then keeps it constant. Press button.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem‐ The LED is illuminated with the sys‐
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli‐ tem switched on.
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad‐
just the set temperature. Air flows out of the vents to the upper body re‐
gion. The vents need to be open for this.
Air conditioning The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow
active.
Concept
The air in the car's interior will be cooled and AUTO program
dehumidified and, depending on the tempera‐
ture setting, warmed again. Concept
The car's interior can only be cooled with the Air flow, air distribution and temperature are
engine running. controlled automatically.
Switching on/off Switching on/off

Press button. Press button.
The LED is illuminated with air condi‐ The LED is illuminated with the AUTO
tioning switched on. program switched on.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and Depending on the selected temperature, the
side windows may fog up briefly when the en‐ intensity of the AUTO program, and outside in‐
gine is started. fluences, the air is directed to the windshield,
The air conditioning is switched on automati‐ side windows, upper body, and into the floor
cally with the AUTO program. area.
When using the automatic climate control, The air conditioning, refer to page 187, is
condensation water, refer to page 212, devel‐ switched on automatically with the AUTO pro‐
ops and drains underneath the vehicle. This is gram.
normal. At the same time, a condensation sensor con‐
trols the program so as to prevent window
condensation as much as possible.
187
In the AUTO program, the air flow may be re‐ Recirculated-air mode switches off automati‐
duced during a phone call on the hands-free cally at low external temperatures after a cer‐
system. tain amount of time in order to avoid window
fogging.
Intensity If the windows are fogged over, switch off the
With the AUTO program switched on, the in‐ recirculated-air mode and press the AUTO
tensity can be set. This changes the automatic button to utilize the condensation sensor.
control for the air flow and air distribution. Make sure that air can flow to the windshield.
ton: decrease or increase intensity.
Controlling the air flow manually
The selected intensity is shown on the display Concept

of the automatic climate control. The air flow for climate control can be adjusted
manually.
Automatic recirculated-air control/
recirculated-air mode General information
To manually adjust air flow switch off AUTO
Concept program first.
The automatic recirculated-air control AUC
recognizes odors or pollutants in the outside Operation
air. The outside air supply is shut off and the
interior air is recirculated.
ton: decrease or increase air flow.
General information The selected air flow is shown on the display of
If the system is activated, a sensor detects pol‐ the automatic climate control.
lutants in the outside air and controls the shut- The air flow of the automatic climate control
off automatically. may be reduced automatically to save battery
If the system is deactivated, outside air contin‐ power.
uously flows into the car's interior.
With constant recirculated-air mode, the air Controlling the air distribution
quality in the car's interior deteriorates and the manually
fogging of the windows increases.
Concept
Switching on/off The air distribution for climate control can be
adjusted manually.
Press button repeatedly to select an
operating mode:
Operation
▷ LEDs off: outside air flows in continuously. Press button repeatedly to select a
▷ Left LED on, automatic recirculated-air program:
control: a sensor detects pollutants in the
outside air and shuts off automatically. ▷ Upper body region.
▷ Right LED on, recirculated-air mode: the ▷ Upper body region and floor area.
supply of outside air into the vehicle is per‐ ▷ Floor area.
manently blocked. ▷ Windows and floor area: driver's side only.
188
▷ Windows, upper body region and floor Ventilation

area: driver's side only.
If the windows are fogged over, press the Front ventilation
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
sor.
Defrosting windows and removing

condensation
Concept
Ice and condensation are quickly removed
from the windshield and the front side win‐
dows.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 1.
Switching on/off
▷ Thumbwheels for opening and closing the
Press button. vents continuously, arrows 2.
The LED is illuminated with the sys‐ ▷ Thumbwheel to vary the ventilation tem‐
tem switched on. perature in the upper body region, arrow 3.
For this purpose, point the side vents towards Toward blue: colder.
the side windows as needed.
Toward red: warmer.
The air flow can be adjusted with the air flow This does not change the set interior tem‐
active. perature for the driver and front passenger.
If the windows are fogged over, you can also
switch on the air conditioning or press the Settings
AUTO button to utilize the condensation sen‐
▷ Ventilation for cooling:
sor.
Direct vent in your direction when car's in‐
Rear window defroster terior is too hot.
Press button. The LED lights up. ▷ Draft-free ventilation:
The rear window defroster switches Adjust the vent to let the air flow past you.
off automatically after a certain period of time.
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
In external and recirculated-air mode the mi‐
crofilter/activated charcoal filter filters dust,
pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of the air.
Have this filter changed during vehicle mainte‐
nance, refer to page 256.
189
Ventilation in the rear If parked-car ventilation is switched on, the

vehicle battery will be discharged. Thus,
limit the maximum activation time to save
the vehicle battery. The system will be
available again after the engine is started or
after a short trip.
▷ Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
▷ Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
▷ Thumbwheel for variable opening and Switching on/off directly

closing of the vents, arrow 1. Via iDrive:
▷ Thumbwheel to vary the ventilation tem‐ 1. "My Vehicle"
perature, arrow 2.
Toward blue: colder.
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
Toward red: warmer.
4. "Activate comfort ventilation now"
This does not change the adjusted interior
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
temperature.
trol flashes if the system is switched on.
▷ Lever for changing the air flow direction,
arrow 3. Preselecting the activation time
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
Parked-car ventilation
Concept 3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
The parked-car ventilation ventilates the car's 4. "Comfort ventilation"
interior and lowers its temperature, if needed. 5. Select the desired activation time.
6. Set the desired time.
General information
The parked-car ventilation can be switched on Activating the activation time
and off directly or by using two preset activa‐
Via iDrive:
tion times. The system remains switched on
for 30 minutes. 1. "My Vehicle"
The parked-car ventilation system is operated 2. "Vehicle settings"
via iDrive.
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
Functional requirements 4. "For start time at:"
▷ Direct operation: vehicle is in radio-ready Activate the desired activation time.

state. The symbol on the automatic climate con‐
▷ Direct operation or preset activation time: trol lights up when the activation time is acti‐
does not depend on external temperature. vated.
▷ Battery is sufficiently charged.
190
The symbol on the automatic climate con‐

trol flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The system will only be switched on within the
next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be reacti‐
vated.
191
Controls Interior equipment
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options the safety information of the hand-held trans‐
mitter.◀
Compatibility
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due If this symbol is printed on the packag‐
to the selected options or country versions. ing or in the owner's manual of the sys‐
This also applies to safety-related functions tem to be controlled, the system is
and systems. When using these functions and generally compatible with the integrated Uni‐
systems, the applicable laws and regulations versal Remote Control.
must be observed. If you have any questions, please contact:
▷ A dealer’s service center or another quali‐
Integrated Universal Remote
▷ www.homelink.com on the Internet.
Control
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Concept Corporation.
The integrated Universal Remote Control in
the interior mirror can operate up to 3 func‐ Control elements on the interior mirror
tions of remote-controlled systems, such as
garage door drives, barriers, or lighting sys‐
tems. The Integrated Universal Remote Con‐
trol replaces up to 3 different hand-held trans‐
mitters. To operate the remote control, the
buttons on the interior mirror must be pro‐
grammed with the desired functions. The
hand-held transmitter for the particular system
is required in order to program the remote con‐
trol.
▷ LED, arrow 1.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security. ▷ Buttons, arrow 2.
▷ The hand-held transmitter, arrow 3, is re‐
Safety information quired for programming.
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐ Programming
ing remote-controlled systems, such as the
garage door, using the integrated Universal General information
Remote Control. There is a risk of injury or risk 1. Switch on the ignition.
of damage to property. Make sure that the area 2. Initial setup:
of movement of the respective system is clear
Press and hold the two outer buttons on
during programming and operation. Also follow
the interior mirror simultaneously for ap‐
192
Interior equipment Controls
proximately 20 seconds until the LED on flashing rapidly and then stays lit constantly for
the interior mirror flashes. This erases all 2 seconds, the system features a rolling code
programming of the buttons on the interior radio system. Flashing and continuous illumi‐
mirror. nation of the LED will repeat for approximately
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the sys‐ 20 seconds.
tem to be controlled approx. 1 to 3 in‐ For systems with a rolling code radio system,
ches/2.5 to 8 cm away from the buttons of the integrated Universal Remote Control and
the interior mirror. The required distance the system also have to be synchronized.
depends on the hand-held transmitter. Please read the owner's manual to find out
4. Simultaneously press and hold the button how to synchronize the system.
of the desired function on the hand-held Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a sec‐
transmitter and the button to be program‐ ond person.
med on the interior mirror. The LED on the
Synchronizing the universal remote control
interior mirror will begin flashing slowly.
with the system:
5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
flashes more rapidly. The LED flashing 1. Park the vehicle within range of the re‐
faster indicates that the button on the inte‐ mote-controlled system.
rior mirror has been programmed. 2. Program the desired button on the interior
If the LED does not flash faster after at mirror as described.
least 60 seconds, change the distance be‐ 3. Locate and press the synchronizing button
tween the interior mirror and the hand-held on the system being programmed. You
transmitter and repeat the step. Several have approx. 30 seconds for the next step.
more attempts at different distances may 4. Hold down the programmed button on the
be necessary. Wait at least 15 seconds be‐ interior mirror for approximately 3 seconds
tween attempts. and then release it. If necessary, repeat this
Canada: if programming with the hand- step up to three times in order to finish
held transmitter was interrupted, hold synchronization. Once synchronization is
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐ complete, the programmed function will be
edly press and release the hand-held carried out.
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
6. To program other functions on other but‐ Reprogramming individual buttons
tons, repeat steps 3 to 5. 1. Switch on the ignition.
The systems can be controlled using the inte‐ 2. Press and hold the interior mirror button to
rior mirror buttons. be programmed.
3. As soon as the interior mirror LED starts
Special feature of the rolling code flashing slowly, hold the hand-held trans‐
wireless system mitter for the system to be controlled ap‐
If you are unable to operate the system after prox. 1 to 3 inches/2.5 to 8 cm away from
repeated programming, please check if the the buttons of the interior mirror. The re‐
system to be controlled features a rolling code quired distance depends on the hand-held
radio system. transmitter.
Read the system's owner's manual, or press
the programmed button on the interior mirror
longer. If the LED on the interior mirror starts
193
4. Likewise, press and hold the button of the hold the two outer buttons on the interior mir‐
desired function on the hand-held trans‐ ror simultaneously for approximately 20 sec‐
mitter. onds until the LED on the interior mirror
5. Release both buttons as soon as the inte‐ flashes rapidly.
rior mirror LED flashes more rapidly. The
LED flashing faster indicates that the but‐
ton on the interior mirror has been pro‐ Digital compass
grammed. The system can then be con‐
trolled by the button on the interior mirror. Overview
If the LED does not flash faster after at
most 60 seconds, change the distance and
repeat the programming starting with
step 4. Several more attempts at different
distances may be necessary. Wait at least
15 seconds between attempts.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
down the interior mirror button and repeat‐
edly press and release the hand-held 1 Control button
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
2 Mirror display
Operation
Mirror display
WARNING
The point of the compass is displayed in the
Body parts can be jammed when operat‐
mirror when driving straight.
ing remote-controlled systems, such as the
garage door, using the integrated Universal
Operating concept
Remote Control. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the area Various functions can be called up by pressing
of movement of the respective system is clear the control button with a pointed object, such
during programming and operation. Also follow as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar object.
the safety information of the hand-held trans‐ The following setting options are displayed in
mitter.◀ succession, depending on how long the con‐
trol button is pressed:
The system, such as the garage door, can be
▷ Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
operated using the button on the interior mirror
while the engine is running or when the ignition ▷ 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
is started. To do this, hold down the button ▷ 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
within receiving range of the system until the ▷ 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
function is activated. The interior mirror LED setting.
stays lit while the wireless signal is being
▷ 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
transmitted.
Setting the compass zones

Deleting stored functions
Sets the particular compass zones on the vehi‐
All stored functions will be deleted. The func‐
cle so that the compass operates correctly; re‐
tions cannot be deleted individually. Press and
fer to World map with compass zones.
194
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap‐ 1. Make sure that there are no large metallic
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the objects or overhead power lines near the
set compass zone appears in the mirror. vehicle and that there is sufficient room to
2. To change the zone setting, press the con‐ drive around in a circle.
trol button quickly and repeatedly until the 2. Set the currently applicable compass zone.
number of the compass zone that corre‐ 3. Press and hold the control button for ap‐
sponds with your location appears in the prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
mirror. on the display. Next, drive in a complete
The set zone is stored automatically. The com‐ circle at least once at a speed of no more
pass is ready for use again after approximately than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc‐
10 seconds. cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points of
the compass.
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the Left/right-hand steering
event of the following: The digital compass is already set for right or
▷ The wrong compass point is displayed. left-hand steering at the factory.
▷ The point of the compass displayed does
Setting the language
not change despite changing the direction
of travel. Press and hold the control button for approx.
12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the control
▷ Not all points of the compass are dis‐
button again to switch between English "E"
played.
and German "O".
195
Settings are stored automatically after approxi‐ Emptying

mately 10 seconds. Take out the insert.
Cigarette lighter
Sun visor WARNING
Glare shield Contact with the hot heating element or
the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can
Fold the sun visor down or up.
cause burns. Flammable materials can ignite if
the cigarette lighter falls down or is held
Vanity mirror
against the respective objects. There is a risk
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be‐ of fire and injuries. Take hold of the cigarette
hind a cover. When the cover is opened, the lighter by its handle. Make sure that children
mirror lighting switches on. do not use the cigarette lighter and burn them‐
selves.◀
Ashtray/cigarette lighter NOTE

If metal objects fall into the socket, they
Ashtray can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
damage to property. Replace the cigarette
Opening lighter or socket cover again after using the
socket.◀
Slide the cover forward.

Installing
The cigarette lighter is located between the

The ashtray can be inserted in both cup hold‐
cup holders.
ers.
196
Push in the cigarette lighter. Front center console

The cigarette lighter can be re‐
moved as soon as it pops back
out.
Sockets
General information
The lighter socket can be used as a socket for
electrical equipment while the engine is run‐
ning or when the ignition is switched on.
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-com‐
patible connectors.
Safety information
WARNING
Devices and cables in the unfolding area
Remove the socket or cigarette lighter cover.
of the airbags, such as portable navigation de‐
vices, can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or
be thrown around in the car's interior during Rear center console
unfolding. There is a risk of injury. Make sure
that devices and cables are not in the airbag's
area of unfolding.◀
NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
a risk of damage to property. Only connect
battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the Remove the cover.
starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
ment.◀
NOTE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
damage to property. Replace the cigarette
lighter or socket cover again after using the
socket.◀
197
In the cargo area In the center console
The socket is located on the left side in the A USB interface is located in the center con‐
cargo area. sole.
USB interface Cargo area

Concept Cargo cover
Mobile devices with USB port can be con‐
nected to the USB interface. Safety information
WARNING
General information Loose objects or devices with a cable
Follow the information regarding the connec‐ connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
tion of mobile devices to the USB interface in phones, can be thrown into the car's interior
the section on USB connections, refer to while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐
page 40. cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐
vers. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose ob‐
In the center armrest jects or devices with a cable connection to the
vehicle in the car's interior.◀
General information
The cargo cover is in two parts.
The cargo cover can be removed and stowed
under the cargo floor panel to store bulky
items.
A USB interface is located in the center arm‐

rest.
198
Removing 2. Place the tailgate window cargo cover in

the section on the right and the other cover
Cargo cover in rear window in the section on the left under the cargo
1. Pull the cargo cover with both hands by the floor panel.
outer edges towards the rear, arrows 1, to
disengage it from the catches.
Installing
2. Push the cargo cover upwards, arrow 2, Proceed in the reverse order to reinstall. The
and remove it. cargo covers must snap audibly into place on
their respective holders.
Cargo cover in the cargo area
Enlarging the cargo area
Concept
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding
down the rear seat backrest or moving it into
the cargo position.
General information
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of
40–20–40. The side rear seat backrests and
Push the cargo cover upwards, arrow 1, until it
the center section can be folded down sepa‐
disengages from the catches and then pull it
rately.
towards the front, arrow 2.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the rear
seat backrests can be folded down from the
Stowing rear or from the cargo area.
NOTE
A removed cargo floor panel can only be
Safety information
installed with special knowledge. There is a WARNING
risk of damage to property. Have a removed Danger of jamming with folding down the
cargo floor panel installed by a dealer’s service backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk of
center or another qualified service center or re‐ damage to property. Make sure that the area of
pair shop.◀ movement of the rear backrest and the of the
1. Fold up the cargo floor panel. head restraint is clear prior to folding down.◀
199
WARNING Folding down the rear seat backrest

If a rear seat backrest is not locked, un‐ from the rear
secured cargo can be thrown into the car's in‐
terior; for instance, in the event of an accident,
braking or an evasive maneuver. There is a risk
of injury. Make sure that the rear seat backrest
is locked after folding it back.◀
WARNING
With a rear backrest that is not locked,
the protective function of the middle safety
belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of inju‐
Reach into the recess and pull the rear seat
ries or danger to life. If you are using the mid‐
backrest forward.
dle safety belt, lock the wider rear seat back‐
rest.◀
Folding down the rear seat backrest
WARNING from the cargo area
The stability of the child restraint system 1. Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo
is limited or compromised with incorrect seat area to release the rear seat backrest.
adjustment or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad‐
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged or
locked. If possible, adjust the height of the
head restraints or remove them.◀
WARNING
2. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves
When folding down the rear seat back‐ forward slightly.
rest from an intermediate position, the fasten‐
3. Fold the rear seat backrest forward.
ing hook remains in the unfolded position and
protrudes into the car's interior. There is a risk
Cargo position
of injury. Place the rear seat backrest in the
rearmost position before folding the seat
Concept
down.◀
The rear seat backrests can be separately
NOTE moved through several tilt stages into an up‐
Vehicle parts can be damaged when right loading position.
folding down the rear backrest. There is a risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the area
of movement of the rear backrest including
head restraint is clear when folding down.◀
200
Settings
Pull the lever and hold it there. Adjust the tilt of

the rear seat backrest.
Fold back the backrest
Pull the lever and hold it there. Fold the rear

seat backrest all the way back and let it en‐
gage.
Fold down the center section

1. Push the center head restraint down if nec‐
essary.
2. Reach into the recess and pull the center
section forward.
201
Controls Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options ▷ Storage compartment in the front center
armrest, refer to page 203.
▷ Compartments in the doors, refer to
page 203.
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due ▷ Nets on the backrests of the front seats.
to the selected options or country versions. ▷ Storage compartment in the rear center
This also applies to safety-related functions console, refer to page 204.
and systems. When using these functions and ▷ Storage compartment in the rear center
systems, the applicable laws and regulations armrest, refer to page 204.
must be observed.
Glove compartment
Safety information
WARNING Front passenger side
Loose objects or devices with a cable
Safety information
connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
phones, can be thrown into the car's interior WARNING
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐ Folded open, the glove compartment
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐ protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
vers. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose ob‐ glove compartment can be thrown into the
jects or devices with a cable connection to the car's interior while driving, for instance in the
vehicle in the car's interior.◀ event of an accident or during braking and eva‐
sive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Al‐
NOTE
ways close the glove compartment immedi‐
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can ately after using it.◀
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of dam‐
age to property. Do not use anti-slip pads.◀
Opening
Storage compartments
The following storage compartments are avail‐
able in the car's interior:
▷ Glove compartment on the front passenger
side, refer to page 202.
▷ Glove compartment on the driver's side,
refer to page 203.
Pull the handle.
▷ Front storage compartment, in front of the
cup holders, refer to page 203. The light in the glove compartment switches
on.
202
Storage compartments Controls
Closing Front storage compartment

Fold cover closed.
Locking
The glove compartment can be locked with an
integrated key. This prevents access to the
glove compartment.
After the glove compartment is locked, the re‐
mote control can be handed over, such as at a
hotel, without the integrated key.
There is a storage compartment in the center
Driver's side console.
Safety information
WARNING
Compartments in the doors
Folded open, the glove compartment
protrudes in the car's interior. Objects in the WARNING
glove compartment can be thrown into the Breakable objects, such as glass bottles
car's interior while driving, for instance in the or glasses, can break in the event of an acci‐
event of an accident or during braking and eva‐ dent or a braking or evasive maneuver. Broken
sive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury. Al‐ glass can be scattered in the car's interior.
ways close the glove compartment immedi‐ There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to
ately after using it.◀ property. Do not use any breakable objects
while driving. Only stow breakable objects in
closed storage compartments.◀
Opening
Center armrest
Front
General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the front seats.
Pull the handle.
Closing
Fold cover closed.
203
Opening Storage compartment in the

rear
A storage compartment is located in the center
console.
Cup holders
Safety information
Fold the center armrest up. WARNING
Unsuitable containers in the cup holder
and hot beverages can damage the cup holder
Repositioning
and increase the risk of injury in the event of an
The center armrest can be pushed forward or accident. There is a risk of injury or risk of
backward and engages in the end positions. damage to property. Use light-weight, un‐
breakable, and sealable containers. Do not
Connection for an external audio transport hot beverages. Do not force objects
device into the cup holder.◀
An external audio device, for in‐
stance an MP3 player, can be Front
connected via the USB audio in‐
terface in the center armrest.
Rear
The rear center armrest contains a storage
compartment.
Opening
Two cup holders are located in the center con‐
sole.
To open: slide the cover forward.
To close: slide the cover backward.
Rear
NOTE
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap. With an open cup holder, the center arm‐
rest cannot be folded back up. There is a risk
Pull the cover up. of damage to property. Press back the covers
before the center armrest is folded up.◀
In the center armrest.
204
Storage compartments in the

cargo area
Net
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the
right side.
Multi-function hook
Pull the center armrest forward at the strap.
Information
To open: press the button.
WARNING
To close: push both covers back in, one after
the other. Improper use of the multi-function hooks
can lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers, for example.
There is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
Clothes hooks property. Only hang lightweight objects,
such as shopping bags, from the multi-func‐
Safety information tion hooks. Only transport heavy luggage in
the cargo area if it has been appropriately se‐
WARNING
cured.◀
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks
can obstruct the view while driving. There is a
risk of an accident. When suspending clothing Overview
articles from the clothes hooks, ensure that
they will not obstruct the driver's view.◀
WARNING
Improper use of the clothes hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury and risk of damage to property. Only
hang lightweight objects, for instance clothing
articles, from the clothes hooks.◀
A multi-function hook is located on each side
of the cargo area.
General information
The clothes hooks are located in the grab han‐ Retaining strap
dles in the rear.
A retaining strap is available on the left side
trim for fastening small objects.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area

To secure the cargo, refer to page 214, there
are four lashing eyes in the cargo area.
There are also two movable lashing eyes on a
rail system.
205
Storage compartment under the cargo

floor panel
For the storage compartment under the cargo
floor panel, do not exceed a maximum load of
44 lbs/20 kg.
Fold up the cargo floor panel. The integrated
gas pressure spring holds the cargo area floor
panel in a raised position automatically for eas‐
ier loading. Press the cargo floor panel down‐
ward to close it.
Partitioning the compartment

The compartment can be divided using an at‐
tachable partition.
206
207
Driving tips
This chapter provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating modes.

Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options Avoid full load or kickdown under all circum‐
stances.
specific and optional features offered with the From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually be
increased.
Tires
systems, the applicable laws and regulations Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
must be observed. ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
they achieve their full traction potential after a
break-in time.
Breaking-in period Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km.
General information
Moving parts need to begin working together Brake system
smoothly. Brake discs and brake pads only reach their full
The following instructions will help you to ach‐ effectiveness after approx. 300 miles/500 km.
ieve a long vehicle life and good efficiency. Drive moderately during this break-in period.
During break-in, do not use the Launch Con‐

Following part replacement
trol.
The same break-in procedures should be ob‐
served if any of the components above-men‐
Safety information
tioned have to be renewed in the course of the
WARNING vehicle's operating life.
Due to new parts and components,
safety and driver assistance systems can react
with a delay. There is a risk of an accident. Af‐ General driving notes
ter installing new parts or with a new vehicle,
drive conservatively and intervene early if nec‐ Closing the tailgate
essary. Observe the break-in procedures of
the respective parts and components.◀ Safety information
WARNING
Engine, transmission, and axle drive
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi‐
cle and can endanger occupants and other
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
traffic participants or damage the vehicle in the
Do not exceed the maximum engine and road event of an accident, braking or evasive ma‐
speed: neuvers. In addition, exhaust fumes may enter
▷ For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and the car's interior. There is a risk of injury or risk
100 mph/160 km/h. of damage to property. Do not drive with the
tailgate open.◀
210
Things to remember when driving Driving tips
Driving with the tailgate open surface, ultimately undermining your ability to
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be steer and brake the vehicle.
avoided:
Driving through water
▷ Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
▷ Greatly increase the air flow from the vents. General information
▷ Drive moderately. When driving through water, follow the follow‐
ing:
Hot exhaust gas system ▷ Drive through calm water only.
WARNING ▷ Drive through water only if it is not deeper
During driving operation, high tempera‐ than maximum 9.8 in/25 cm.
tures can occur underneath the vehicle body, ▷ Drive through water no faster than walking
for instance caused by the exhaust gas sys‐ speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h.
tem. If combustible materials, such as leaves
or grass, come in contact with hot parts of the Safety information
exhaust gas system, these materials can ignite.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage to NOTE
property. Do not remove the heat shields in‐ When driving too quickly through too
stalled and never apply undercoating to them. deep water, water can enter into the engine
Make sure that no combustible materials can compartment, the electrical system or the
come in contact with hot vehicle parts in driv‐ transmission. There is a risk of damage to
ing operation, idle or during parking. Do not property. When driving through water, do not
touch the hot exhaust gas system.◀ exceed the maximum indicated water level and
the maximum speed for driving through wa‐
Mobile communication devices in the ter.◀
vehicle
WARNING
Braking safely
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones General information
can influence one another. There is radiation
The vehicle is equipped with ABS as a stand‐
due to the transmission operations of mobile
ard feature.
phones. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam‐
age to property. If possible, in the car's interior Perform an emergency stop in situations that
use only mobile phones with direct connec‐ require such.
tions to an exterior antenna in order to exclude Steering is still responsive. You can still avoid
mutual interference and deflect the radiation any obstacles with a minimum of steering ef‐
from the car's interior.◀ fort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds from
Hydroplaning the hydraulic circuits indicate that ABS is in its
On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water can active mode.
form between the tires and road surface. In certain braking situations, the perforated
This phenomenon is referred to as hydroplan‐ brake discs can emit functional noises. Func‐
ing. It is characterized by a partial or complete tional noises have no effect on the perform‐
loss of contact between the tires and the road ance and operational reliability of the brake.
211
Driving tips Things to remember when driving
Objects in the movement area around of an accident. Avoid placing excessive stress
pedals and floor area on the brake system.◀
WARNING WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit In idle state or with the engine switched
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. off, safety-relevant functions, for instance en‐
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in gine braking effect, braking force boost and
the vehicle such that they are secured and steering assistance, are restricted or not avail‐
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use able at all. There is a risk of an accident. Do not
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and drive in idle state or with the engine switched
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use off.◀
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
Brake disc corrosion
are securely fastened again after they were re‐ Corrosion on the brake discs and contamina‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.◀ tion on the brake pads are increased by the fol‐
lowing circumstances:
Driving in wet conditions ▷ Low mileage.
When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy rain, ▷ Extended periods when the vehicle is not
gently press the brake pedal every few miles. used at all.
Ensure that this action does not endanger ▷ Infrequent use of the brakes.
other traffic. ▷ Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning
The heat generated during braking dries brake agents.
discs and brake pads and protects them Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will cause
against corrosion. a pulsating effect on the brakes in their re‐
In this way braking efficiency will be available sponse - generally this cannot be corrected.
when you need it.
Condensation water under the parked
Hills vehicle
When using the automatic climate control,
General information condensation water develops and collects un‐
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in the derneath the vehicle.
gear that requires least braking effort. Other‐
wise, the brakes may overheat and reduce
brake efficiency. Driving on racetracks
You can increase the engine's braking effect Higher mechanical and thermal loads during
by shifting down, going all the way to first gear, racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
if needed. This wear is not covered by the warranty. The
vehicle is not designed for use in motor sports
Safety information competition.
WARNING
Light but consistent brake pressure can
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing out
and possibly even brake failure. There is a risk
212
Loading Driving tips
Loading
Vehicle features and options NOTE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause dam‐
age. There is a risk of damage to property.
Make sure that no fluids leak in the cargo
area.◀
and systems. When using these functions and Steps for Determining
systems, the applicable laws and regulations Correct Load Limit
must be observed.
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
Safety information never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle’s placard.
WARNING
2. Determine the combined weight of the
High gross weight can overheat the tires, driver and passengers that will be riding in
damage them internally and cause a sudden your vehicle.
drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving charac‐
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
teristics may be negatively impacted, reducing
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
lane stability, lengthening the braking distan‐
ces and changing the steering response. 4. The resulting figure equals the available
There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to amount of cargo and luggage load ca‐
the permitted load capacity of the tires and pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
never exceed the permitted gross weight.◀ equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
WARNING amount of available cargo and luggage load
Loose objects or devices with a cable capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400–750 (5 x 150) =
connection to the vehicle, for instance mobile 650 lbs.)
phones, can be thrown into the car's interior 5. Determine the combined weight of lug‐
while driving, for instance in the event of an ac‐ gage and cargo being loaded on the vehi‐
cident or during braking and evasive maneu‐ cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
vers. There is a risk of injury. Secure loose ob‐ available cargo and luggage load capacity
jects or devices with a cable connection to the calculated in Step 4.
vehicle in the car's interior.◀ 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
WARNING from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
Improperly stowed objects can shift and how this reduces the available cargo and
be thrown into the car's interior, for instance in luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
the event of an accident or during braking and
evasive maneuvers. Vehicle occupants can be
hit and injured. There is a risk of injury. Stow
and secure objects and cargo properly.◀
213
Driving tips Loading
Load Lashing eyes in the cargo

area
The maximum load is the sum of the weight of

the occupants and the cargo. There are four lashing eyes in the cargo area
The greater the weight of the occupants, the for securing cargo.
less cargo that can be transported.
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing
straps, retaining straps, draw straps or cargo
nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Stowing and securing cargo
▷ Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo. Lashing eyes in the cargo
▷ Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi‐ area with rails
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of
the rear passenger seat backrests.
▷ Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is not
occupied, secure each of the outer safety
belts in the opposite buckle.
▷ If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow cargo.
▷ Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.
To secure the cargo there are four movable
▷ Smaller and light cargo: secure with lashing eyes in the cargo area.
ratchet straps or draw straps.
▷ Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
214
Loading Driving tips
Roof drip rail with flaps
To slide the lashing eyes, press the button, ar‐

row 1. Make sure that the lashing eyes latch at
The fixing points are located in the roof drip rail
the new position.
above the doors.
The lashing eyes at the openings in the rails
Fold the cover outward.
can be removed.
Attach load securing aids, such as lashing Loading

straps, retaining straps, draw straps or cargo
Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise the
nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo area.
vehicle's center of gravity when loaded, they
have a major effect on vehicle handling and
steering response.
Roof-mounted luggage rack
Therefore, note the following when loading
General information and driving:
Roof racks are available as special accessories. ▷ Do not exceed the approved roof/axle
loads and the approved gross vehicle
Safety information weight.
▷ Be sure that adequate clearance is main‐
WARNING
tained for tilting and opening the glass
When driving with roof load, for instance sunroof.
with roof-mounted luggage rack, driving safety
▷ Distribute the roof load uniformly.
may not be ensured in driving-critical situa‐
tions due to the elevated center of gravity. ▷ The roof load should not extend past the
There is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to loading area.
property. Do not deactivate Dynamic Stability ▷ Always place the heaviest pieces on the
Control DSC when driving with roof load.◀ bottom.
▷ Secure the roof luggage firmly, for instance
Securing using ratchet straps.
Follow the installation instructions of the roof ▷ Do not let objects project into the opening
rack. path of the tailgate.
▷ Drive cautiously and avoid sudden acceler‐
ation and braking maneuvers. Take corners
gently.
215
Driving tips Saving fuel
Saving fuel
Vehicle features and options Close the windows and glass
This chapter describes all standard, country- sunroof
specific and optional features offered with the Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
series. It also describes features that are not open results in increased air resistance and
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due thereby reduces the range.
Tires
must be observed.
General information
Tires can affect fuel consumption in various
ways, for instance tire size may influence fuel
General information consumption.
The vehicle contains advanced technologies
for the reduction of fuel consumption and Check the tire inflation pressure
emission values. regularly
Fuel consumption depends on a number of dif‐ Check and, if needed, correct the tire inflation
ferent factors. pressure at least twice a month and before
Carrying out certain measures, such as a mod‐ starting on a long trip.
erate driving style and regular maintenance, Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling re‐
can influence fuel consumption and the envi‐ sistance and thus raises fuel consumption and
ronmental impact. tire wear.
Remove unnecessary cargo Drive away immediately

Additional weight increases fuel consumption. Do not wait for the engine to warm-up while
the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving
right away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Remove attached parts This is the quickest way of warming the cold
following use engine up to operating temperature.
Remove roof-mounted luggage racks which

are no longer required following use.
Look well ahead when
Attached parts on the vehicle impair the aero‐
dynamics and increase the fuel consumption.
driving
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces fuel
consumption.
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
By maintaining a suitable distance to the vehi‐
cle driving ahead of you.
216
Saving fuel Driving tips
Avoid high engine speeds Switch off any functions that

Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel con‐ are not currently needed
sumption and reduces wear. Functions such as seat heating and the rear
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift window defroster require a lot of energy and
indicator, refer to page 113. reduce the range, especially in city and stop-
and-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they are not
Use coasting needed.
When approaching a red light, take your foot The ECO PRO driving program supports the
off the accelerator and let the vehicle coast to energy conserving use of comfort features.
a halt. These functions are automatically deactivated
partially or completely.
For going downhill take your foot off the accel‐
erator and let the vehicle roll.
The flow of fuel is interrupted while coasting.
Have maintenance carried
out
Switch off the engine during Have the vehicle maintained regularly to ach‐
longer stops ieve optimal vehicle efficiency and service life.
BMW recommends that maintenance work be
Switching off the engine performed by a BMW dealer’s service center.
Switch off the engine during longer stops, for For information on the BMW Maintenance
instance at traffic lights, railroad crossings or in System, refer to page 256.
traffic congestion.
Auto Start/Stop function ECO PRO

The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle au‐
tomatically switches off the engine during a Concept
stop. ECO PRO supports a driving style that saves
If the engine is switched off and then restarted on fuel consumption. For this purpose, the en‐
rather than leaving the engine running con‐ gine control and comfort features, for instance
stantly, fuel consumption and emissions are the climate control output, are adjusted.
reduced. Savings can begin within a few sec‐ Under certain conditions the engine is auto‐
onds of switching off the engine. matically decoupled from the transmission in
In addition, fuel consumption is also deter‐ the D selector lever position. The vehicle con‐
mined by other factors, such as driving style, tinues traveling with the engine idling to re‐
road conditions, maintenance or environmental duce fuel consumption. The D selector lever
factors. position remains engaged.
In addition, context-sensitive instructions are
displayed to assist with an optimized fuel con‐
sumption driving style.
The achieved extended range is displayed in
the instrument cluster as bonus range.
217
General information 3. If necessary, "Driving mode"

The system includes the following 4. "Configure ECO PRO"
EfficientDynamics functions and 5. Select the desired setting.
EfficientDynamics displays:
▷ ECO PRO bonus range, refer to page 219. used.
▷ Activate/deactivate the display, refer to
page 219. Activating/deactivating the functions
▷ ECO PRO climate control, refer to The following functions can be activated/deac‐
page 218. tivated:
▷ Coasting driving condition, refer to ▷ "ECO PRO speed warning"
page 220. ▷ "ECO PRO climate control"
▷ Driving style analysis, refer to page 221. ▷ "Coasting"
Settings are stored for the driver profile cur‐
Overview
rently used.
ECO PRO limit

▷ Activate the ECO PRO limit:
"ECO PRO speed warning":
An ECO PRO tip is displayed if the speed
of the set ECO PRO limit is exceeded.
▷ Adjust the ECO PRO limit speed:
"Tip at:"
Driving Dynamics Control Select the desired speed.
ECO PRO climate control

Activating ECO PRO
"ECO PRO climate control"
Press button repeatedly until ECO Climate control is set to be fuel-efficient.
PRO is displayed in the instrument
That is, it is possible to deviate slightly from
cluster.
the set temperature or to heat or cool the car's
interior more slowly, to economize on fuel con‐
Configuring ECO PRO sumption.
In addition, the power output to the seat and
Via the Driving Dynamics Control mirror heating is reduced.
1. Activate ECO PRO.
2. "Configure ECO PRO" Coasting
3. Select the desired setting. Fuel-efficiency can be optimized by disengag‐
ing the engine and coasting with the engine
Via iDrive idling.
1. "My Vehicle" Deactivate the function to use the braking ef‐
fect of the engine when traveling downhill.
218
ECO PRO potential savings the pointer remains in the blue range on the
Shows potential savings with the current set‐ scale, you are driving efficiently.
tings in percentages.
ECO PRO tip, driving tip
Display in the instrument cluster The ECO PRO tip indicates that your
driving style can be modified to be
Display in the instrument display more fuel efficient, for example by
When ECO PRO driving mode is activated, the backing off the accelerator.
display switches to a special configuration.
Blue bar segments symbolize the gained bo‐ Activating/deactivating the display
nus range in stages. 1. "My Vehicle"
In addition, the bonus range is highlighted in 2. "iDrive settings"
blue in the total range display.
3. "Displays"
ECO PRO bonus range 4. "Instrument panel"
A modified driving style helps 5. "ECO PRO info"

you extend your driving range. In the instrument display:
This may be displayed as the Via iDrive:
bonus range in the instrument
1. "My Vehicle"
cluster.
The bonus range is shown in the range display.
3. "Displays"
The bonus range is automatically reset every
time the vehicle is refueled. 4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Driving mode view"
ECO PRO efficiency display
ECO PRO tip, symbols
The color of the ECO PRO displays in the in‐
strument cluster tell you how efficiently you An additional symbol and text instructions are
are driving: displayed.
▷ Blue display: efficient driving style. Symbol Measure

▷ Gray display: modify driving style, for ex‐ For efficient driving back off the ac‐
ample by backing off the accelerator pedal. celerator or delay accelerating to al‐
The display switches to blue as soon as all low time to assess road conditions.
conditions for driving with optimized fuel effi‐
Reduce speed to the selected ECO
ciency are met.
PRO speed.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
ECO PRO displays also inform you about your Steptronic transmission:
current driving style. This is indicated by a
Switch from M/S to D and avoid
pointer which moves along a scale. The pointer
manual shift interventions.
tells you whether energy is being consumed to
accelerate the vehicle or whether energy is be‐
ing recovered through coasting or braking. If
219
Indications on the Control Display Resetting fuel consumption history

1. "My Vehicle"
Displaying EfficientDynamics
information
3. "EfficientDynamics"
The current efficiency of the ECO PRO func‐
tions can be displayed on the Control Display. 4. Select the symbol.
Via iDrive:
5. Press button.
1. "My Vehicle" 6. "Reset consumption history"
3. "EfficientDynamics" Coasting
Concept
The following functions are displayed:
This function helps to save fuel.
▷ Auto Start/Stop function.
To do this, under certain conditions the engine
▷ Energy recovery. is automatically decoupled from the transmis‐
▷ Coasting. sion when selector lever position D is set. The
vehicle continues traveling with the engine
Displaying fuel consumption history idling to reduce fuel consumption. Selector
The average consumption can be displayed on lever position D remains engaged.
the Control Display. This driving condition is referred to as coast‐
Via iDrive: ing.
As soon as you step on the brake or accelera‐
1. "My Vehicle"
tor pedal, the engine is automatically coupled
2. "Technology in action" again.
4. Select the symbol. General information
Coasting is a component of the ECO PRO driv‐
Vertical bars show consumption for the se‐
ing mode.
lected time frame.
Coasting is automatically activated when ECO
Adjusting the fuel consumption PRO mode is called via the Driving Dynamics
history time frame Control.
1. "My Vehicle" A proactive driving style helps the driver to use
the function as often as possible and supports
the fuel-conserving effect of coasting.
4. Select the symbol. Functional requirements
The function is available in the speed range
5. Press button. from approx. 30 mph/50 km/h up to
6. Adjust the time frame. 100 mph/160 km/h.
The function is active if the following condi‐
tions are met:
220
▷ Accelerator pedal and brake pedal not de‐

pressed.
▷ The selector lever is in selector lever posi‐
tion D.
▷ Engine and transmission are at operating
temperature.
Operation via shift paddles
Concept Color code blue: coasting mode.

Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
coasting mode can be influenced with the shift Displaying EfficientDynamics information
paddles. Via iDrive:
Activating/deactivating coasting via shift 1. "My Vehicle"

paddles 2. "Technology in action"
1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the right 3. "EfficientDynamics"
shift paddle. 4. Select the symbol.
2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the
right shift paddle again. System limits
To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle. The function is not available if one of the fol‐
lowing conditions applies:
Display ▷ DSC OFF or TRACTION activated.
▷ If cruise control is activated.
Display in the instrument cluster
▷ If driving in the dynamic limit range.
The mark in the efficiency display is backlit in
blue and is located at the zero point. The tach‐ ▷ If driving on steep uphill or downhill grades.
ometer shows the idle speed. ▷ If the battery charge state is temporarily
The coasting point indicator is illuminated at too low.
the zero point during coasting. ▷ If the vehicle electrical system is drawing
excessive current.
Indications on the Control Display
The coasting mode is displayed in Driving style analysis
EfficientDynamics while driving.
The distance traveled in coasting mode is
Concept
shown in the fuel consumption history. The The function helps develop an especially effi‐
counter is reset prior to every departure. cient driving style and to conserve fuel.
For this purpose, the driving style is analyzed.
The assessment is done in various categories
and is displayed on the Control Display.
This display will help you adjust your driving
style and save some fuel.
The last 15 minutes of a trip are evaluated.
221
The range of the vehicle can be extended by Tips for an energy-saving driving style, Saving
adopting an efficient driving style. fuel, refer to page 216.
This gain in range is displayed as a bonus
range in the instrument cluster and on the
Control Display.
This function is available in ECO PRO mode.
Calling up ECO PRO driving style

analysis
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
3. "Driving style analysis"
Display on the Control Display
The display of the ECO PRO driving style anal‐

ysis consists of a symbolized route and a
lookup table.
The road symbolizes the efficiency of the driv‐
ing style. The more efficient your driving style,
the smoother the depicted route becomes, ar‐
row 1.
The table of values contains stars. The more
efficient the driving style, the more stars are in‐
cluded in the table and the faster the bonus
range increases, arrow 2.
If, on the other hand, the driving style is ineffi‐
cient, a more wavy road and a reduced number
of stars are displayed.
To assist with an efficient driving style, ECO
PRO tips are displayed during driving.
222
223
Mobility
In order to always ensure your mobility, you will
find important information on operating fluids,
wheels and tires, maintenance and Roadside
Assistance in the following.

Mobility Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle features and options Fuel cap
Opening
series. It also describes features that are not 1. Briefly press the rear edge of the fuel filler
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due flap.
must be observed.
General information
Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 228, prior to refueling. 2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
Safety information
NOTE
With a driving range of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer have
sufficient fuel. Engine functions are not en‐
sured anymore. There is a risk of damage to
property. Refuel promptly.◀
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket attached
to the fuel filler flap.
226
Refueling Mobility
Closing
WARNING
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be
jammed and crushed during closing. The cap
cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel vapors
can escape. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Pay attention that the re‐
taining strap is not jammed or crushed when
closing the cap.◀
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you
clearly hear a click.
2. Close the fuel filler flap.
Manually unlocking fuel filler flap

E.g., in the event of an electrical malfunction.
Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Follow the following when

refueling
General information
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com‐
pletely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the fuel
pump nozzle during refueling causes:
▷ Premature switching off.
▷ Reduced return of the fuel vapors.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Follow safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
Safety information
NOTE
Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfill‐
ing of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys‐
tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged by
contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm the
environment. There is a risk of damage to
property. Avoid overfilling.◀
227
Mobility Fuel
Fuel
Vehicle features and options Safety information
This chapter describes all standard, country- NOTE

specific and optional features offered with the Do not press the Start/Stop button after
series. It also describes features that are not refueling with the wrong fuel. Furthermore, the
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due catalytic converter is permanently damaged.
to the selected options or country versions. There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
This also applies to safety-related functions refuel or add the following in the case of gaso‐
and systems. When using these functions and line engines:
systems, the applicable laws and regulations ▷ Leaded gasoline.
must be observed.
▷ Metallic additives, for instance manganese
or iron.
Do not press the Start/Stop button after refuel‐
Fuel recommendation
ing with the wrong fuel. Contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified service cen‐
General information
ter or repair shop.◀
Depending on the region, many gas stations
sell fuel that has been customized to winter or NOTE
summer conditions. Fuel that is available in Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel sys‐
winter, for instance helps make a cold start tem and the engine. There is a risk of damage
easier. to property. Do not use fuels with a higher per‐
centage of ethanol than recommended. Do not
Gasoline refuel with fuels containing methanol, e.g. M5
to M100.◀
General information
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline NOTE
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur con‐ Fuel that does not comply with the mini‐
tent. mum quality can compromise engine function
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as con‐ or cause engine damage. There is a risk of
taining metal must not be used. damage to property. Do not fill with fuel that
does not comply with the minimum quality.◀
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
10 %, i. e., E10, may be used for refueling. CAUTION
Ethanol should meet the following quality stan‐ The use of poor-quality fuels may result
dards: in harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi‐
US: ASTM 4806–xx tionally, problems relating to drivability, start‐
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx ing and stalling, especially under certain envi‐
ronmental conditions such as high ambient
xx: comply with the current standard in each
temperature and high altitude, may occur.
case.
228
Fuel Mobility
If drivability problems are encountered, we rec‐

ommend switching to a high quality gasoline
brand and a higher octane grade — AKI num‐
ber — for a few tank fills. To avoid harmful en‐
gine deposits, it is highly recommended to
purchase gasoline from Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may result in the need for unscheduled main‐
tenance.◀
Recommended fuel grade

BMW recommends AKI 91.
Minimum fuel grade

BMW recommends AKI 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat‐
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high external temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
229
Mobility Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options sure values apply to tire sizes approved by the
manufacturer of the vehicle for the vehicle
This chapter describes all standard, country- type.
To identify the correct tire inflation pressure,
please note the following:
to the selected options or country versions. ▷ Tire sizes of your vehicle.
This also applies to safety-related functions ▷ Maximum permitted driving speed.
systems, the applicable laws and regulations Checking the tire inflation pressure
must be observed.
General information
Tires heat up while driving. The tire inflation
Tire inflation pressure pressure increases with the tire temperature.
Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire in‐
General information flation pressure.
The tire characteristics and tire inflation pres‐
The displays of inflation devices may under-
sure influence the following:
read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
▷ The service life of the tires.
▷ Road safety. Checking using tire inflation pressure
▷ Driving comfort. specifications in the tire inflation
pressure table
▷ Fuel consumption.
The tire inflation pressure specifications in the
tire inflation pressure table only relate to cold
Safety information
tires or tires at the same temperature as the
WARNING ambient temperature.
A tire with too little or no tire inflation Only check the tire inflation pressure levels
pressure may heat up significantly and sustain when the tires are cold, i.e.:
damage. This will have a negative impact on
▷ Driving range of max. 1.25 miles/2 km has
aspects of handling, such as steering and
not been exceeded.
braking response. There is a risk of an acci‐
dent. Regularly check the tire inflation pres‐ ▷ If the vehicle has not moved again for at
sure, and correct it as needed, for instance least 2 hours after a trip.
twice a month and before a long trip.◀ 1. Determine, refer to page 230, the intended
tire inflation pressure levels for the
Tire inflation pressure specifications mounted tires.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all four
In the tire inflation pressure table tires, using a pressure gage, for example.
The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
page 231, contains all tire inflation pressure
specifications for the specified tire sizes at the
ambient temperature. The tire inflation pres‐
230
Wheels and tires Mobility
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the cur‐ Tire inflation pressure values up to
rent tire inflation pressure value deviates 100 mph/160 km/h
from the specified value.
4. Check whether all valve caps are screwed 330i xDrive
onto the tire valves.
Tire size Pressure specifications
After correcting the tire inflation in bar/PSI
pressure Specifications in
For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires. bar/PSI with cold
For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset the tires
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Tire inflation pressures up to 225/55 R 17 97 H 2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32

100 mph/160 km/h M+S A/S RSC
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and for 225/55 R 17 97 H

optimum driving comfort, note the pressure RSC
values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer 225/55 R 17 97 H
to page 231, and adjust as necessary. M+S RSC
225/50 R 18 95 V 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35

RSC
225/50 R 18 99 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
225/50 R 18 99 V
M+S XL RSC
225/45 R 19 96 V 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38

M+S XL A/S RSC
These pressure values can also be found on
Front: 225/50 R 18 2.2 / 32 -
the tire inflation pressure label on the driver's
95 V RSC
door pillar.
Rear: 255/45 R 18 - 2.2 / 32
Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/160 km/h. 99 V RSC
Front: 225/45 R 19 2.2 / 32 -

92 W RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 19 - 2.4 / 35

96 W RSC
Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of

T 135/90 R 17 104 50 mph / 80 km/h
M 4.2 / 60
231
340i xDrive For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for
optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
Tire size Pressure specifications values in the tire inflation pressure table, refer
in bar/PSI to page 232, and adjust as necessary.
Specifications in
Tire inflation pressure values over
bar/PSI with cold
100 mph/160 km/h
tires
330i xDrive
225/50 R 18 95 V 2.2 / 32 2.4 / 35 Without high-speed tuning feature
RSC Tire size Pressure specifications
225/50 R 18 99 V in bar/PSI
M+S XL A/S RSC
Specifications in
225/50 R 18 99 V
bar/PSI with cold
M+S XL RSC
tires
225/55 R 17 97 H
M+S RSC
225/55 R 17 97 H 2.2 / 32 2.5 / 36
225/45 R 19 96 V 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38 M+S A/S RSC
M+S XL A/S RSC
225/55 R 17 97 H
Front: 225/50 2.2 / 32 - RSC
R 18 95 V RSC 225/55 R 17 97 H
Rear: 255/45 R 18 - 2.2 / 32 M+S RSC
99 V RSC 225/50 R 18 95 V 2.2 / 32 2.7 / 39
Front: 225/45 2.2 / 32 - RSC
R 19 92 W RSC 225/50 R 18 99 V
M+S XL A/S RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 19 - 2.4 / 35
96 W RSC 225/50 R 18 99 V
M+S XL RSC
Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of
50 mph / 80 km/h 225/45 R 19 96 V 2.4 / 35 2.9 / 42
T 135/90 R 17
M+S XL A/S RSC
104 M 4.2 / 60
Front: 225/50 R 18 2.2 / 32 -
Tire inflation pressures at max. 95 V RSC
speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h Rear: 255/45 R 18 - 2.5 / 36
WARNING 99 V RSC
In order to drive at maximum speeds in Front: 225/45 R 19 2.4 / 35 -
excess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please observe, 92 W RSC
and, if necessary, adjust tire pressures for
speeds exceeding 100 mph/160 km/h from the
relevant table on the following pages. Other‐
wise, tire damage and accidents could occur.◀
232
Tire size Pressure specifications 340i xDrive

in bar/PSI Without high-speed tuning feature
Rear: 255/40 R 19 - 2.6 / 38 Tire size Pressure specifications

96 W RSC in bar/PSI
Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of Specifications in

T 135/90 R 17 104 50 mph / 80 km/h bar/PSI with cold
M 4.2 / 60 tires
With high-speed tuning feature 225/55 R 17 97 H 2.2 / 32 2.7 / 39

M+S RSC
Tire size Pressure specifications in
bar/PSI 225/50 R 18 95 V
RSC
Specifications in
225/50 R 18 99 V
bar/PSI with cold
M+S XL A/S RSC
tires
225/50 R 18 99 V
M+S XL RSC
225/55 R 17 97 H 2.4 / 35 2.9 / 42
225/45 R 19 96 V 2.4 / 35 2.9 / 42
M+S RSC
M+S XL A/S RSC
225/55 R 17 97 W
RSC Front: 225/50 2.2 / 32 -
R 18 95 V RSC
225/50 R 18 95 W 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45
RSC Rear: 255/45 R 18 - 2.4 / 35
99 V RSC
225/50 R 18 99 V
M+S XL RSC Front: 225/45 2.4 / 35 -
R 19 92 W RSC
Front: 2.6 / 38 -
225/50 R 18 95 W Rear: 255/40 R 19 - 2.6 / 38
RSC 96 W RSC
Rear: 255/45 R 18 - 2.9 / 42 Emergency wheel: Speed up to a max. of
99 W RSC 50 mph / 80 km/h
T 135/90 R 17
Front: 225/45 2.8 / 41 - 104 M 4.2 / 60
R 19 92 W RSC
Rear: 255/40 R 19 - 3.1 / 45 With high-speed tuning feature
96 W RSC
Emergency Speed up to a max. of

wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h
T 135/90 R 17 4.2 / 60
104 M
233
Tire size Pressure specifications in Maximum tire load

bar/PSI Maximum tire load is the maximum permissible
weight for which the tire is approved.
Specifications in
bar/PSI with cold Locate the maximum tire load on the tire side‐
tires wall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating – GAWR
– on the certification label on the driver’s door
pillar.
225/50 R 18 95 2.6 / 38 3.1 / 45 Divide the tire load by 1.1. It must be greater
W RSC than one-half of the vehicle’s Gross Axle
225/50 R 18 99 V Weight Rating – GAWR. Note, front vs. rear
M+S XL RSC GAWR and tire loads, respectively.
225/55 R 17 97 H 2.2 / 32 2.6 / 38 Speed letter

M+S RSC
Q = up to 100 mph/160 km/h
Front: 2.6 / 38 - R = up to 106 mph/170 km/h
225/50 R 18 95
S = up to 112 mph/180 km/h
W RSC
T = up to 118 mph/190 km/h
Rear: - 2.9 / 42
H = up to 131 mph/210 km/h
255/45 R 18 99
W RSC V = up to 150 mph/240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph/270 km/h
Front: 225/45 2.8 / 41 -
R 19 92 W RSC Y = up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Rear: 255/40 - 3.1 / 45 Tire Identification Number

R 19 96 W RSC
DOT code: DOT xxxx xxx 3817
Emergency Speed up to a max. of xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
wheel: 50 mph / 80 km/h
xxx: tire size and tire design
T 135/90 R 17 4.2 / 60
3817: tire age
104 M
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the U.S. Department of Transportation.
Tire identification marks Tire age
Tire size Recommendation

245/45 R 18 96 Y Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at
245: nominal width in mm least every 6 years.
45: aspect ratio in %
Manufacture date
R: radial tire code
You can find the manufacture date of the tire
18: rim diameter in inches on the tire's sidewall.
96: load rating, not for ZR tires
Y: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires
234
Designation Manufacture date and does not include acceleration, cornering,

hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
DOT … 3817 38th week, 2017
Temperature
Uniform Tire Quality Grading The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
Quality grades can be found where applicable and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
and maximum section width. heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera‐
Sustained high temperature can cause the ma‐
ture A
terial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
DOT Quality Grades sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds
Treadwear to a level of performance which all passenger
Traction AA A B C vehicle tires must meet under the Federal Mo‐
Temperature A B C tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
Band A represent higher levels of performance
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to required by law.
these grades.
WARNING
Treadwear The temperature grade for this tire is es‐
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating tablished for a tire that is properly inflated and
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐
under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
ernment test course. E.g., a tire graded 150 in combination, can cause heat buildup and
would wear one and one-half, 1 g, times as well possible tire failure.◀
on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends RSC – Run-flat tires
upon the actual conditions of their use, how‐ Run-flat tires, refer to page 238, are labeled
ever, and may depart significantly from the with a circular symbol containing the letters
norm due to variations in driving habits, service RSC marked on the sidewall.
practices and differences in road characteris‐
tics and climate.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires with better cold
Traction
weather performance than summer tires.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to Tire tread
stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government Summer tires
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than
marked C may have poor traction performance.
0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an increased
The traction grade assigned to this tire is risk of hydroplaning.
based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,
235
Winter tires ▷ Unusual handling such as a strong ten‐

Do not drive with a tire tread of less than dency to pull to the left or right.
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable for Damage can be caused by the following situa‐
winter operation. tions, for instance:
▷ Driving over curbs.
Minimum tread depth
▷ Road damage.
▷ Tire inflation pressure too low.
▷ Vehicle overloading.
▷ Incorrect tire storage.
Safety information
WARNING
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation
pressure, which can lead to loss of vehicle
Wear indicators are distributed around the control. There is a risk of an accident. If tire
tire's circumference and have the legally re‐ damage is suspected while driving, immedi‐
quired minimum height of 0.063 in‐ ately reduce speed and stop. Have wheels and
ches/1.6 mm. tires checked. For this purpose, drive carefully
to the nearest dealer’s service center or an‐
The positions of the wear indicators are
marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread
Have vehicle towed or transported as needed.
Wear Indicator.
Do not repair damaged tires, but have them re‐
placed.◀
Tire damage WARNING

Tires can become damaged by driving
General information over obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, foreign high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller tire
objects lodged in the tread, and tread wear. cross-section. The smaller the tire cross-sec‐
Driving over rough or damaged road surfaces, tion, the higher the risk of tire damage. There
as well as debris, curbs and other obstacles is a danger of accidents and property damage.
can cause serious damage to wheels, tires and If possible, drive around obstacles, or drive
suspension parts. This is more likely to occur over them slowly and carefully.◀
with low-profile tires, which provide less cush‐
ioning between the wheel and the road. Be
careful to avoid road hazards and reduce your Changing wheels and tires
speed, especially if your vehicle is equipped
with low-profile tires. Mounting
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle mal‐ Have mounting and wheel balancing carried
functions: out by a dealer’s service center or another
▷ Unusual vibrations. qualified service center or repair shop.
▷ Unusual tire or running noises.
236
Wheel and tire combination Recommended tire brands
General information
You can ask the dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair shop
about the correct wheel/tire combination and
wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Safety information
WARNING
Wheels and tires which are not suitable For each tire size, the manufacturer of the ve‐
for your vehicle can damage parts of the vehi‐ hicle recommends certain tire brands. The tire
cle, for instance due to contact with the body brands can be identified by a star on the tire
due to tolerances despite the same official size sidewall.
rating. There is a risk of an accident. The man‐
ufacturer of your vehicle strongly suggests New tires
that you use wheels and tires that have been
Tire traction is not optimal due to manufactur‐
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for
ing circumstances when tires are brand-new;
your vehicle type.◀
they achieve their full traction potential after a
WARNING break-in time.
Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will Drive conservatively for the first
have a negative impact on the vehicle's han‐ 200 miles/300 km.
dling and on the function of a variety of sys‐
tems, such as ABS or DSC. There is a risk of Retreaded tires
an accident. To maintain good handling and WARNING
vehicle response, use only tires with a single
Retreaded tires can have different tire
tread configuration from a single manufacturer.
casing structures. With advanced age the serv‐
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
ice life can be limited. There is a risk of an acci‐
that you use wheels and tires that have been
dent. The manufacturer of your vehicle does
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for
not recommend the use of retreaded tires.◀
your vehicle type. Following tire damage, have
the original wheel/tire combination remounted The manufacturer of your vehicle does not rec‐
on the vehicle as soon as possible.◀ ommend the use of retreaded tires.
Winter tires
Winter tires are recommended for operating on
winter roads.
Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro‐
vide better winter traction than summer tires,
they usually do not provide the same level of
performance as winter tires.
237
Maximum speed of winter tires Run-flat tires

If the maximum speed of the vehicle is higher
than the permissible speed for the winter tires, Concept
then attach a label showing the permissible Run-flat tires permit continued driving under
maximum speed in the field of view. The label restricted conditions even in the event of a
is available from a dealer’s service center or complete loss of tire inflation pressure.
another qualified service center or repair shop.
With winter tires mounted, observe and do not General information
exceed the permissible maximum speed. The wheels consist of tires that are self-sup‐
porting, to a limited degree, and possibly spe‐
Run-flat tires cial rims.
If you are already using run-flat tires, for your The support of the sidewall allows the tire to
own safety you should replace them only with remain drivable to a restricted degree in the
the same kind. No spare tire is available in the event of a tire inflation pressure loss.
case of a flat tire. Further information is availa‐
Follow the instructions for continued driving
ble from a dealer’s service center or another
with a flat tire.
Safety information
Rotating wheels between axles
Different wear patterns can occur on the front WARNING
and rear axles depending on individual driving Your vehicle handles differently with a
conditions. The tires can be rotated in pairs run-flat with no or low inflation pressure; for in‐
between the axles to achieve even wear. Fur‐ stance, your lane stability when braking is re‐
ther information is available from a dealer’s duced, braking distances are longer and the
service center or another qualified service cen‐ self-steering properties will change. There is a
ter or repair shop. After rotating, check the tire risk of an accident.
pressure and correct, if needed. Drive moderately and do not exceed a speed of
Rotating the tires between the axes is not per‐ 50 mph/80 km/h.◀
missible on vehicles with different tire sizes or
rim sizes on the front and rear axles. Label
Storing tires
Air pressure
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation pres‐
sure indicated on the side wall of the tire.
Storage
Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and dark
place.
The tires are marked on the tire sidewall with
Always protect tires against all contact with oil, RSC Run-flat System Component.
grease, and solvents.
Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
238
Repairing a flat tire ▷ Pull the speed limit sticker off the sealant
container and apply it to the steering
Safety measures wheel.
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible ▷ The use of a sealant can damage the TPM
from passing traffic and on solid ground. wheel electronics. In this case, have the
TPM wheel electronics replaced at the
▷ Switch on the hazard warning system.
next opportunity.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
▷ The compressor can be used to check the
setting the parking brake.
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead position Storage
and engage the steering wheel lock.
The Mobility System is located under the
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the cargo floor panel.
vehicle and ensure that they remain out‐
side the immediate area in a safe place, Sealant container
such as behind a guardrail.
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Mobility System
Concept
With the Mobility System, minor tire damage
can be sealed temporarily to enable continued ▷ Sealant container, arrow 1.
travel. To accomplish this, sealant is pumped
into the tires, which seals the damage from the ▷ Filling hose, arrow 2.
inside. Observe use-by date on the sealant container.
General information Compressor

▷ Follow the instructions on using the Mobi‐
lity System found on the compressor and
sealant container.
▷ Use of the Mobility System may be ineffec‐
tive if the tire puncture measures approx.
1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
▷ Contact a dealer’s service center or an‐
other qualified service center or repair
shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
▷ If possible, do not remove foreign bodies 1 On/off switch
that have penetrated the tire. Only remove
2 Sealant container holder
foreign objects if they are visibly protruding
from the tire. 3 Reduce tire inflation pressure button
4 Tire pressure gage
239
5 Compressor Filling
6 Connector/cable for socket 1. Shake the sealant container.
7 Connection hose — stowed in the bottom

of the compressor
Safety measures
▷ Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground.
▷ Secure the vehicle against rolling away by
setting the parking brake. 2. Take the connection hose completely out
▷ Turn the steering wheel until the front of the compressor housing. Do not kink the
wheels are in the straight-ahead position hose.
and engage the steering wheel lock.
▷ Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
side the immediate area in a safe place,
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle at an
appropriate distance.
Filling the tire with sealant

3. Attach the connection hose to the connec‐
Safety information
tor of the sealing container, ensuring that it
DANGER engages audibly.
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila‐
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can
enter into the vehicle. The exhaust gases con‐
tain pollutants which are colorless and odor‐
less. In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation.◀
NOTE
The compressor can overheat during ex‐
tended operation. There is a risk of damage to
property. Do not run the compressor for more
than 10 minutes.◀
240
4. Slide the sealing container upright into the 7. With the ignition switched on or the engine
holder on the compressor housing, ensur‐ running, switch on the compressor.
ing that it engages audibly.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes to

5. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve fill the tire with sealant and achieve a tire infla‐
and screw the connection hose onto the tion pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
tire valve of the nonworking wheel. While the tire is being filled with sealant, the
tire inflation pressure may sporadically reach
approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the compres‐
sor at this point.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar is not
reached:
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Pull the connector out of the power socket
inside the vehicle.
3. Unscrew the filling hose from the tire valve.
6. With the compressor switched off, insert
4. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to dis‐
the plug into a power socket inside the ve‐
tribute the sealant in the tire.
hicle.
5. Inflate the tire again using the compressor.
If a tire inflation pressure of 2 bar cannot be
reached, contact your dealer’s service cen‐
ter or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Stowing the Mobility System

1. Remove the connection hose of the seal‐
ant container from the tire valve.
2. Pull the compressor connector out of the
socket inside the vehicle.
3. Remove the connection hose from the
sealant container.
241
4. Wrap and store the sealant container and 4. Insert the connector into the power socket
the connection hose in suitable material to inside the vehicle.
avoid dirtying the cargo area.
5. Stow the Mobility System back in the
cargo area.
Distributing the sealant

Immediately drive approx. 5 miles/10 km to en‐
sure that the sealant is evenly distributed in the
tire.
Do not exceed the permissible maximum
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h. 5. Correct the tire inflation pressure to
If possible, do not drive at speeds less than 2.5 bar.
12 mph/20 km/h. ▷ Increase tire inflation pressure: with the
ignition switched on or the engine run‐
Correcting the tire inflation pressure ning, switch on the compressor.
1. Stop at a suitable location. ▷ Reduce tire inflation pressure: press
2. Screw the connection hose onto the tire the button on the compressor.
valve stem.
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Reinitialize the run-flat tires.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System at the next
opportunity.
3. Attach the connection hose directly to the

compressor. Snow chains
Safety information
WARNING
With the mounting of snow chains on un‐
suitable tires, the snow chains can come into
contact with vehicle parts. There is a risk of ac‐
cidents or risk of damage to property. Only
mount snow chains on tires that are desig‐
nated by their manufacturer as suitable for the
use of snow chains.◀
242
WARNING Changing wheels/tires

Insufficiently tight snow chains may
damage tires and vehicle components. There General information
is a risk of accidents or risk of damage to prop‐ When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a
erty. Make sure that the snow chains are al‐ wheel does not always need to be changed im‐
ways sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as needed mediately when there is a loss of tire inflation
according to the snow chain manufacturer's in‐ pressure due to a flat tire.
structions.◀
If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
available as accessories from a dealer’s service
Fine-link snow chains center or another qualified service center or re‐
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends pair shop.
use of fine-link snow chains. Certain types of
fine-link snow chains have been tested by the Safety information
manufacturer of the vehicle and recommended
DANGER
as road-safe and suitable.
The vehicle jack is only provided for
Information regarding suitable snow chains is
short-term lifting of the vehicle for wheel
available from a dealer’s service center or an‐
changes. Even if all safety measures are ob‐
served, there is a risk of the raised vehicle fall‐
ing, if the vehicle jack tilts over. There is a risk
Use of injuries or danger to life. If the vehicle is
Use only in pairs on the rear wheels, equipped raised, do not lie under the vehicle and do not
with the tires of the following size: start the engine.◀
▷ 225/55 R 17.
DANGER
▷ 225/50 R 18.
Supports such as wooden blocks under
Follow the snow chain manufacturer's instruc‐ the vehicle jack may prevent it from achieving
tions. its load capacity due to its restricted height.
Do not initialize the run-flat tires after mount‐ The load capacity of the wooden blocks may
ing snow chains, as doing so may result in in‐ be exceeded, causing the vehicle to tip over.
correct readings. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Do
Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM not place supports under the vehicle jack.◀
after mounting snow chains, as doing so may
WARNING
result in incorrect readings.
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufac‐
When driving with snow chains, briefly activate
turer, is provided in order to perform a wheel
Dynamic Traction Control DTC, if needed.
change in the event of a breakdown. The jack
is not designed for frequent use; for example,
Maximum speed with snow chains
changing from summer to winter tires. Using
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h the jack frequently may cause it to become
when using snow chains. jammed or damaged. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property. Only use the
jack to attach an emergency or spare wheel in
the event of a breakdown.◀
243
WARNING On a level surface

On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for
example snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack
can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If possi‐
ble, change the wheel on a flat, solid, and slip-
resistant surface.◀
WARNING
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
the vehicle and for the jacking points on the
vehicle only. There is a risk of injury. Do not lift
Place chocks or other suitable objects, for ex‐
any other vehicle or cargo using the vehicle
ample a rock, in front of and behind the wheel
jack.◀
that is diagonally opposite to the wheel that
WARNING you wish to change.
If the vehicle jack is not inserted into the
jacking point provided for this purpose, the ve‐ On a slight downhill gradient
hicle may be damaged or the vehicle jack may
slip when it is being cranked up. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. When
cranking up the vehicle jack, ensure that it is
inserted in the jacking point next to the wheel
housing.◀
WARNING
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack
may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are ex‐
erted on it. There is a risk of injury and risk of If you need to change a wheel on a slight
damage to property. While the vehicle is downhill grade, place chocks and other suita‐
raised, do not exert lateral forces on the vehicle ble objects, for instance a rock, under the
or pull abruptly on the vehicle. Have a stuck wheels of both the front and rear axles against
wheel removed by a dealer’s service center or the rolling direction.
another qualified service center or repair
shop.◀ Lug bolt lock
Securing the vehicle against rolling Concept

The wheel lug bolts have a special coding. The
General information lug bolts can only be released with the adapter
The vehicle manufacturer recommends to ad‐ which matches the coding.
ditionally secure the vehicle against rolling
away when changing a wheel. Overview
The adapter of the lug bolt lock is in the on‐
board vehicle tool kit or in a storage compart‐
ment close to the onboard vehicle tool kit.
244
▷ If necessary, set up a warning triangle or

portable hazard warning light at an appro‐
priate distance.
▷ Secure the vehicle additionally against roll‐
ing.
▷ Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack

▷ Lug bolt, arrow 1.
▷ Adapter, arrow 2.
Unscrewing
1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt.
2. Unscrew the lug bolt.
3. Remove the adapter after unscrewing the
lug bolt.
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are lo‐
cated at the indicated positions.
Screwing on
1. Attach the adapter to the lug bolt. If neces‐
sary, turn the adapter until it fits on the lug Jacking up the vehicle
bolt. WARNING
2. Screw on the lug bolt. The tightening tor‐ Hands and fingers can be jammed when
que is 140 Nm. using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of injury.
3. Remove the adapter and stow it after Comply with the described hand position and
screwing on the lug bolt.
Preparing the vehicle

▷ Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip
ground at a safe distance from traffic.
▷ Engage a gear or move the selector lever
to position P.
▷ As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
have all vehicle occupants get out of the
side the immediate area in a safe place,
▷ Depending on the equipment version, get
tools and the emergency wheel from the
vehicle.
245
do not change this position while using the ve‐ 5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands
hicle jack.◀ vertically and at a right angle beneath the
jacking point.
1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar‐
row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank
with your other hand, arrow 2.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot stands

vertically and perpendicularly beneath the
jacking point after extending the vehicle
2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectangular
jack.
recess of the jacking point closest to the
wheel to be changed.
7. Crank up the vehicle jack until the entire

surface of the jack is in contact with the
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the vehi‐
ground and the wheel in question is raised
cle jack crank or lever clockwise.
a maximum of 1.2 inches/3 cm off the
ground.
Mounting a wheel
Mount one emergency wheel only, as required.
1. Unscrew the lug bolts.

2. Remove the wheel.
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel on
and screw in at least two lug bolts in a
4. Take your hand away from the vehicle jack crosswise pattern until hand-tight.
as soon as the vehicle jack is under load If non-original light-alloy wheels of the ve‐
and continue turning the vehicle jack crank hicle manufacturer are mounted, the ac‐
or lever with one hand. companying lug bolts may have to be used
as well.
246
4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts and

tighten all lug bolts well in a crosswise pat‐
tern.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counterclock‐
wise to retract the vehicle jack and lower
the vehicle.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it se‐
curely.
After the wheel change

1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The tight‐
ening torque is 101 lb ft/140 Nm.
2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo
area, if necessary.
The nonworking wheel cannot be stored
under the cargo floor panel because of its
size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next op‐
portunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the run-flat tires.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are tight
with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the
nearest dealer’s service center or another
247
Mobility Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Important features in the engine compartment
1 Jump-starting, negative battery terminal 6 Oil filler neck

2 Vehicle identification number 7 Coolant reservoir
3 Filler neck for washer fluid The coolant reservoir for 6-cylinder and
4 Jump-starting, positive battery terminal diesel engines is located on the opposite
side of the engine compartment.
5 Engine compartment fuse box
248
Engine compartment Mobility
Hood NOTE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
Safety information when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the wipers
WARNING
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
Improperly executed work in the engine down onto the windshield before opening the
compartment can damage vehicle compo‐ hood.◀
nents and impair vehicle functions. There is a
risk of personal and property damage. The
manufacturer of your vehicle recommends Opening the hood
that, in the effort to avoid such risks, work in 1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
the engine compartment be performed by a Hood is unlocked.
service center or repair shop.◀
WARNING
The engine compartment accommo‐
dates moving components. Certain compo‐
nents in the engine compartment can also
move with the vehicle switched off, for in‐
stance the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury.
Do not reach into the area of moving parts.
Keep articles of clothing and hair away from 2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
moving parts.◀ again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
WARNING
There are protruding parts, for instance Indicator/warning lights
locking hook, on the inside of the hood. There
When the hood is unlocked, a Check Control
is a risk of injury. If the hood is open, pay atten‐
message is displayed.
tion to protruding parts and keep clear of these
areas.◀
Closing the hood
WARNING
An incorrectly locked hood can open
while driving and restrict visibility. There is a
risk of an accident. Stop immediately and cor‐
rectly close the hood.◀
WARNING
Body parts can be jammed when open‐
ing and closing the hood. There is a risk of in‐
jury. Make sure that the area of movement of Let the hood drop from a height of approx.
the hood is clear during opening and closing.◀ 16 inches/40 cm and push down on it to lock it
fully.
The hood must engage on both sides.
249
Mobility Engine oil
Engine oil
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk
of damage to property. Do not add too much
engine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
have the engine oil level corrected by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.◀
must be observed.
Electronic oil measurement
General information General information
The electronic oil measurement has two meas‐
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
uring principles:
your driving style and driving conditions.
▷ Monitoring.
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil level
after refueling by taking a detailed measure‐ ▷ Detailed measurement.
ment. When making frequent short-distance trips or
The engine oil consumption can increase in using a dynamic driving style, for instance
the following situations, for example: when taking curves aggressively, regularly per‐
form a detailed measurement.
▷ Sporty driving style.
▷ Break-in of the engine. Monitoring
▷ Idling of the engine.
▷ With use of engine oil types that are classi‐ Concept
fied as not suitable. The engine oil level is monitored electronically
Different Check Control messages appear on while driving and can be shown on the Control
the Control Display depending on the engine Display.
oil level. If the engine oil level is outside its permissible
operating range, a Check Control message is
displayed.
Safety information
NOTE
A current measured value is available after ap‐
An engine oil level that is too low causes prox. 30 minutes of normal driving.
engine damage. There is a risk of damage to
property. Immediately add engine oil.◀ Displaying the engine oil level
Via iDrive:
1. "My Vehicle"
250
Engine oil Mobility
2. "Vehicle status" Adding engine oil

3. "Engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed. General information
Only add engine oil when the message is dis‐
System limits played in the instrument cluster. The quantity
When making frequent short-distance trips or to be added is indicated in the message dis‐
using a dynamic driving style, it may not be played in the instrument cluster.
possible to calculate a measured value. In this Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer to
case, the measured value for the last, suffi‐ page 252.
ciently long trip is displayed. Safely park the vehicle and switch off the igni‐
tion before adding engine oil.
Detailed measurement
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Concept
Safety information
The engine oil level is checked when the vehi‐
cle is stationary and displayed via a scale. WARNING
If the engine oil level is outside its permissible Operating materials, for instance oils,
operating range, a Check Control message is greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harmful
displayed. ingredients. There is a risk of injuries or danger
to life. Follow the instructions on the contain‐
General information ers. Avoid the contact of articles of clothing,
skin or eyes with operating materials. Do not
During the measurement, the idle speed is in‐
refill operating materials into different bottles.
creased somewhat.
Store operating materials out of reach of chil‐
dren.◀
▷ Vehicle is parked in a horizontal position. NOTE
▷ Steptronic transmission: selector lever in An engine oil level that is too low causes
selector lever position N or P and accelera‐ engine damage. There is a risk of damage to
tor pedal not depressed. property. Immediately add engine oil.◀
▷ Engine is running and is at operating tem‐ NOTE
perature.
Too much engine oil can damage the en‐
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a risk
Performing a detailed measurement
of damage to property. Do not add too much
Via iDrive: engine oil. When too much engine oil is added,
1. "My Vehicle" have the engine oil level corrected by a deal‐
er’s service center or another qualified service
2. "Vehicle status"
center or repair shop.◀
3. "Engine oil level"
4. "Measure engine oil level" Overview
5. "Start measurement" The oil filler neck is located in the engine com‐
The engine oil level is checked and displayed partment, refer to page 248.
via a scale.
251
Mobility Engine oil
Adding engine oil The oil rating BMW Longlife-14 FE+ is only
1. Open the hood, refer to page 249. suitable for particular gasoline engines.
2. Turn the lid counterclockwise. More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
Alternative engine oil types

If an engine oil suitable for continuous use is
not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an en‐
gine oil with the following oil rating can be
added:
3. Add engine oil. Gasoline engine
4. Close the cap. BMW Longlife-01.
API SL, API SM, or API SN.

Engine oil types to add
Viscosity grades
General information Gasoline engine:
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of When selecting an engine oil, make sure that
the engine. the engine oil has the viscosity grade SAE
0W-30 or SAE 0W-20. The suitable viscosity
Safety information grade is indicated on a label in the engine com‐
NOTE partment.
Oil additives can damage the engine. Viscosity class SAE 0W-20 is only suitable for
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not particular engines.
use oil additives.◀ More information about suitable engine oil rat‐
ings and viscosities of engine oils can be re‐
NOTE quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc‐ other qualified service center or repair shop.
tions in the engine or damage it. There is a risk
of damage to property. When selecting an en‐
gine oil, make sure that the engine oil has the Engine oil change
correct oil rating.◀
NOTE
Suitable engine oil types Engine oil that is not changed in timely
fashion can cause increased engine wear and
You can add engine oils that meet the follow‐
thus engine damage. There is a risk of damage
ing oil rating standards:
to property. Do not exceed the service data in‐
Gasoline engine dicated in the vehicle.◀
BMW Longlife-01 FE. The vehicle manufacturer recommends that

you have a dealer’s service center or another
BMW Longlife-14 FE+.
252
Engine oil Mobility
qualified service center or repair shop change

the engine oil.
253
Mobility Coolant
Coolant
Vehicle features and options Coolant level
General information
series. It also describes features that are not The coolant level is indicted using minimum
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due and maximum markings. Depending on the
to the selected options or country versions. coolant reservoir, the minimum and maximum
This also applies to safety-related functions markings are located at different locations.
systems, the applicable laws and regulations Concept
must be observed. Depending on the engine installation, the cool‐
ant reservoir is located on the right side or the
left side of the engine compartment.
General information
Checking the coolant level on the side
Not all commercially available additives are markings
suitable for the vehicle. Information about suit‐
1. Let the engine cool.
able additives is available from a dealer’s serv‐
ice center or another qualified service center or 2. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
repair shop. tween the minimum and maximum marks.
The marks are on the side of the coolant
reservoir.
Safety information
Symbol Meaning
WARNING
With the engine hot and the cooling sys‐ Maximum.
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
Minimum.
scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only open
the cooling system with the engine cooled
down.◀
WARNING
Additives are harmful and incorrect addi‐
tives can damage the engine. There is a risk of
injury and risk of damage to property. Do not
allow additives to come into contact with skin,
eyes or articles of clothing. Use suitable addi‐
tives only.◀
254
Coolant Mobility
Checking the coolant level in the filler Adding

neck 1. Let the engine cool.
There are yellow Min and Max marks in the 2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
coolant reservoir. counterclockwise to allow any excess
1. Let the engine cool. pressure to dissipate, then open it.
2. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir slightly
counterclockwise to allow any excess
pressure to dissipate, then open it.
3. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up

to the specified level; do not overfill.
4. Turn the lid until there is an audible click.
3. Open the coolant reservoir lid. The arrows on the coolant reservoir and
the lid must point towards one another.
4. The coolant level is correct if it lies be‐
tween the minimum and maximum marks 5. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi‐
in the filler neck. nated as soon as possible.
Disposal
Comply with the relevant environmen‐
tal protection regulations when dispos‐
ing of coolant and coolant additives.
255
Mobility Maintenance
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options General information
Information on service requirements, refer to
page 112, can be displayed on the Control Dis‐
play.
Service data in the remote control
This also applies to safety-related functions Information on the required maintenance is
and systems. When using these functions and continuously stored in the remote control. The
systems, the applicable laws and regulations dealer’s service center can read this data out
must be observed. and suggest a maintenance scope for the vehi‐
cle.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the remote
BMW maintenance system control with which the vehicle was driven most
recently.
The maintenance system indicates required
maintenance measures, and thereby provides
Storage periods
support in maintaining road safety and the op‐
erational reliability of the vehicle. Storage periods during which the vehicle bat‐
tery was disconnected are not taken into ac‐
In some cases, scopes and intervals may vary count.
according to the country-specific version. Re‐
placement work, spare parts, fuels and lubri‐ If this occurs, have a dealer's service center or
cants, and wear materials are calculated sepa‐ another qualified service center or repair shop
rately. Further information is available from a update the time-dependent maintenance pro‐
dealer’s service center or another qualified cedures, such as checking brake fluid and, if
service center or repair shop. necessary, changing the engine oil and the mi‐
crofilter/activated-charcoal filter.
Condition Based Service

Service and Warranty
CBS
Information Booklet for US
Concept models and Warranty and
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac‐ Service Guide Booklet for
count the driving conditions of the vehicle. Canadian models
CBS uses these to calculate the need for
Please consult your Service and Warranty In‐
maintenance.
formation Booklet for US models and Warranty
The system makes it possible to adapt the and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian mod‐
amount of maintenance corresponding to your els for additional information on service re‐
user profile. quirements.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends
that maintenance and repair be performed by a
256
Maintenance Mobility
service center or repair shop. Records of regu‐ Emissions

lar maintenance and repair work should be re‐
▷ The warning light lights up:
tained.
Emissions are deteriorating. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
Socket for OBD Onboard
▷ The warning light flashes under certain cir‐
Diagnosis
cumstances:
Safety information This indicates that there is excessive mis‐
firing in the engine.
NOTE
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an
system checked immediately; otherwise,
intricate component intended to be used in
serious engine misfiring within a brief pe‐
conjunction with specialized equipment to
riod can seriously damage emission con‐
check the vehicle’s primary emissions system.
trol components, in particular the catalytic
Improper use of the socket for Onboard Diag‐
converter.
nosis, or contact with the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis for other than its intended purpose,
can cause vehicle malfunctions and creates
risks of personal and property damage. Given
the foregoing, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to a
dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop or other persons
that have the specialized training and equip‐
ment for purposes of properly utilizing the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis.◀
Position
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side for

checking the primary components in the vehi‐
cle's emissions.
257
Mobility Replacing components
Replacing components
Folded-away wipers can be jammed
when the hood is opened. There is a risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the wipers
with the wiper blades mounted are folded
down onto the windshield before opening the
hood.◀
systems, the applicable laws and regulations Replacing the wiper blades
must be observed. 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the
wiper arms, refer to page 95.
2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
Onboard vehicle tool kit 3. Squeeze the retainer spring, arrow 1, and
fold up the wiper blade, arrow 2.
The onboard vehicle tool kit is located behind

the left folding cover in the cargo area.
4. Remove the wiper blade forward from the
catch.
5. Insert the new wiper blade in reverse order
Wiper blade replacement of removal until it locks in place.
6. Fold down the wipers.
Safety information
NOTE
The window may sustain damage if the Light and bulb replacement
wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade in‐
stalled. There is a risk of damage to property. General information
Hold the wiper firmly when changing the wiper
blade. Do not fold or switch on the wiper with‐ Lights and bulbs
out a wiper blade installed.◀ Lights and bulbs make an essential contribu‐
tion to vehicle safety.
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have the relevant work carried out a deal‐
258
Replacing components Mobility
er’s service center or another qualified service Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

center or repair shop.
WARNING
A spare light box is available from a dealer’s
Too intensive brightness can irritate or
damage the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
ter or repair shop.
injury. Do not look directly into the headlights
Follow the safety information, refer to or other light sources. Do not remove the LED
page 259. covers.◀
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Headlight glass
Some items of equipment use light-emitting
Condensation can form on the inside of the ex‐
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
ternal lights in cool or humid weather. When
source. These light-emitting diodes are related
driving with the lights switched on, the con‐
to conventional lasers and are officially desig‐
densation evaporates after a short time. The
nated as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
headlight glass does not need to be changed.
Follow the safety information, refer to
If despite driving with the headlights switched
page 259.
on, increasing humidity forms, for instance wa‐
ter droplets in the light, have the headlights
Safety information checked.
Lights and bulbs

Front lights, bulb replacement
WARNING
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con‐ LED headlights
tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There is a
risk of injury. Only change bulbs after they Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
have cooled off.◀ All front lights and side turn signals are de‐
signed with LED technology.
WARNING
In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
Work on switched-on lighting systems service center or another qualified service cen‐
can cause short circuits. There is a risk of in‐ ter or repair shop.
jury or risk of damage to property. When work‐
ing on the lighting system, switch off the lights LED front fog lights
in question. If necessary, heed the bulb manu‐
These front fog lights are made using LED
facturer's instructions.◀
technology. In the case of a malfunction, con‐
NOTE tact a dealer’s service center or another quali‐
Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do not
hold new bulbs with your bare hands. Use a
Turn signal in exterior mirror
clean cloth or something similar, or hold the The turn signals in the exterior mirrors feature
bulb by its base.◀ LED technology. In the case of a malfunction,
contact a dealer’s service center or another
259
Tail lights, bulb replacement Accessing the lights
Overview
Slide the cover outwards, arrow, and remove.
1 Turn signal
Changing reversing lights
2 Inside brake light
1. Turn bulb holder in the direction indicated
3 Reversing light on the housing and remove it.
4 Rear lights
5 Outside brake light
Bulb replacement, exterior tail lights

The outer tail lights are made using LED tech‐
nology. In the case of a malfunction, contact a
Lights in the tailgate 2. Unscrew the bulb from the bulb holder
counter-clockwise.
General information 3. Insert the new bulb.
Follow the safety information, refer to 4. Place the cover back in position and slide it
page 259. inwards.
Reversing lights: 21-watt bulb, H21W.
License plate lights and center brake
All lights in the tailgate are made using LED
light
technology. In the case of a malfunction, con‐
tact a dealer’s service center or another quali‐ These lights are made using LED technology.
fied service center or repair shop. In the case of a malfunction, contact a dealer’s
ter or repair shop.
Vehicle battery
Maintenance
The battery is maintenance-free.
260
The added amount of acid is sufficient for the ▷ If the vehicle is not used for more than a
service life of the battery. month.
More information about the battery can be re‐
quested from a dealer’s service center or an‐ Safety information
other qualified service center or repair shop. NOTE
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
Replacing the vehicle battery can work with high voltages and currents,
which means that the 12 volt on-board net‐
General information work can be overloaded or damaged. There is
The manufacturer of your vehicle recommends a risk of damage to property. Only connect
that you have a dealer’s service center or an‐ battery chargers for the vehicle battery to the
other qualified service center or repair shop starting aid terminals in the engine compart‐
register the vehicle battery to the vehicle after ment.◀
the battery has been replaced. Once the bat‐
tery has been registered again, all comfort fea‐
Starting aid terminals
tures will be available without restriction and
any Check Control messages displayed which In the vehicle, only charge the battery via the
relate to comfort features will disappear. starting aid terminals, refer to page 267, in the
engine compartment with the engine off.
Safety information
Power failure
NOTE
After a power loss, some equipment needs to
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible be newly initialized or individual settings up‐
can damage vehicle systems and impair vehi‐ dated, for example:
cle functions. There is a risk of personal and
▷ Seat and mirror memory: store the posi‐
property damage. Only vehicle batteries that
tions again.
are compatible with your vehicle type should
be installed in your vehicle. Information on ▷ Time: update.
compatible vehicle batteries is available at your ▷ Date: update.
dealer’s service center.◀ ▷ Glass sunroof: initialize the system.
Charging the battery Disposing of old batteries

Have old batteries disposed of by a
General information
dealer’s service center or another
Make sure that the battery is always suffi‐ qualified service center or repair shop
ciently charged to guarantee that the battery or take them to a collection point.
remains usable for its full service life.
Maintain the battery in an upright position for
A discharged battery is indicated by a transport and storage. Secure the battery so
red indicator light. that it does not tip over during transport.
The battery may need to be charged in the fol‐

lowing cases:
▷ When making frequent short-distance
drives.
261
Fuses 3. Remove the cover from one side, arrow 3.

4. Press the four fasteners and remove the
General information cover.
The fuses are located in two different places in
the vehicle.
Plastic tweezers and information on the fuse
types and locations are stored in the fuse box
in the cargo area.
Safety information
WARNING
Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
electrical lines and components. There is a risk Attaching the covers
of fire. Never attempt to repair a blown fuse.
1. When attaching the cover, make sure that
Do not replace a nonworking fuse with a sub‐
all four fasteners are engaged.
stitute of another color or amperage rating.◀
2. Attach the cover under the rubber lip and
then thread it between the bars.
In the engine compartment
General information
On right-hand drive vehicles, the fuses are lo‐
cated on the opposite side of the engine com‐
partment.
Removing the cover

1. Use the onboard vehicle tool kit to loosen
the three cover screws, arrow 1.
3. Press down on the holder and tighten the
three screws.
In the cargo area
2. Pull up the holder, arrow 2.
Fold up the cargo floor panel.
262
The fuses are located under a cover. To open

the cover, reach into the recessed grip on the
side and fold the cover open.
Information on the fuse types and locations is

found on a separate sheet.
After initial use, insert the sheet in the holding
fixture on the inside of the cover.
Replacing fuses
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer's service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop replace
the fuses.
263
Mobility Breakdown assistance
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options Overview

must be observed.
SOS button in the roofliner
Hazard warning flashers Functional requirements

▷ The SIM card integrated in the vehicle has
been activated.
▷ The radio-ready state is switched on.
▷ The Assist system is functional.
Initiating an Emergency Request

automatically
Under certain conditions, for instance if the air‐
The button is located in the center console. bags trigger, an Emergency Request is auto‐
matically initiated immediately after an acci‐
The red light in the button flashes when the dent of corresponding severity. Automatic
hazard warning flashers are activated. Collision Notification is not affected by press‐
ing the SOS button.
Intelligent emergency call Initiating an Emergency Request

manually
Concept 1. Press the cover briefly to open it.
In case of an emergency, an Emergency Re‐ 2. Press the SOS button until the LED at the
quest can be made through the system. button lights up green.
▷ The LED is illuminated green when an
General information Emergency Request has been initiated.
Only press the SOS button in an emergency. If a cancel prompt appears on the Control
For technical reasons, the Emergency Request Display, the Emergency Request can be
cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable con‐ aborted.
ditions.
264
Breakdown assistance Mobility
If the situation allows, wait in your vehicle General information

until the voice connection has been estab‐ In the event of a breakdown, data on the vehi‐
lished. cle's condition are sent directly to Roadside
▷ The LED flashes green when a connection Assistance.
to the BMW Response Center has been Roadside Assistance can also be contacted via
established. a Check Control message, refer to page 109.
The BMW Response Center then makes
contact with you and takes further steps to Requirements
help you. ▷ Active ConnectedDrive contract, equip‐
Even if you are unable to respond, the ment version with Intelligent emergency
BMW Response Center can take further call or BMW ConnectedDrive services.
steps to help you under certain circum‐ ▷ Cellular network reception.
stances.
▷ The ignition is switched on.
For this, data is transmitted to the BMW
Response Center which serves to deter‐ Starting Roadside Assistance
mine the necessary rescue measures. E.g.,
If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices,
the current position of the vehicle, if it can
support is offered through Teleservice Diagno‐
be established.
sis.
Even if you can no longer hear the BMW
Via iDrive:
Response Center through the loudspeak‐
ers, the BMW Response Center may still 1. "ConnectedDrive"
be able to hear you. 2. "BMW Assist"
The BMW Response Center ends the Emer‐ 3. "BMW Roadside Assistance"
gency Request.
A voice connection is established.
Teleservice Diagnosis
Roadside Assistance
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
General information transmission of detailed vehicle data that is im‐
portant for vehicle diagnosis. This data is
Roadside Assistance can be reached around
transmitted automatically.
the clock in many countries. You can obtain as‐
sistance there in the event of a vehicle break‐ A voice connection is established to Roadside
down. Assistance.
Roadside Assistance Starting Teleservice Help

Teleservice Help is a country-specific feature
Concept that enables an in-depth diagnosis of the vehi‐
BMW Roadside Assistance can be contacted if cle by Roadside Assistance via wireless trans‐
assistance is needed in the event of a break‐ mission.
down. You can launch Teleservice Help by requesting
it through Roadside Assistance.
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.

2. Set the parking brake.
265
3. Control Display is switched on. Storage

4. "Teleservice Help"
The driving ability of the vehicle can be re‐
stored for specific functions.
If this is not possible, further measures will be
initiated, for instance Roadside Assistance will
be informed.
Warning triangle
The first-aid kit is located behind the left-hand
cover in the cargo area.
Jump-starting
General information
If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started using the battery of another vehicle
The warning triangle is located in the tailgate. and two jumper cables. Only use jumper ca‐
To open the catches, arrows, turn through 90°. bles with fully insulated clamp handles.
Fold back the trim.
Safety information
DANGER
First-aid kit Contact with live components can lead to
an electric shock. There is a risk of injuries or
General information danger to life. Do not touch any components
Some of the articles have a limited service life. that are under voltage.◀
Check the expiration dates of the contents WARNING
regularly and replace any expired items
If the jumper cables are connected in the
promptly.
incorrect order, sparking may occur. There is a
risk of injury. Pay attention to the correct order
during connection.◀
NOTE
In the case of body contact between the
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during
jump-starting. There is a risk of damage to
property. Make sure that no body contact oc‐
curs.◀
266
Preparation Connecting the cables

1. Check whether the battery of the other ve‐ To prevent personal injury or damage to both
hicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The voltage vehicles, adhere strictly to the following proce‐
information can be found on the battery. dure.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi‐ 1. Open the cover of the BMW starting aid
cle. terminal.
3. Switch off any electronic systems/power 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the positive
consumers in both vehicles. jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
Starting aid terminals aid terminal of the vehicle providing assis‐
tance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other end
of the cable to the positive terminal of the
battery, or to the corresponding starting
aid terminal of the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the negative
jumper cable to the negative terminal of
the battery, or to the corresponding engine
or body ground of assisting vehicle.
The starting aid terminal in the engine com‐ 5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
partment acts as the battery's positive termi‐ negative terminal of the battery, or to the
nal. corresponding engine or body ground of
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine

Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an in‐
creased idle speed.
2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to be
started in the usual way.
If the first starting attempt is not success‐
The body ground or a special nut acts as the ful, wait a few minutes before making an‐
battery negative terminal. other attempt in order to allow the dis‐
charged battery to recharge.
3. Let both engines run for several minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re‐
verse order.
Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
267
Tow-starting and towing Tow truck
Safety information
WARNING
can malfunction during tow-starting/towing
with the Intelligent Safety systems activated.
gent Safety systems off prior to tow-starting/
towing.◀
The vehicle should only be transported on a
loading platform.
Steptronic transmission: transporting
the vehicle
NOTE
General information The vehicle can become damaged when
lifting and securing it.
The vehicle is not permitted to be towed.
There is a risk of damage to property.
Safety information ▷ Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
NOTE ▷ Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its tow
fitting, body parts, or suspension parts.◀
The vehicle can be damaged when tow‐
ing the vehicle with a single lifted axle. There is
a risk of damage to property. The vehicle Towing other vehicles
should only be transported on a loading plat‐
form.◀ General information
Switch on the hazard warning system, depend‐
ing on local regulations.
Pushing the vehicle
If the electrical system has failed, clearly iden‐
To remove a broken-down vehicle from the
tify the vehicle being towed by placing a sign
danger area, it can be pushed for a short dis‐
or a warning triangle in the rear window.
tance.
Roll or push, refer to page 99, the vehicle. Safety information
WARNING
If the approved gross vehicle weight of
the towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle to
be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or it will
not be possible to control the vehicle's re‐
sponse. There is a risk of an accident! Make
sure that the gross vehicle weight of the tow‐
ing vehicle is heavier than the vehicle to be
towed.◀
268
NOTE The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool kit,
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in‐ refer to page 258, are together in the cargo
correctly, damage to other vehicle parts can area.
occur. There is a risk of damage to property. Use of the tow fitting:
Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to the ▷ Use only the tow fitting provided with the
tow fitting.◀ vehicle and screw it all the way in.
▷ Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
Tow bar roads only.
The tow fittings used should be on the same ▷ Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, for
side on both vehicles. instance do not lift the vehicle by the tow
Should it prove impossible to avoid mounting fitting.
the tow bar at an offset angle, please follow the
following: Safety information
▷ Maneuvering capability is limited going NOTE
around corners.
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
▷ The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it there may be damage to the vehicle or to the
is secured with an offset. tow fitting. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Follow the notes on using the tow fit‐
Tow rope ting.◀
When starting to tow the vehicle, make sure
that the tow rope is taut. Screw thread for tow fitting
Use nylon ropes or straps, which will enable
the vehicle to be towed without jerking.
Tow fitting
General information
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover to

push it out.
Tow-starting
The screw-in tow fitting should always be car‐
ried in the vehicle. Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due to
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the front the Steptronic transmission.
or rear of the vehicle.
Have the reasons for the starting difficulties
corrected by a dealer’s service center or an‐
269
Mobility Care
Care
Vehicle features and options ▷ Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
31.5 in/80 cm.
specific and optional features offered with the Automatic vehicle washes
necessarily available in your vehicle, e. g., due Safety information
This also applies to safety-related functions NOTE
and systems. When using these functions and Water can penetrate in the windshield
systems, the applicable laws and regulations area due to high-pressure washers. There is a
must be observed. risk of damage to property. Avoid high-pres‐
sure washers.◀
NOTE
Washing the vehicle
Improper use of automatic vehicle
General information washes can cause damage to the vehicle.
There is a risk of damage to property. Follow
Regularly remove foreign objects such as
the following instructions:
leaves in the area below the windshield when
the hood is raised. ▷ Give preference to cloth vehicle washes or
those that use soft brushes in order to
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly in
avoid paint damage.
winter. Intense soiling and road salt can dam‐
age the vehicle. ▷ Avoid vehicle washes with guide rails
higher than 4 in/10 cm to avoid damage to
Steam blaster and high-pressure the chassis.
washer ▷ Observe the tire width of the guide rail to
avoid damage to tires and rims.
Safety information ▷ Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid damage to
NOTE the exterior mirrors.
When cleaning with high-pressure wash‐ ▷ Retract rear spoiler to avoid damage to rear
ers, components can be damaged due to the spoiler and vehicle.
pressure or temperatures being too high. ▷ Deactivate the wiper and, if necessary, rain
There is a risk of damage to property. Maintain sensor to avoid damage to the wiper sys‐
sufficient distance and do not spray too long tem.◀
continuously. Follow the operating instructions
for the high-pressure washer.◀ Driving into a vehicle wash with a
Distances and temperature
▷ Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃. General information
▷ Minimum distance from sensors, cameras, In a vehicle wash, the vehicle must be able to
seals: 12 inches/30 cm. roll freely.
Roll or push the vehicle, refer to page 99.
270
Care Mobility
Some vehicle washes do not permit persons in Safety information

the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked from
WARNING
the outside when in selector lever position N. A
signal sounds when an attempt is made to lock Cleansers can contain substances that
the vehicle. are dangerous and harmful to your health.
There is a risk of injury. When cleaning the in‐
Driving out of a vehicle wash terior, open the doors or windows. Only use
products intended for cleaning vehicles. Fol‐
Make sure that the remote control is in the ve‐
low the instructions on the container.◀
hicle.
Start the engine. Starting the engine, refer to
Vehicle paint
page 89.
General information
Headlights
Regular care contributes to driving safety and
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not use
value retention. Environmental influences in
abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.
areas with elevated air pollution or natural con‐
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for instance taminants, such as tree resin or pollen can af‐
from insects, with shampoo and wash off with fect the vehicle's paintwork. Tailor the fre‐
water. quency and extent of your vehicle care to
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an ice these influences.
scraper. Aggressive substances such as spilled fuel, oil,
grease or bird droppings, must be removed im‐
After washing the vehicle mediately to prevent the finish from being al‐
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes tered or discolored.
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking action
can be reduced. The heat generated during Matte finish
braking dries brake discs and brake pads and Only use cleaning and care products suitable
protects them against corrosion. for vehicles with matte finish.
Completely remove all residues on the win‐
dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to Leather care
smearing and to reduce wiper noises and Remove dust from the leather regularly, using
wiper blade wear. a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to increased
Vehicle care wear and premature degradation of the leather
surface.
Vehicle care products
To guard against discoloration, such as from
clothing, clean leather and provide leather care
General information
roughly every two months.
BMW recommends using vehicle care and
Clean light-colored leather more frequently be‐
cleaning products from BMW. Suitable care
cause soiling on such surfaces is substantially
products are available from a dealer’s service
more visible.
center or another qualified service center or re‐
pair shop.
271
Mobility Care
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt and ularly when they have been exposed to road
grease will gradually break down the protective salt.
layer of the leather surface.
Rear spoiler compartment
Upholstery material care To ensure that the function of the rear spoiler
is not impaired, by leaves, snow or ice, for in‐
General information stance the compartment that accommodates
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a vac‐ the rear spoiler should be cleaned regularly.
uum cleaner.
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with bev‐ Rubber components
erage stains, use a soft sponge or microfiber Environmental influences can cause surface
cloth with a suitable interior cleaner. soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss. Use
Clean the upholstery down to the seams using only water and suitable cleaning agents for
large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing the cleaning.
material vigorously. Treat especially worn rubber parts with rubber
care agents at regular intervals. When cleaning
Safety information rubber seals, do not use any silicon-containing
vehicle care products in order to avoid damage
NOTE
or noises.
Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
clothing can damage the seat covers. There is Fine wood parts
a risk of damage to property. Ensure that any
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood compo‐
Velcro® fasteners are closed.◀
nents only with a moist rag. Then dry with a
soft cloth.
Caring for special components
Plastic components
Light-alloy wheels
NOTE
When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to 9. Cleansers that contain alcohol or sol‐
Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or steam vents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy-duty
jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the manufac‐ grease removers, fuel, or such, can damage
turer's instructions. plastic parts. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
erty. Clean with a microfiber cloth. Dampen
Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning agents
cloth lightly with water.◀
can destroy the protective layer of adjacent
components, such as the brake disc. Plastic components are e.g.:
After cleaning, apply the brakes briefly to dry ▷ Imitation leather surfaces.
them. The heat generated during braking dries ▷ Roofliner.
brake discs and brake pads and protects them
▷ Light lenses.
against corrosion.
▷ Instrument cluster cover.
Chrome surfaces ▷ Matt black spray-coated components.
Carefully clean components such as the radia‐ ▷ Painted parts in the car's interior.
tor grille or door handles with an ample supply Clean with a microfiber cloth.
of water, possibly with shampoo added, partic‐
Dampen cloth lightly with water.
272
Care Mobility
Do not soak the roofliner. Displays/Screens/protective glass of

the Head-up Display
Safety belts NOTE
WARNING Chemical cleansers, moisture or fluids of
Chemical cleansers can destroy the any kind can damage the surface of displays
safety belt webbing. Missing protective effect and screens. There is a risk of damage to prop‐
of the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries or erty. Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber
danger to life. Use only a mild soapy solution cloth.◀
for cleaning the safety belts.◀
NOTE
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
The surface of displays can be damaged
thus have a negative impact on safety.
with improper cleaning. There is a risk of dam‐
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the safety age to property. Avoid pressure that is too high
belts clipped into their buckles. and do not use any scratching materials.◀
Safety belts should only be allowed to retract if
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber cloth.
they are dry.
Clean the protective glass of the Head-up Dis‐
Carpets and floor mats play using a microfiber cloth and commercially
available dish-washing soap.
WARNING
Objects in the driver's floor area can limit Long-term vehicle storage
the pedal distance or block a depressed pedal. When the vehicle is shut down for longer than
There is a risk of an accident. Stow objects in three months, special measures must be
the vehicle such that they are secured and taken. Further information is available from a
cannot enter into the driver's floor area. Use dealer’s service center or another qualified
floor mats that are suitable for the vehicle and service center or repair shop.
can be safely attached to the floor. Do not use
loose floor mats and do not layer several floor
mats. Make sure that there is sufficient clear‐
ance for the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats
are securely fastened again after they were re‐
moved, for instance for cleaning.◀
Floor mats can be removed from the car's inte‐

rior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with a
microfiber cloth and water or a textile cleaner.
To prevent matting of the carpet, rub back and
forth in the direction of travel only.
Sensor/camera lenses
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of glass
detergent.
273
Reference
This chapter contains the technical data and an
index that will quickly take you to the information
you need.

Reference Technical data
Technical data
General information
The technical data and specifications in this the vehicle or can be obtained from a dealer’s
Owner's Manual are used as guidance values. service center or another qualified service cen‐
The vehicle-specific data can deviate from this, ter or repair shop.
for instance due to the selected special equip‐ The information in the vehicle documents al‐
ment, country version or country-specific ways has priority over the information in this
measurement method. Detailed values can be Owner's Manual.
found in the approval documents, on labels on
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the roof racks or spoiler. The heights can deviate,
model version, equipment or country-specific for instance due to the selected special equip‐
measurement method. ment, tires, load and chassis version.
The specified heights do not take into account
attached parts, for instance a roof antenna,
BMW 3 Series Gran Turismo
Width with mirrors inches/mm 80.6/2,047
Width without mirrors inches/mm 72/1,828
Height inches/mm 59.4/1,508
Length inches/mm 190/4,827
Wheelbase inches/mm 115/2,921
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 40.4/12.3
276
Technical data Reference
Weights
330i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 4,971/2,255
Load lbs/kg 919/417
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,271/1,030
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,811/1,275
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
340i xDrive
Approved gross vehicle weight lbs/kg 5,060/2,295
Load lbs/kg 919/417
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,359/1,070
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,811/1,275
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Capacities
US gal/liters Notes
Fuel tank, approx. 15.8/60.0 Fuel quality, refer to

page 228.
277
Reference Appendix
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the ve‐
hicle are listed here.
Updates after the editorial

deadline
These chapters of the printed Owner's Manual
contain updates made after the editorial dead‐
line:
▷ Information: vehicle identification number,
refer to page 12.
278
Appendix Reference
279
Reference Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A All-season tires, see Winter Automatic recirculated-air
tires 237 control 188
ABS, Antilock Brake Sys‐ All-wheel-drive 154 Automatic tailgate 60
tem 152 Alternative oil types 252 Automatic transmission, see
ACC, Active Cruise Control Ambient light 125 Steptronic transmission 97
with Stop & Go function 159 Antifreeze, washer fluid 96 Automatic vehicle wash 270
Acceleration Assistant, see Antilock Brake System, AUTO program, automatic cli‐
Launch Control 101 ABS 152 mate control 187
Accessories and parts 8 Anti-slip control, see AUTO program, climate con‐
Activated-charcoal filter 189 DSC 152 trol 184
Activation times, parked-car Anti-theft protection, lug AUTO program, intensity 188
ventilation 190 bolts 244 Auto Start/Stop function 90
Active Blind Spot Detec‐ App, BMW Driver’s Guide 46 Auto washing 270
tion 148 Approach control warning AUX-IN port, see Owner's
Active Cruise Control with with City light braking func‐ Handbook for Navigation,
Stop & Go function tion 139 Entertainment, Communica‐
ACC 159 Approach control warning tion 6
Active rear spoiler 154 with light braking func‐ Average fuel consump‐
Adaptive brake lights, see tion 141 tion 116
Brake force display 150 Approved axle load 277 Average speed 116
Adaptive Light Control 123 Apps, see Owner's Handbook Axle loads, weights 277
Additives, oil 252 for Navigation, Entertain‐
After washing vehicle 271 ment, Communication 6 B
Airbags 127 Arrival time 116
Airbags, indicator and warn‐ Ashtray 196 Backrest curvature, see Lum‐
ing light 128 Assistance when driving bar support 74
Air circulation, see Recircu‐ off 158 Backrest, width 75
lated-air mode 184, 188 AUTO intensity 188 Band-aids, see First-aid
Air conditioning 184, 187 Automatic climate con‐ kit 266
Air, dehumidifying, see Air trol 183 Battery replacement, vehicle
conditioning 184, 187 Automatic climate control battery 261
Air distribution, with enhanced features 186 Battery replacement, vehicle
manual 185, 188 Automatic cruise control with remote control 54
Air flow, air conditioner 185 Stop & Go function 159 Battery, vehicle 260
Air flow, automatic climate Automatic Curb Monitor 81 Being towed, see Tow-start‐
control 188 Automatic deactivation, front- ing and towing 268
Air pressure, tires 230 seat passenger airbags 129 Belts, safety belts 76
Air vents, see Ventilation 189 Automatic headlight con‐ Beverage holder, cup
Alarm system 66 trol 122 holder 204
Alarm, unintentional 67 Automatic locking 66 Blocking, power window 69
Alertness assistant 150 Bluetooth connection 38
280
Everything from A to Z Reference
Blu-ray, see Owner's Hand‐ California Proposition 65 Central locking system 56

book for Navigation, Enter‐ Warning 8 Central screen, see Control
tainment, Communication 6 Calling up mirror adjust‐ Display 20
BMW Assist, see Owner's ment 65 Changes, technical, see For
Manual for Navigation, En‐ Calling up seat adjust‐ Your Own Safety 8
tertainment and Communi‐ ment 65 Changing parts 258
cation 6 Camera-based assistance Changing wheels 243
BMW Driver’s Guide app 46 systems, see Intelligent Changing wheels/tires 236
BMW Homepage 6 Safety 137 Chassis number, see Vehicle
BMW Internet page 6 Camera lenses, care 273 identification number 12
BMW maintenance sys‐ Camera, rearview cam‐ Check Control 106
tem 256 era 172 Checking the oil level elec‐
Bonus range, ECO PRO 219 Camera, Side View 175 tronically 250
Bottle holder, see Cup hold‐ Camera, Top View 176 Children, seating position 83
ers 204 Can holder, see Cup hold‐ Children, transporting
Brake assistant 152 ers 204 safely 83
Brake discs, break-in 210 Care, displays 273 Child restraint system 83
Brake force display 150 Care, vehicle 271 Child restraint system
Brake lights, brake force dis‐ Care, washing the vehi‐ LATCH 85
play 150 cle 270 Child restraint systems,
Brake pads, break-in 210 Cargo 213 mounting 84
Braking, information 211 Cargo area 198 Child safety locks 87
Breakdown assis‐ Cargo area, enlarging 199 Child seat, mounting 84
tance 264, 265 Cargo area, loading 214 Child seats 83
Breakdown assistance, Road‐ Cargo area, storage compart‐ Chrome parts, care 272
side Assistance 265 ments 205 Cigarette lighter 196
Break-in 210 Cargo cover 198 Cleaning, displays 273
Brightness of Control Dis‐ Cargo, stowing and secur‐ Climate control 183, 186
play 35 ing 214 Closing the tailgate with no-
Bulb replacement 258 Carpet, care 273 touch activation 59
Bulb replacement, front 259 Catalytic converter, see Hot Clothes hooks 205
Bulb replacement, LED head‐ exhaust gas system 211 Coasting 220
lights 259 CBS Condition Based Serv‐ Coasting with engine decou‐
Bulb replacement, rear 260 ice 256 pled, coasting 220
Bulbs and lights 258 CD/multimedia, see Owner's Coasting with idling en‐
Button, RES 162 Manual for Navigation, En‐ gine 220
Button, Start/Stop 88 tertainment and Communi‐ Cockpit 16
Bypassing, see Jump-start‐ cation 6 Combination switch, see Turn
ing 266 CD, see Owner's Handbook signals 92
for Navigation, Entertain‐ Combination switch, see
C ment, Communication 6 Wiper system 93
Center armrest 203 Comfort Access 57
Calendar, see Owner's Hand‐ Center console 18 COMFORT program, driving
book for Navigation, Enter‐ Central Information Display dynamics 157
tainment, Communication 6 (CID), see Control Dis‐ Compartments in the
play 20 doors 203
281
Compass 194 Cornering light 123 Dimensions 276

Compatible devices, see Suit‐ Corrosion on brake discs 212 Dimmable exterior mirrors 81
able devices 38 Cosmetic mirror 196 Dimmable interior mirror 82
Compressor 239 Coupling, see Pairing 37 Direction indicator, see Turn
Computer, see Onboard Courtesy lights during un‐ signals 92
Computer 115 locking 53 Display in windshield 118
Concierge Service, see Own‐ Courtesy lights with the vehi‐ Display lighting, see Instru‐
er's Handbook for Naviga‐ cle locked 53 ment lighting 125
tion, Entertainment, Com‐ Cruise control 165 Displays 103
munication 6 Cruise control, active with Displays, care 273
Condensation on win‐ Stop & Go function 159 Disposal, coolant 255
dows 189 Cruise control with distance Disposal, vehicle battery 261
Condensation under the vehi‐ control, see Active cruise Distance control, see
cle 212 control, ACC 159 PDC 168
Condition Based Service Cruise control without dis‐ Distance to destination 116
CBS 256 tance control, see Cruise Divided screen view, split
Configuring driving pro‐ control 165 screen 27
gram 158 Cruising range 111 Drive-off assistant 158
Confirmation signal 65 Cup holders 204 Drive-off assistant, see
ConnectedDrive, see Owner's Current fuel consump‐ DSC 152
Manual for Navigation, En‐ tion 111 Driver assistance, see Intelli‐
tertainment and Communi‐ gent Safety 137
cation 6 D Driver profiles 62
Connecting device 37 Driver profiles, exporting pro‐
Connecting mobile phone 37 Damage, tires 236 files 64
Connecting smartphone 37 Damping control, dy‐ Driver profiles, importing pro‐
Connecting telephone 37 namic 154 files 64
Connections 37 Data memory 9 Driver’s Guide app, see BMW
Contacts, see Owner's Hand‐ Data protection, settings 36 Driver’s Guide app 46
book for Navigation, Enter‐ Data, technical 276 Driving Assistant, see Intelli‐
tainment, Communication 6 Date 34 gent Safety 137
Container for washer fluid 96 Date display 111 Driving Dynamics Con‐
Continued driving with a flat Daytime running lights 123 trol 156
tire 133, 137 DCC, see Cruise control 165 Driving instructions, break-
Control Display 20 Defrosting, see Defrosting the in 210
Control Display, settings 33 windows 185 Driving instructions, ECO
Controller 21, 22 Defrosting, see Windows, de‐ PRO 219
Control systems, driving sta‐ frosting 189 Driving mode 156
bility 152 Defrosting the windows 185 Driving notes, general 210
Convenient opening with the Dehumidifying, air 184, 187 Driving on racetracks 212
remote control 53 Deleting personal data 36 Driving stability control sys‐
Coolant 254 Deletion of personal data 36 tems 152
Coolant level 254 Destination distance 116 Driving style analysis 221
Coolant temperature 110 Device list 37 Driving tips 210
Cooling, maximum 187 Digital clock 111 DSC Dynamic Stability Con‐
Cooling system 254 Digital compass 194 trol 152
282
DTC Dynamic Traction Con‐ Energy Control 111 Exterior mirror, automatic
trol 153 Energy recovery 112 dimming feature 81
DVD, Video, see Owner's Engine, automatic Start/Stop Exterior mirrors 80
Handbook for Navigation, function 90 Exterior mirrors, malfunc‐
Entertainment, Communica‐ Engine, automatic switch- tion 81
tion 6 off 90 External start 266
Dynamic Damping Con‐ Engine compartment 248 External temperature dis‐
trol 154 Engine compartment, work‐ play 110
Dynamic Stability Control ing in 249 External temperature warn‐
DSC 152 Engine coolant 254 ing 110
Dynamic Traction Control Engine idling when driving,
DTC 153 coasting 220 F
Engine oil 250
E Engine oil, adding 251 Failure message, see Check
Engine oil additives 252 Control 106
ECO PRO 217 Engine oil change 252 False alarm, see Unintentional
ECO PRO bonus range 219 Engine oil filler neck 251 alarm 67
ECO PRO display 217 Engine oil temperature 110 Fan, see Air flow 185, 188
ECO PRO driving mode 217 Engine oil types, alterna‐ Fastening safety belts, see
ECO PRO driving style analy‐ tive 252 Safety belts 76
sis 221 Engine oil types, suitable 252 Filler neck for engine oil 251
ECO PRO mode 217 Engine start, jump-start‐ Finding charging stations, see
ECO PRO tips 219 ing 266 Charging stations and points
Efficiency display, ECO Engine start, see Starting the of interest, see Owner's
PRO 219 engine 89 Handbook for Navigation,
Efficient driving 219 Engine stop 89 Entertainment, Communica‐
EfficientDynamics informa‐ Engine temperature 110 tion 6
tion 220 Entering a destination, see Fine wood, care 272
Electronic oil measure‐ Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ First-aid kit 266
ment 250 gation, Entertainment, Com‐ Flat tire, changing
Electronic Stability Program munication 6 wheels 243
ESP, see DSC 152 Entering an address, naviga‐ Flat tire message, FTM 136
E-mail, see Owner's Hand‐ tion, see Owner's Manual for Flat tire message, TPM 133
book for Navigation, Enter‐ Navigation, Entertainment Flat Tire Monitor FTM 135
tainment, Communication 6 and Communication 6 Flat tire, repairing 239
Emergency release, fuel filler Entering a vehicle wash 270 Flat tire, Tire Pressure Moni‐
flap 227 Equipment, interior 192 tor TPM 130
Emergency Request 264 Error displays, see Check Flat tire warning light,
Emergency service, see Control 106 FTM 136
Breakdown assistance 265 ESP Electronic Stability Pro‐ Flat tire warning light,
Emergency service, see gram, see DSC 152 TPM 133
Roadside Assistance 265 Exchanging wheels/tires 236 Flooding 211
Emergency unlocking, tail‐ Exhaust gas system 211 Floor carpet, care 273
gate 62 Exhaust, see Exhaust gas Floor mats, care 273
Emergency unlocking, trans‐ system 211 Fogged up windows 185
mission lock 101 Exiting a vehicle wash 270 Fold-away position, wiper 95
283
Fold back rear seat back‐ Entertainment, Communica‐ Hotel function, tailgate 62
rests 199 tion 6 Hot exhaust gas system 211
Foot brake 211 Gross vehicle weight, ap‐ Hotline, see Owner's Hand‐
For Your Own Safety 8 proved 277 book for Navigation, Enter‐
Front airbags 127 tainment, Communication 6
Front fog lights 124 H HUD Head-up Display 118
Front fog lights, LED, bulb re‐ Hydroplaning 211
placement 259 Handbrake, see Parking
Front lights 259 brake 92 I
Front-seat passenger airbags, Hand-held transmitter, alter‐
automatic deactivation 129 nating code 193 Ice warning, see External
Front-seat passenger airbags, Hands-free kit, see Owner's temperature warning 110
indicator light 130 Handbook for Navigation, Icy roads, see External tem‐
FTM Flat Tire Monitor 135 Entertainment, Communica‐ perature warning 110
Fuel 228 tion 6 Identification marks, tires 234
Fuel cap 226 Hazard warning flashers 264 Identification number, see Ve‐
Fuel consumption his‐ Head airbags 127 hicle identification num‐
tory 220 Headlight control, auto‐ ber 12
Fuel consumption, see Aver‐ matic 122 iDrive 20
age fuel consumption 116 Headlight courtesy delay fea‐ Ignition off 88
Fuel filler flap 226 ture 122 Ignition on 88
Fuel gauge 110 Headlight flasher 93 Indicator and warning lights,
Fuel quality 228 Headlight glass 259 see Check Control 106
Fuel recommendation 228 Headlights 259 Indicator light, see Check
Fuel, tank capacity 277 Headlights, care 271 Control 106
Fuse 262 Head restraints, front 77 Individual air distribu‐
Head restraints, rear 78 tion 185, 188
G Head-up Display 118 Individual settings, see Driver
Head-up Display, care 273 profiles 62
Garage door opener, see Head-up Display, see Mem‐ Inductive charging, see Wire‐
Integrated Universal Remote ory function 79 less charging, see Owner's
Control 192 Heated steering wheel 82 Handbook for Navigation,
Gasoline 228 Heavy cargo, stowing Entertainment, Communica‐
Gear shift indicator 113 cargo 214 tion 6
General driving notes 210 Height, vehicle 276 Inflation pressure, tires 230
General settings 33 High-beam Assistant 124 Inflation pressure warning
Glare shield 196 High beams 93 FTM, tires 135
Glass sunroof, initialize the High beams/low beams, see Info Display, see Onboard
system 70 High-beam Assistant 124 Computer 115
Glass sunroof, see Panoramic Hills 212 Information 6
glass sunroof 69 Hill start assistant, see Drive- Initialize, Tire Pressure Moni‐
Glove compartment 202 off assistant 158 tor TPM 131
GPS geolocation, vehicle po‐ Holder for beverages 204 Initializing, Flat Tire Monitor
sition 34 Homepage 6 FTM 136
GPS, navigation, see Owner's Hood 249 Instrument cluster 103
Handbook for Navigation, Horn 16
284
Instrument display, multifunc‐ Jump-starting 266 Loading 213

tional 103 Location, vehicle position 34
Instrument lighting 125 K Locking, automatic 66
Integrated key 55 Locking, settings 65
Integrated Owner's Manual in Keyless Go, see Comfort Ac‐ Low beams 121
the vehicle 45 cess 57 Low beams, automatic, see
Intelligent emergency Key, mechanical 55 High-beam Assistant 124
call 264 Key, see Remote control 52 Lower back support 74
Intelligent Safety 137 Kickdown, Steptronic trans‐ Lug bolt lock 244
Intended use 8 mission 99 Luggage rack, see Roof-
Intensity, AUTO pro‐ Knee airbag 128 mounted luggage rack 215
gram 188 Lumbar support 74
Interior equipment 192 L
Interior lights 125 M
Interior lights during unlock‐ Label on recommended
ing 53 tires 237 Maintenance 256
Interior lights with the vehicle Label, runflat tires 238 Maintenance require‐
locked 53 Lane departure warning 147 ments 256
Interior mirror 80 Lane threshold, warning 147 Maintenance, service require‐
Interior mirror, automatic dim‐ Language, on the Control ments 112
ming feature 82 Display 33 Maintenance system,
Interior mirror, compass 194 LATCH child restraint fixing BMW 256
Interior mirror, manually dim‐ system 85 Make-up mirror 196
mable 81 Launch Control 101 Malfunction displays, see
Interior motion sensor 67 Leather, care 271 Check Control 106
Internet connection 41 LED light, bulb replace‐ Manual air distribu‐
Internet hotspot 41 ment 259 tion 185, 188
Internet page 6 LEDs, light-emitting di‐ Manual air flow 185, 188
Interval display, service re‐ odes 259 Manual operation, fuel filler
quirements 112 Length, vehicle 276 flap 227
Interval mode 94 Light 121 Manual operation, PDC Park
In the vicinity of the center Light-alloy wheels, care 272 Distance Control 169
console 18 Light control 123 Manual operation, rearview
In the vicinity of the roof‐ Light-emitting diodes, camera 172
liner 19 LEDs 259 Manual operation, Side
In the vicinity of the steering Lighting 121 View 175
wheel 16 Light in the exterior mirror, Manual operation, Top
see Active Blind Spot De‐ View 177
J tection 148 Map update, see Owner's
Light replacement 258 Handbook for Navigation,
Jacking points for the vehicle Light replacement, front 259 Entertainment, Communica‐
jack 245 Light replacement, rear 260 tion 6
Jam protection system, glass Lights and bulbs 258 Matte finish 271
sunroof 70 Light switch 121 Maximum cooling 187
Jam protection system, win‐ List of all messages 35 Maximum speed, display 113
dows 68 Load 214
285
Maximum speed, winter Neck restraints, front, see Online Owner's Manual 47
tires 238 Head restraints 77 Opening and closing 52
Measurement, units of 34 Neck restraints, rear, see Opening the tailgate with no-
Medical kit 266 Head restraints 78 touch activation 59
Memory function 79 Neutral cleaner, see Wheel Operating concept, iDrive 20
Menu in instrument clus‐ cleaner 272 Operating via iDrive 22
ter 114 New wheels and tires 236 Operating with the Control‐
Menus 22 Notes, see Owner's Hand‐ ler 22
Menus, operating, iDrive 20 book for Navigation, Enter‐ Operation via touchscreen 25
Messages 35 tainment, Communication 6 Optional equipment 7
Messages, see Check Con‐ Outside air, see Automatic re‐
trol 106 O circulated-air control 188
Microfilter 185, 189 Overheating of engine, see
Minimum tread, tires 236 OBD Onboard Diagnosis 257 Coolant temperature 110
Mirror 80 OBD, see OBD Onboard Di‐ Owner's Manual media 45
Mirror, see Memory func‐ agnosis 257 Owner's Manual, printed 45
tion 79 Obstacle marking, rearview
Mobile communication devi‐ camera 174 P
ces in the vehicle 211 Octane rating, see Recom‐
Mobility System 239 mended fuel grade 229 Paint, vehicle 271
Modifications, technical, see Odometer 110 Panic alarm, see Panic
For Your Own Safety 8 Office, see Owner's Manual mode 66
Moisture in headlight 259 for Navigation, Entertain‐ Panic mode 66
Monitor, see Control Dis‐ ment and Communication 6 Panoramic glass sunroof 69
play 20 Oil 250 Parallel parking assistant 178
Mounting of child restraint Oil, adding 251 Park Distance Control
systems 84 Oil additives 252 PDC 168
MP3 player, see Audio, see Oil change 252 Parked-car ventilation 190
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ Oil change interval, service Parked vehicle, condensa‐
gation, Entertainment, Com‐ requirements 112 tion 212
munication 6 Oil filler neck 251 Parking aid, see PDC 168
Multifunctional instrument Oil types, alternative 252 Parking assistant 178
display 103 Oil types, suitable 252 Parking brake 92
Multifunction steering wheel, Old batteries, disposal 261 Parking lights 121
buttons 16 Onboard Computer 115 Parts and accessories 8
Music hard disk, see Owner's Onboard literature, Passenger's side mirror, tilt‐
Handbook for Navigation, printed 45 ing downward 81
Entertainment, Communica‐ Onboard vehicle tool kit 258 Pathway lines, rearview cam‐
tion 6 On-call service, see Break‐ era 173
down assistance 265 PDC Park Distance Con‐
N On-call service, see Roadside trol 168
Assistance 265 Personal profile, see Driver
Navigation, see Owner's Online Entertainment, see profiles 62
Manual for Navigation, En‐ Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ Person warning with City light
tertainment and Communi‐ gation, Entertainment, Com‐ braking function 144
cation 6 munication 6 Plastic, care 272
286
Power failure 261 Remaining range 111 Route, navigation, see Own‐
Power windows 68 Remote control, additional 54 er's Handbook for Naviga‐
Prescribed engine oil Remote control for audio, see tion, Entertainment, Com‐
types 252 Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ munication 6
Pressure, tires 230 gation, Entertainment, Com‐ RSC Runflat System Compo‐
Pressure warning FTM, munication 6 nent, see Runflat tires 238
tires 135 Remote control, integrated RTTI, see Owner's Handbook
Printed onboard literature 45 key 55 for Navigation, Entertain‐
Profiles, see Driver pro‐ Remote control, loss 54 ment, Communication 6
files 62 Remote control, malfunc‐ Rubber components,
Programmable memory but‐ tion 55 care 272
tons, iDrive 28 Remote control, opening/ Runflat tires 238
Protective function, glass closing 52
sunroof 70 Remote control, univer‐ S
Protective function, win‐ sal 192
dows 68 Remote services, App, see Safe braking 211
Push-and-turn reel, see Con‐ Owner's Handbook for Navi‐ Safety belt reminder for driv‐
troller 21, 22 gation, Entertainment, Com‐ er's seat and front passen‐
munication 6 ger seat 77
R Replacing parts 258 Safety belts 76
Replacing wheels/tires 236 Safety belts, care 273
Racetrack operation 212 Reporting safety malfunc‐ Safety locks, doors, and win‐
Radiator fluid 254 tions 12 dows 87
Radio-operated remote con‐ RES button 162 Safety switch, windows 69
trol, opening/closing 52 RES button, see Active Safety systems, airbags 127
Radio-ready state 88 Cruise Control ACC 159 Saving fuel 216
Radio, see Owner's Manual RES button, see Cruise con‐ Screen, see Control Dis‐
for Navigation, Entertain‐ trol 165 play 20
ment and Communication 6 Reserve warning, see Screwdriver, see Onboard ve‐
Rain sensor 94 Range 111 hicle tool kit 258
Rear lights 260 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor Sealant 239
Rear socket 197 TPM 131 Seat heating, front 75
Rear spoiler, active 154 Retreaded tires 237 Seat heating, rear 75
Rear turn signal, bulb replace‐ Roadside Assistance 265 Seating position for chil‐
ment 260 Roadside Assistancee, see dren 83
Rearview camera 172 Breakdown assistance 265 Seat, see Memory func‐
Rear window de‐ Roadside parking lights 121 tion 79
froster 185, 189 Rolling code hand-held trans‐ Securing cargo 214
Recirculated-air filter 189 mitter 193 Selection list in instrument
Recirculated-air RON recommended fuel cluster 114
mode 184, 188 grade 229 Selector lever, see Steptronic
Recommended fuel Roofliner 19 transmission 97
grade 229 Roof load capacity 277 Sensors, care 273
Recommended tire Roof-mounted luggage Service and warranty 9
brands 237 rack 215
Refueling 226
287
Service requirements, Condi‐ Entertainment, Communica‐ Stowing and securing

tion Based Service tion 6 cargo 214
CBS 256 Speed, average 116 Suitable devices 38
Service requirements, dis‐ Speed Limit Info 113 Suitable engine oil types 252
play 112 Speed Limit Info, Onboard Suitable mobile phones 38
Services, ConnectedDrive, Computer 116 Summer tires, tread 235
see Owner's Manual for Speed limits, display 113 Sun visor 196
Navigation, Entertainment Speed warning 117 Supplementary Owner's
and Communication 6 Split screen 27 Manuals 45
Servotronic 158 SPORT+ - program, driving Supplementary SMS text
SET button, see Active dynamics 156 message 109
Cruise Control ACC 159 Sport displays, torque dis‐ Surround View 171
SET button, see Cruise con‐ play, performance dis‐ Switch for driving dynam‐
trol 165 play 117 ics 156
Settings, locking/unlock‐ SPORT program, driving dy‐ Switch, see Cockpit 16
ing 65 namics 157 Symbols 7
Settings on the Control Dis‐ Sport steering, variable 154 Symbols in the status field 27
play 33 Stability control systems 152
Shifting, Steptronic transmis‐ Standard equipment 7 T
sion 97 Start/stop, automatic func‐
Shift paddles on the steering tion 90 Tachometer 110
wheel 100 Start/Stop button 88 Tailgate, automatic 60
Shift point indicator 105 Starting the engine 89 Tailgate, closing with no-
Side airbags 127 Stations, AM/FM, see Own‐ touch activation 59
Side View 174 er's Handbook for Naviga‐ Tailgate, emergency unlock‐
Signaling, horn 16 tion, Entertainment, Com‐ ing 62
Signals when unlocking 65 munication 6 Tailgate, hotel function 62
Sitting safely 72 Status control display, Tailgate, opening with no-
Size 276 tires 131 touch activation 59
Slide/tilt glass roof 69 Status information, iDrive 27 Tailgate via remote con‐
Smallest turning radius 276 Status of Owner's Manual 7 trol 53
SMS, see Short messages, Status, vehicle 119 Tail lights 260
see Owner's Handbook for Steering assistance 158 Technical changes, see For
Navigation, Entertainment, Steering wheel, adjusting 82 Your Own Safety 8
Communication 6 Steptronic Sport transmis‐ Technical data 276
SMS text message, supple‐ sion, see Steptronic trans‐ Telephone, see Owner's
mentary 109 mission 97 Manual for Navigation, En‐
Snow chains 242 Steptronic transmission 97 tertainment and Communi‐
Socket 197 Stopping the engine 89 cation 6
Socket, OBD Onboard Diag‐ Storage compartment in the Teleservices, see Owner's
nosis 257 rear 204 Handbook for Navigation,
Software update 43 Storage compartments 202 Entertainment, Communica‐
SOS button 264 Storage compartments, loca‐ tion 6
Sound output, see Owner's tions 202 Television, TV, see Owner's
Handbook for Navigation, Storage, tires 238 Handbook for Navigation,
Storing the vehicle 273
288
Entertainment, Communica‐ Traffic bulletins, see Owner's V

tion 6 Handbook for Navigation,
Temperature, automatic cli‐ Entertainment, Communica‐ Vanity mirror 196
mate control 184, 186 tion 6 Variable sport steering 154
Temperature display for ex‐ Transmission lock, electronic Vehicle battery 260
ternal temperature 110 unlocking 101 Vehicle battery, replac‐
Temperature, engine oil 110 Transmission, Steptronic ing 261
Terminal, starting aid 267 transmission 97 Vehicle, break-in 210
Theft alarm system, see Transporting children Vehicle care 271
Alarm system 66 safely 83 Vehicle care products 271
Thigh support 74 Tread, tires 235 Vehicle features and op‐
Tilt alarm sensor 67 Trip computer 116 tions 7
Time 33 Triple turn signal activa‐ Vehicle identification num‐
Time of arrival 116 tion 93 ber 12
Tire damage 236 Trip odometer 110 Vehicle jack 245
Tire identification marks 234 Trip recorder, see Trip odom‐ Vehicle paint 271
Tire inflation pressure 230 eter 110 Vehicle position, vehicle loca‐
Tire inflation pressure moni‐ Trunk emergency unlock‐ tion 34
tor, see FTM 135 ing 62 Vehicle status 119
Tire pressure 230 Turning circle 276 Vehicle storage 273
Tire Pressure Monitor Turning radius lines, rearview Vehicle wash 270
TPM 130 camera 173 Vehicle, washing 270
Tire repair kit, see Mobility Turn signals, operation 92 Ventilation 189
System 239 TV, see Owner's Handbook Ventilation, see Parked-car
Tires, changing 236 for Navigation, Entertain‐ ventilation 190
Tire sealant, see Mobility ment, Communication 6 VIN, see Vehicle identification
System 239 number 12
Tires, everything on wheels U Voice activation system 30
and tires 230 Voice command response,
Tires, runflat 238 Unintentional alarm 67 see Owner's Handbook for
Tire tread 235 Units of measurement 34 Navigation, Entertainment,
Tone, see Owner's Manual for Universal remote control 192 Communication 6
Navigation, Entertainment Unlock button, see Steptronic
and Communication 6 transmission 97 W
Tool 258 Unlocking, settings 65
Top View 176 Updates made after the edito‐ Warning and indicator lights,
Total vehicle weight 277 rial deadline 7 see Check Control 106
Touchpad 26 Upholstery care 272 Warning displays, see Check
Touchscreen 25 USB connection 40 Control 106
Towing 268 USB interface, position in ve‐ Warning light in the exterior
Tow-starting 268 hicle 198 mirror, see Active Blind Spot
TPM Tire Pressure Moni‐ USB port, see USB inter‐ Detection 148
tor 130 face 198 Warning messages, see
Traction control 153 Use, intended 8 Check Control 106
TRACTION, driving dynam‐ Warning triangle 266
ics 153 Warranty 8
289
Washer fluid 96 gation, Entertainment, Com‐

Washer nozzles, wind‐ munication 6
shield 95 Wireless charging, see Wire‐
Washer system 93 less charging, see Owner's
Washing the vehicle 270 Handbook for Navigation,
Water on roads 211 Entertainment, Communica‐
Weights 277 tion 6
Welcome lights 122 Wood, care 272
Welcome lights during un‐ Word match concept, naviga‐
locking 53 tion 24
Wheelbase, vehicle 276 Wrench, see Onboard vehicle
Wheel cleaner 272 tool kit 258
Wheels, changing 236
Wheels, everything on wheels X
and tires 230
Wheels, Flat Tire Monitor xDrive 154
FTM 135
Wheels, Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor TPM 130
Width, vehicle 276
WiFi connection 41
Window defroster,
rear 185, 189
Windows, powered 68
Windshield washer fluid 96
Windshield washer noz‐
zles 95
Windshield washer sys‐
tem 93
Windshield washer system,
see Washer/wiper sys‐
tem 93
Windshield wiper, see Wiper
system 93
Winter storage, care 273
Winter tires, suitable
tires 237
Winter tires, tread 236
Wiper 93
Wiper blades, replacing 258
Wiper fluid 96
Wiper, fold-away position 95
Wiper system 93
Wireless charging dock, see
Owner's Handbook for Navi‐
290
More about BMW
The Ultimate
bmwusa.com Driving Machine®
01402984489 ue
*BL2984489000*

BMW Owner's+Manual 01402984489

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

BMW Owner's+Manual 01402984489

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Contents Owner's Manual

A-Z The Ultimate

THE BMW 3 SERIES

Online Edition for Part no. 01402984489 - X/17

The Owner's Manual is available in many countries as an app.

Online Edition for Part no. 01402984489 - X/17

Online Edition for Part no. 01402984489 - X/17

Online Edition for Part no. 01402984489 - X/17

Symbols and displays Vehicle features and options

Action steps Status of the Owner's

Intended use Parts and accessories

Services from the vehicle

▷ Whether or not the driver and passenger

Reporting safety defects

However, NHTSA cannot become involved in

For Canadian customers

Online Edition for Part no. 01402984489 - X/17

In the vicinity of the steering wheel

1 Active rear spoiler 154 Active Blind Spot Detec‐

3 Power windows 68 Intelligent Safety 137

Front fog lights 124 Cruise control: resume speed

Light switch 121 Active Cruise Control: reduce

Lights off Active Cruise Control: increase

Parking lights 121 Cruise control rocker switch

Adaptive light functions 123 Volume, see Owner's Manual for

7 Steering column stalk, left Telephone, see Owner's Manual

12 Start/stop the engine and switch

Active Cruise Control on/off, in‐

14 Heated steering wheel 82 16 Open the tailgate 60

15 Adjust steering wheel 82

In the vicinity of the center console

1 Control Display 20 9 PDC Park Distance Control 168

In the vicinity of the roofliner

1 Emergency Request, SOS 264 4 Reading lights 125

2 Panoramic glass sunroof 69 5 Interior lights 125

3 Indicator light, front-seat passen‐

Concept 1 Control Display, with touchscreen depend‐

Safety information General information

Controller with navigation system

Open destination input menu for

Open navigation map.

Press once: open the previous dis‐

Controller without navigation system Buttons on the Controller

General information Button Function

Press once: open the previous dis‐

Open the Options menu.

Operating with the Controller

▷ Move in two directions.

The main menu is displayed.

Adapting the main menu

1. Press the button twice.

2. Select a menu item.

Selecting menu items

Opening recently used menus

Opening the Options menu

Menu items in the Owner's Manual

Changing between displays

▷ Press button. ▷ Screen settings, for instance "Split

Enter the letters.

Enter the numbers.

or Change between capital and

Activating/deactivating the functions Entry comparison

Symbol Function 2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.